News EPLAN 20 en US PDF

EPLAN NEWS
for Version 2.0
Copyright 2010 EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG

EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG assumes no liability for either technical or printing errors,
or for deficiencies in this technical information and cannot be held liable for damages that may result
directly or indirectly from the delivery, performance, and use of this material.
This document contains legally protected proprietary information that is subject to copyright. All rights
are protected. This document or parts of this document may not be copied or reproduced by any other
means without the prior consent of EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG.
The software described in this document is subject to a licensing agreement. The use and reproduction of the software is only permitted within the framework of this agreement.
RITTAL is a registered trademark of Rittal GmbH & Co. KG.
EPLAN , EPLAN Electric P8 , EPLAN Fluid , EPLAN PPE , and EPLAN Cabinet are registered
trademarks of EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG.
Windows NT , Windows 2000 , Windows XP , Windows Vista , Microsoft Windows , Microsoft
Excel , Microsoft Access , and Notepad are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
PC WORX , CLIP PROJECT , and INTERBUS are registered trademarks of Phoenix Contact
GmbH & Co.
AutoCAD and AutoCAD Inventor are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
STEP 7 , SIMATIC and SIMATIC HW Konfig. are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
InstallShield is a registered trademark of InstallShield, Inc.
Adobe Reader and Adobe Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
TwinCAT is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH.
Unity Pro is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.
RSLogix 5000 and RSLogix Architect are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
All other product names and trade names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
EPLAN uses the Open Source software 7-Zip (7za.dll), Copyright by Igor Pavlov. The source code
of 7-Zip is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The source code of 7-Zip and
details on this license can be found on the following Web site: http://www.7-zip.org
EPLAN uses the Open Source software Open CASCADE, Copyright by Open CASCADE S.A.S.
The source code of Open CASCADE is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License.
The source code of Open CASCADE and details on this license can be found on the following Web
site: http://www.opencascade.org
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................. 15
Notes for the reader ........................................................................................... 16
More User-friendly Interface .............................................................. 18

New Icons with Greater Color Depth ................................................................. 18
Faster Access via New Mini Toolbars ............................................................... 19
New Repeat Action Menu Option ...................................................................... 20
Adjustable Display in the Title Bar .................................................................... 21
Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the Properties Dialog ...................... 22
New Functionalities for Graphical Elements .................................... 24

New Editing Functionalities ............................................................................... 24
Trimming graphical elements ............................................................................. 24
Cutting off elements ........................................................................................... 25
Changing lengths of lines and arcs .................................................................... 26
Filleting / chamfering corners ............................................................................. 27
Drawing a Rectangle through Center ................................................................ 29
Drawing Assistance with Perpendicular and Tangential Points ..................... 30
Perpendicular and tangential points ................................................................... 30
Perpendicular or tangential mode when drawing ............................................... 31
Drawing perpendicular or tangential lines .......................................................... 31
Defining a radius through a tangential point....................................................... 32
Line projection ................................................................................................... 32
Input Box for Editors .......................................................................................... 33
Using the input box ............................................................................................ 34
Functions with input-box support ....................................................................... 35
Activating the input box ...................................................................................... 35
Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes ................................................. 37

Elliptical Text Boxes ........................................................................................... 38
Elliptical Alignment Boxes and Leader Lines .................................................. 39
New Features in Dimensioning .......................................................... 41

New Project-wide Settings for Dimensioning ................................................... 41
New Settings in the Properties Dialog .............................................................. 45
New Features in the Page Navigator ................................................. 47

Page Filter with Schemes................................................................................... 47
Specifying page filters via default filter ............................................................... 47
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Specifying page filters via detailed selection...................................................... 48
Selection in the Page List Takes Place when Scrolling Pages ....................... 49
Automatic Page Names when Inserting Pages or Macros .............................. 49
Customizing the Displayed DT for Location Boxes when Inserting
Pages or Macros ................................................................................................. 50
Determining Number of Pages / Page Name per Property .............................. 51
Using Terminals .................................................................................. 53

Using Main Terminals ......................................................................................... 53
Managing terminal strips .................................................................................... 55
Managing terminal strips as in the previous versions......................................... 55
Definition of multi-level terminals ....................................................................... 55
Converting older projects and macros ............................................................... 57
Terminal Strip and Terminal Accessories ........................................................ 58
Defining alignable accessories for terminals ...................................................... 58
New Features in Editing Terminal Strips .......................................................... 60
Assigning alignable accessories when editing terminal strips ............................ 60
Information about terminal connection points .................................................... 62
Generating saddle jumpers manually................................................................. 62
External / internal saddle jumpers ...................................................................... 63
New Features in the Terminal Strip Navigator ................................................. 64
Display in the navigator...................................................................................... 64
Generating new terminals .................................................................................. 64
Sorting terminals of a terminal strip ................................................................... 65
New Function Definitions for Terminals ........................................................... 65
New properties for characterizing terminals ....................................................... 66
Online Numbering of Terminal Sort Codes ...................................................... 66
Online numbering of terminal and pin designations ........................................... 67
Extended Reports for Terminals ....................................................................... 68
Output terminal connection point in addition to target ........................................ 68
Terminal report generation in relation to connection points or targets ............... 68
Optimized Database Structure for Projects ...................................... 69

Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin ............................ 71
PDF Export in Archiving Format ........................................................ 72
Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists ........................ 73
Managing Accessory Parts in Parts Management ........................................... 73
Clear identification of parts as accessories ........................................................ 73
Displaying accessory parts in parts management .............................................. 74
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Using accessory lists ......................................................................................... 76
Assigning accessories to a main part................................................................. 77
Data transfer on update of the parts database................................................... 78
Accessory Parts in Device Selection ................................................................ 79
Changes in the "Device selection" Dialog .......................................................... 80
Selecting accessories ........................................................................................ 81
Check Run for Missing, Required Accessory Parts......................................... 83
Changes to the Device Selection Settings ....................................................... 83
New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On....................................................... 86

Protected Devices ............................................................................... 89
Assigning Protection .......................................................................................... 90
Protecting functions or connections ................................................................... 90
Protecting devices.............................................................................................. 91
Removing device protection............................................................................... 92
Using Protected Devices .................................................................................... 93
Creating macros / copies of protected devices .................................................. 93
Deleting functions .............................................................................................. 93
Using existing functions / assigning functions .................................................... 94
Actions in the graphical editor ............................................................................ 94
Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function ...................... 94
Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on ... 97

Defining Multi-line Connections on a Single-line Connection Point .............. 98
Defined multi-line connections in the connection navigator ............................. 101
New messages for defined multi-line connections ........................................... 101
Graphical Device Tag List ................................................................ 102

Simple Graphical Device Tag Lists ................................................................. 102
Customizing forms for device tag lists.............................................................. 103
Specifying settings ........................................................................................... 104
Jumping to the schematic ................................................................................ 105
Graphical Device Tag Lists with Overviews ................................................... 105
Symbols for display in reports .......................................................................... 106
Data for reports ................................................................................................ 107
Conditional forms ............................................................................................. 108
Symbols for Complex Devices ......................................................... 113

New Device Connection Points ....................................................................... 114
Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template........................................ 117
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension"

Add-on ............................................................................................... 118
Improved Views in the PLC Navigator ............................................................ 119
Channel display in the PLC navigator .............................................................. 120
Inserting PLC Cards ......................................................................................... 123
Macro Placement .............................................................................................. 123
Assigning Functions ........................................................................................ 124
Taking account of the representation type ....................................................... 125
Using existing PLC connection points blockwise ............................................. 126
New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module ........................................ 127

Nets with Net-based Connections ................................................................... 129
Defining net-based connections....................................................................... 130
Disabling target specification of connection symbols ....................................... 132
Specifying Nets with Net-based Connections ................................................ 133
Inserting net definition points ........................................................................... 133
Defining daisy chains ....................................................................................... 135
Displaying Nets and Net-based Connections ................................................. 138
Net-based connections in the connections navigator ....................................... 138
Displaying nets in the potential navigator......................................................... 138
Highlighting nets .............................................................................................. 140
Editing Nets with Net-based Connections ...................................................... 141
Connecting nets ............................................................................................... 141
Modifying nets.................................................................................................. 142
Net-based connection reports .......................................................................... 143
Correcting connections .................................................................................... 144
New messages for net-based connections ...................................................... 145
New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration .......................... 146

EPLAN EMI Add-ons ......................................................................................... 146
Importing Mechanical Data .............................................................................. 147
Mechatronics Navigator ................................................................................... 147
Recognizing assignment status ....................................................................... 149
New filtering options in the navigator ............................................................... 149
Updating the mechanical model....................................................................... 150
Assigning data ................................................................................................. 151
Transfering data to Inventor ............................................................................. 151
Inserting a device tag into Inventor drawings ................................................... 152
Creating and reading information ..................................................................... 153
Calculating the connection length .................................................................... 153
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI ........................................................... 154
Settings for EPLAN EMI ................................................................................... 154
Addition for length calculation .......................................................................... 154
New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal ......................................... 156

Unique Part ID for Parts in the EPLAN Data Portal ........................................ 158
Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal................................................................. 159
Integration into the EPLAN platform ................................................................ 159
New Features in Device Numbering ................................................ 161

Subcounters in Offline Device Numbering ..................................................... 161
New Numbering Formats for Busbars ............................................................ 163
Safety-relevant Functions ................................................................ 164

Connections and Connection Numbering....................................... 166
Applying Predefined Values for Connection Colors and Cross-section /
Diameter ............................................................................................................ 166
Determining Connection Sources and Targets .............................................. 168
Aligning Connection Definition Point Placements with Each Other ............ 169
Resetting the Counter for Connection Numbering per Structure / Page ..... 171
Defining the counter reset range ...................................................................... 173
Numbering Card Power Supplies and Bus Cables with General
Connection Numbering .................................................................................... 173
Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform ........................ 175

Optimizing Performance by the Use of Modern Processors......................... 175
Use of multi-core processors ........................................................................... 175
Use of more updated processors ..................................................................... 175
Project Editing .................................................................................................. 176
New projects with current creation date and creator ........................................ 176
Automatic data format checking ....................................................................... 178
EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN Data Import ................................................................... 179
Symbol library sequence in the settings........................................................... 179
EPLAN 21 Data Import ...................................................................................... 180
Including net-based connections ..................................................................... 180
Inherit black box structures to interruption points ............................................. 180
Data Backup ...................................................................................................... 181
Distribution of directory information during data backup .................................. 181
Extended PDF and DXF / DWG Export of Pages ............................................ 186
Saving PDF settings as a scheme ................................................................... 187
New user-specific settings for export ............................................................... 188
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
PDF export with linked documents................................................................... 192
Exporting pages in PDF format ........................................................................ 192
Outputting 3D models in the PDF export ......................................................... 194
Finding and Replacing ..................................................................................... 195
Jumping forwards and backwards in the jump sequence of crossreferenced functions ........................................................................................ 195
Go to part assemblies ...................................................................................... 196
Including objects in the layout space in the search .......................................... 197
Influencing the Value and Unit Display ........................................................... 198
New display properties..................................................................................... 198
Using the new display properties ..................................................................... 201
New project setting for output of the unit.......................................................... 203
Enhancements to the EPLAN API ................................................................... 203
Graphical Editor ................................................................................................ 204
Rapid opening of page properties .................................................................... 204
Extending the search for path function text ...................................................... 204
Setting the displayed language of multilingual texts blockwise using actions .. 205
Multilingual texts for designation of hyperlinks ................................................. 206
Property texts for boxes when changing scale................................................. 207
Plug DT and channel designation retained when moved ................................. 207
Expansion of special characters ...................................................................... 208
Devices .............................................................................................................. 209
Extension to user-defined property arrangement ............................................. 209
Changing the graphic of black boxes and similar components via the
properties dialog .............................................................................................. 210
Properties dialog for bundle connection points ................................................ 211
Jump functions for location boxes .................................................................... 212
Plug DT for device connection points............................................................... 213
Considering part placements in global editing ................................................. 214
Adopting properties of the P&I diagram functions during synchronizing .......... 215
Assigning structure identifiers for part definition points .................................... 216
Allowing identical connection point designations for devices ........................... 217
Edit in Table ...................................................................................................... 218
Shortcut key to close edit in table .................................................................... 218
Project Data Navigators ................................................................................... 219
New jump functions in the connection navigator .............................................. 219
Placing macros ................................................................................................ 219
Placing all functions of a device ....................................................................... 221
Adjusting the column width .............................................................................. 221
Device group DT on associated devices .......................................................... 221
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Defined Devices ................................................................................................ 222
Taking account of macro variants .................................................................... 222
Representation types for unplaced functions ................................................... 222
Part Selection .................................................................................................... 224
Part selection with scheme selection ............................................................... 224
Do not show conflict dialog .............................................................................. 225
Modifications to part management during part selection .................................. 226
Symbol Editor ................................................................................................... 227
Reorganizing symbol libraries .......................................................................... 227
Displaying variants when paging in the symbol editor...................................... 227
Form Editor ....................................................................................................... 228
Combining overview reports ............................................................................ 228
Combining parts in enclosure legends ............................................................. 230
Conditional areas in dynamic forms ................................................................. 230
Suppressing blank data lines ........................................................................... 232
Renamed placeholder texts for the device tag list ........................................... 233
Outputting function data for the device tag list and symbol overview ............... 233
Regenerating headers without sorting ............................................................. 234
Outputting only connected connection points in connection diagrams ............. 234
Essential customization of user-defined connection diagram forms ................ 235
New placeholders for cable charts in terminal and plug diagrams ................... 236
Macros ............................................................................................................... 238
Description text for automatically generated page macros .............................. 238
Group macro boxes and associated objects .................................................... 238
Specifically assigning objects to macro boxes ................................................. 239
Placeholder Objects ......................................................................................... 240
Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects .............................. 240
New properties for placeholder objects ............................................................ 241
Simplified assignment ...................................................................................... 243
Reports .............................................................................................................. 244
Connection diagrams for wiring diagrams ........................................................ 244
Appending reports to the end........................................................................... 248
Sorting cable overviews according to source and target .................................. 249
Using page structure identifiers for reports ...................................................... 250
Creating report templates ................................................................................ 250
Copying and pasting function-related embedded reports................................. 250
Breaking up modules ....................................................................................... 251
Outputting part assemblies in labeling ............................................................. 252
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Parts Management ............................................................................................ 253
Improved full-text filter...................................................................................... 253
Additional selection option using the "Combination" tab .................................. 256
Creating subtrades for fluid power ................................................................... 256
Data field for the part number of an ERP system ............................................. 258
Entering barcodes for parts.............................................................................. 258
Clip-on height for placements on mounting rails .............................................. 259
Entering outline drawings in parts management .............................................. 261
New "Documents" tab ...................................................................................... 262
Assigning cables / connections to an image file ............................................... 263
Protecting data fields before updating.............................................................. 263
New synchronization of parts ........................................................................... 263
Updating parts when opening a project............................................................ 264
Additional menu items for the part master data navigator ................................ 265
Message Management ...................................................................................... 266
Improved ergonomics ...................................................................................... 266
New trade-specific filter settings ...................................................................... 267
New "Prevent errors" check type for error checking......................................... 268
Setting option for module-specific checks ........................................................ 269
Separate filters for running error checking ....................................................... 269
New check run for checking the online numbering format ............................... 270
New Features in the "Revision Management" Add-on .................................. 271
Renamed revision control operation ................................................................ 271
Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics ................................................ 272
Project completion enhancement ..................................................................... 275
Generating a report when completing a project and pages.............................. 277
Numbering the revision index .......................................................................... 278
Differing graphical markers for change tracking ............................................... 281
Alternative properties comparison ................................................................... 283
Comparing the properties of projects ............................................................... 283
Displaying results of properties comparison .................................................... 286
New settings for the property comparison of projects ...................................... 289
Project-specific databases for the comparison results ..................................... 290
Deleting revision data of the property comparison ........................................... 291
Displaying deleted objects ............................................................................... 292
Layout spaces in revision control ..................................................................... 297
New Features in the "Multi Language Translation" Add-on .......................... 299
Distinguishing between source language and displayed language .................. 299
Upper-/lower-case letters for the source language .......................................... 301
Text-based line breaks in translations.............................................................. 302
10
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Changed translation behavior on input ............................................................ 304
Exporting the missing-word list based on the dictionary .................................. 305
New messages for the translation .................................................................... 306
New Features in the "User Rights Management" Add-on ............................. 307
Assigning new rights ........................................................................................ 307
New Features in the "Mounting Panel" Add-on ............................................. 308
A clearer view in the navigator ......................................................................... 308
Placing terminal strips on the mounting panel ................................................. 309
Displaying the handles of part placements ...................................................... 310
Same legend item for identical devices............................................................ 311
Settings.............................................................................................................. 311
New action for importing settings ..................................................................... 311
Preceding sign for interruption point names..................................................... 313
New settings for displayed units of measure.................................................... 314
Renamed settings for graphical editing ............................................................ 315
Properties .......................................................................................................... 316
User-defined property configurations ............................................................... 316
Renamed project property ............................................................................... 317
New properties for device tags ........................................................................ 317
Other New Features in Utilities ........................................................................ 318
Extensions for automated editing ..................................................................... 318
Improved registration for add-ons .................................................................... 319
Improved display of system messages ............................................................ 320
Licensing ........................................................................................................... 321
Extensions to EPLAN License Manager .......................................................... 321
Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8................................................... 324

Terminals / Plugs .............................................................................................. 324
Terminal / pin and connection point descriptions ............................................. 324
Displaying saddle jumpers for "Interconnect devices"...................................... 326
New Features in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on.................................... 328
Configurable PLC connection points ................................................................ 328
Channels with several I/O connection points ................................................... 329
Blockwise use of existing PLC connection points and PLC boxes ................... 330
Interface for PLC data exchange with Rockwell ............................................... 330
Simplified data display when importing PLC data ............................................ 331
Extended part allocation when exporting and importing bus configurations..... 331
Cables ................................................................................................................ 332
Highlighting cable connections ........................................................................ 332
Ignoring subordinate DTs for nested targets .................................................... 333
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
11
Table of Contents
Inserting insulated wire terminations ................................................................ 334
Devices .............................................................................................................. 337
Inserting cable parts as devices ....................................................................... 337
Device Selection ............................................................................................... 339
Device selection for wires ................................................................................ 339
Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel .................................................... 342

Navigators for the 3D Mounting Layout .......................................................... 342
Logical structure in the layout space navigator ................................................ 342
Devices displayed in the layout space navigator ............................................. 343
Project structure in the 3D mounting layout navigator ..................................... 345
Filters in the navigators .................................................................................... 346
Creating and Opening a Layout Space ........................................................... 348
Placing Mounting Panels and Enclosures ...................................................... 349
Placing mounting panels .................................................................................. 349
Placing free mounting panels........................................................................... 351
Placing enclosures with mounting panels ........................................................ 352
Placing Components on Mounting Panels or Mounting Surfaces................ 354
Activating mounting surfaces / items automatically .......................................... 355
Activating mounting surfaces directly ............................................................... 355
Placing mounting rails and wire ducts .............................................................. 356
Inserting devices as defined devices ............................................................... 357
Defining locked areas ...................................................................................... 358
Changing the 3D View of the Layout Space ................................................... 359
Showing / hiding components from the layout space navigator ....................... 360
Showing / hiding individual components in the 3D view ................................... 361
Simplifying the object display ........................................................................... 361
Setting colors and / or transparency ................................................................ 362
Editing Objects in the Layout Space ............................................................... 363
Rotating objects about an axis ......................................................................... 363
Changing the length of objects in the layout space .......................................... 364
Measuring distances in the layout space ......................................................... 367
Displaying mounting clearances ...................................................................... 369
Macros for the 3D Mounting Layout ................................................................ 370
Importing a 3D graphic..................................................................................... 370
Uniting objects in the layout space................................................................... 371
Managing 3D macros in the macro project ...................................................... 371
Creating 3D macros ......................................................................................... 372
Inserting 3D macros ......................................................................................... 373
Changing the rotation angle when inserting 3D macros................................... 373
12
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Table of Contents
Editing the Device Logic .................................................................................. 374
Interactive points, lines, and areas in the device logic ..................................... 374
Defining the device logic .................................................................................. 375
Model Views for the 3D Mounting Layout ....................................................... 378
Inserting a model view ..................................................................................... 379
Updating the model view.................................................................................. 380
Modifying the contents of the model view ........................................................ 381
Outline Editor for Extrusions ........................................................................... 381
Creating outlines .............................................................................................. 382
Editing outlines ................................................................................................ 382
Importing and cleaning up outlines .................................................................. 383
Checking outlines............................................................................................. 384
Device Structure for Mechanical Devices ....................................................... 384
Online Numbering for Mechanical Devices .................................................... 385
Special Topics EPLAN PPE.............................................................. 386

Compressing and Reorganizing Projects ....................................................... 386
Redesigned Import of Loops and Consumers ............................................... 386
Including Parts from EPLAN PPE for Bills of Materials................................. 389
New Identifier for Measurands without Supplementary Letters ................... 390
Labeling and Scripts for EPLAN PPE P&ID .................................................... 390
Special Topics EPLAN View ............................................................. 391

User Settings for Multi-user Operation ........................................................... 391
New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on................................. 392

Direct Access to Parts Management Data ...................................................... 392
Access to Function Templates ........................................................................ 394
All Revision Control Functions are Available ................................................ 395
Other New Features in the EPLAN API ........................................................... 396
New Features in the Master Data ..................................................... 401

Enhanced Information in the Master Data Editor ........................................... 401
Master Data: Symbols ...................................................................................... 402
Master Data: Function Definition Library........................................................ 433
Master Data: Plot Frames ................................................................................. 436
Master Data: Settings for Messages and Check Runs .................................. 437
Master Data: Identifiers .................................................................................... 437
Master Data: Projects and Templates ............................................................. 438
Master Data: Workspace .................................................................................. 438
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
13
Table of Contents
Master Data: Schemes...................................................................................... 438
Other New Features and Information .............................................. 439

Customer Queries and Messages ................................................................... 439
Validation Code ................................................................................................. 442
Retrieving the validation code online ............................................................... 442
Installation and Subsequent Operation Steps ............................................... 444
Directory structure after installation ................................................................. 446
Automatically importing the settings of the previous version............................ 448
Synchronization with original EPLAN master data ........................................... 449
Software Requirements and Approvals .......................................................... 454
General requirements ...................................................................................... 454
Client operating systems.................................................................................. 454
Server operating systems ................................................................................ 454
EPLAN Mechatronic Integration ....................................................................... 455
Database systems for parts management / selection ...................................... 455
Microsoft Office Excel versions ........................................................................ 456
Internet browsers for the EPLAN Data Portal .................................................. 456
Unsupported operating systems ...................................................................... 456
EPLAN software no longer supported .............................................................. 456
Other software no longer supported ................................................................ 457
Hardware Requirements................................................................................... 457
Workstation hardware requirements ................................................................ 457
Recommended workstation configuration ........................................................ 458
Minimum net requirements .............................................................................. 458
Minimum multi-user requirements .................................................................... 458
14
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Preface
Preface
Dear EPLAN users,
We are delighted to introduce the new EPLAN platform 2.0. The focus is
on practical orientation: this latest development contains well over 1,000
new features, many of them requested by customers. The result is an
EPLAN platform which has been optimized across the board to support
consistent, time-efficient, and cost-saving engineering and cross-disciplinary cooperation.
Focus on ergonomics: with a new dialog layout, advanced filtering techniques, high-quality CAD functions, and redesigned toolbars, project
design is now even easier.
Focus on quality: device data from preplanning can now be protected
against unauthorized changes. This critical element for quality assurance
in engineering also complies with the requirements of the new Machinery
Directive (2006/42/EC). In addition, the new export format PDF/A supports additional requirements relating to the archiving of EPLAN project
documentation.
Focus on engineering: the new "Net Based Wiring" add-on can be used
to define detailed connections within a network at database level. It's an
ideal way of creating clear schematic layouts or simple daisy chains in
production. Keyword "mounting panel assemblies": these can now be defined in 3D in electrical engineering and fluid power design and be integrated directly into the EPLAN platform. The convenience of 3D the
simplicity of 2D.
This News document highlights many additional features of the new
version. We wish you every success with the new EPLAN platform 2.0.
Your EPLAN Software & Service team
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
15
Preface
Notes for the reader

Important information:
Before installing the new version please read the information in "Other
New Features and Information" from page 439 onwards. In particular
please read "Software Requirements and Approvals" on page 454.
Before opening old projects please read the information in "Optimized
Database Structure for Projects" on page 69.
For reasons of space the printed version of the News does not cover
all topics exhaustively. The installation DVD includes a PDF of the
complete version of the News.
Before you begin reading, please note the following symbols and styles
used in this document:
Warning:
Text preceded by this symbol contains a warning; you should be absolutely sure to read this warning before proceeding!
Note:
Text preceded by this image contains extra notes.
Example:
Examples are highlighted by this symbol.
Tip:
Useful tips to facilitate your interaction with the program are presented
after this image.
16
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Preface
Administrator:
The text introduced by these pictograms contains important information
for the administrator. You must always read the sections marked with
pictograms before working with the new version (see pages 307 and
444).
Project editor:
The texts introduced by these pictograms contain important information
for the "normal" users working on projects. You must always read the
sections marked with pictograms before working with the new version
(see pages 53, 69, and 236).
User interface elements are marked in bold (and blue) so they can
immediately be located in the text.
Italic text provides particularly important information that you should
definitely pay attention to.
Code examples, directory names, and direct input (among other elements) are displayed in a non-proportional font.
Function keys, keyboard keys, and buttons within the program are
shown in square brackets (e.g., [F1] for the "F1" function key).
To improve the flow of the text, we often use "menu paths" in this
document (for example, Help > Contents). In order to find a particular
program function, the menus and options shown in a menu path must
be selected in the sequence shown. For example, the menu path
mentioned above calls up the EPLAN help system.
In combination with settings or fields (e.g., check boxes) which can
only be switched on or off, in this document we often use the term
"activate" (after which the setting is active ) and "deactivate" (after
which the setting is inactive ).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
17
More User-friendly Interface

We have significantly changed the appearance of EPLAN in some areas
and made it more user-friendly for you. The changes include the following new features:
New icons with greater color depth
Mini toolbars in the editors (see page 19)
Repeat menu option in the editors' popup menus (see page 20)
Adjustable display in the title bar (see page 21)
Clearer Display and Format tabs in the properties dialog (see
page 22).
New Icons with Greater Color Depth

New, updated icons with a greater color depth are now used for toolbars,
for the cursor, and for the display of objects in the navigators and other
dialogs. The color depth with approx. 16.78 million colors now permits
detailed illustrations giving the user a very natural impression.
Benefit: The program functionalities assigned to the icons are clearly
recognizable, making use of the program via the icons substantially more intuitive. A decisive advantage, especially for
the occasional user, is the adjustment of the icons to the
Windows standard (same icons => same functionalities).
Example:
The following figure shows the "old" Standard toolbar for an opened
project.
And in comparison, here is the "new" Standard toolbar.
18
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Faster Access via New Mini Toolbars

There are now new mini toolbars when working in the editors (graphical
editor, symbol editor, etc.) for text and graphical elements.
Benefit: With the help of the mini toolbars you can edit text and
graphical elements fast and directly without having to
navigate through the main menu.
If the Mini toolbars option is activated, a semi-transparent toolbar is displayed in miniature format when you check a corresponding individual
element. Move the cursor away from the checked element and the mini
toolbar disappears. If you place the cursor above the toolbar it becomes
fully visible and you can carry out the desired settings.
Example:
Mini toolbars let you select line settings options such as Line thickness
and Color and / or copy or apply a format to the selected line.
The mini toolbars give you access to the following functionalities:

Text elements:
Font size, Font style, Copy format, Assign format, Color.
Graphical elements:
Line type, Line thickness, Copy format, Assign format, Color.
You can decide in the Options menu whether to display mini toolbars or
not with the new Mini toolbars menu option or switch them on or off with
button in the View toolbar. The new "Mini toolbars on / off"
the new
right has been incorporated into the rights management for this menu
option.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
19
The mini toolbars are displayed only when an individual element is selected. If the selected element is blocked due to access to multiusermode or if the project has been opened with write-protection (e.g. for a
filed project), the fields and symbols of the mini toolbars are grayed out.
Notes:
Note that you can use either the Mini toolbars option or the Direct
editing option. Working with mini toolbars is activated by default. The
Mini toolbars option is switched off when you activate direct editing.
It is also possible to deactivate both options.
If direct editing is activated temporarily, however, using [F2], then
both the mini toolbar and the direct editing box are visible. The respective values in this field are checked and can be directly edited.
Click on the mini toolbar or on the page in the graphical editor to
deactivate "temporary" direct editing.
You can set the degree of transparency of the mini toolbars using the
same settings as for the input boxes (Transparency level (without
focus) / Transparency level (with focus)). The menu path is as follows: Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Input box /
Mini toolbars.
New Repeat Action Menu Option

The popup menus of the different editors (graphical editor, symbol editor,
etc.) have been amended to include the Repeat menu option. You can
use this menu option to repeat the last action performed in the editor.
Benefit: The quick combination of two mouse clicks one right-click
(to request the popup menu), one left-click (to select Repeat)
enables users to repeat the last performed action as many
times as required. This enables you to greatly accelerate a
sequence of repeated actions.
20
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The Repeat menu option is always the first option in the popup menu
and the action to be repeated is displayed after the colon (e.g. Repeat:
Angle down, right). Undo, Undo list, Redo, Redo list, and Cancel
action can not be repeated. These actions are therefore not listed in the
Repeat menu option.
Adjustable Display in the Title Bar

EPLAN lets you define which information you wish to have displayed in
the title bar of your EPLAN application in addition to the program name.
Benefit: You can set the display in the title bar individually. You can
be kept fully informed about the current open project via the
optional display of a project path to prevent you from inadvertently editing the wrong project.
You can choose the settings in the new Display in title bar drop-down
list. The menu path to the corresponding settings dialog is: Options >
Settings > User > Display > User interface. You can choose between
the following options:
Project path+Project+Page: If you select this option, the title bar
displays the project name with the file path and the page.
Project+Page: If you select this option, the title bar displays only the
project name and page.
Page: If you select this option, the title bar displays only the page.
In this case the name of the current open page is displayed in square
brackets in the title bar (e.g. [=EB3+ET1/1]). If there is no page open in
the graphical editor, no page name will be displayed.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
21
Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the Properties

Dialog
The Display and Format tabs for the properties dialogs of graphical
symbols and texts have been redesigned for the new version. All properties settings (Font size, Color, Border, etc.) are now shown in a new
table with a tree structure.
Benefit: All display or format settings are now clearly listed. These
properties settings are now quicker and easier to change.
If, for example, you have checked a property for a general device on the
left-hand side in the Component or Connection points tab, e.g. DT
(displayed), you can edit its display properties in the Property / Assignment table on the right-hand side.
22
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
To change the value assigned to a property, click in the corresponding

cell of the Assignment column and select another value from the dropdown list using
or select the relevant check box.
Since the different "Settings areas" such as Format, Border, Value /
unit or Position are displayed in the table as hierarchy levels, the secondary Border dialog for the device and the Language and Border tabs
for texts are now superfluous.
Under Format you can find display properties such as Font size, Layer,
Language, etc., and under Border you can find properties such as Draw
text box, Activate alignment box, etc. The new Value / unit area contains properties for the display of values and units. The properties under
Position all relate to a main property.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
23
New Functionalities for Graphical Elements

The following new functionalities are now available for editing and
drawing graphical elements in the editors (graphical editor, symbol
editor, etc.):
Cut off (see page 25)
Change length (see page 26)
Fillet corners and Chamfer (see page 27)
Rectangle through center (see page 29)
New Perpendicular and Tangential snap points and modes for
drawing graphical elements (see page 30)
Input box for editors (see page 33).
New Editing Functionalities

The four new functionalities, Cut off, Change length, Fillet corners,
and Chamfer have been added to the Edit menu together with the existing editing functionalities Rotate, Mirror, Scale, and Stretch under the
new Graphic menu option.
Benefit: The new editing functionalities enable the simple and rapid
change of graphical elements for the precise construction of
component contours and graphical macros.
Trimming graphical elements

Trim functionalities are tools which let you change the lengths of graphical elements retrospectively. The two trim functionalities Cut off and
Change length let you cut off, extend, or shorten graphical elements. It
is not possible to select multiple elements.
Nor can a group of graphical elements be trimmed. To trim an individual
element you first need to disable the grouping.
24
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Note:
Note that the trimming of graphical elements does not take into account
splines. Nor can you cut ellipses from splines and ellipses.
Cutting off elements

When cutting off, determine with a mouse click which part of a graphical
object is to be "cut off" (erased). The part to be removed can be defined
for a line as follows:
Via one or two intersections
Beispiel:
A section is cut off at the tangential point.

Via an intersection and an end point
Beispiel:
Several sections are cut off between the intersection and end points.

Via two end or corner points.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
25
Cutting off sections is possible for the following elements:

Line
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
Circle
Arc
Sector
Ellipse.
Graphical elements comprising just a line and not intersecting with other
elements are fully erased.
To cut a section off a graphical object, select the Edit > Graphic > Cut
(Cut off) button in the Edit graphic
off menu option (or click on the
toolbar). Click on the desired section of a line or a graphical object. The
selected section is removed. The trim functionality remains active until
you select Popup menu > Cancel action.
Changing lengths of lines and arcs

You can use the Change length functionality to extend or shorten lines
and arcs. One end of the element to be trimmed always remains unchanged; the other end is moved to make the trimmed element shorter
or longer.
Example:
The end of a line is extended in the left-hand illustration and reduced in
the right-hand illustration.
26
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
To change the length of a line or an arc, select the menu option Edit >
Graphic > Change length (or click in the Edit graphic toolbar on the
(Change length) button). Click on the end of the line to be changed. By
moving the cursor in a particular direction you extend or shorten the corresponding line. The trim functionality remains active until you select
Popup menu > Cancel action.
Tips:
You can also open the input box when changing the length and extend / shorten the line by entering positive / negative values (see the
section "Input Box for Editors" on page 33).
If the Object snap option is activated, then ends, snap points, and
intersections with other lines are used as snap points when extending
/ shortening. The lines are then automatically connected to these snap
points when trimming.
Filleting / chamfering corners

Use the Fillet corners functionality to fillet enclosed angles of less than
180. Angles between open lines can not be filleted, i.e. lines cannot be
connected via the filleting function.
Example:
A corner of a rectangle is filleted with a radius of 16 mm.
You can use the Chamfer functionality to chamfer the corners of different elements symmetrically. This functionality can be used on enclosed
angles which are less than 180. In this case the original lines are shortened symmetrically by a value (the so-called chamfer width) which is
measured from the angle point.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
27
Example:
A corner of a rectangle is chamfered with a chamfer width of 16 mm.
Filleting / chamfering is available for the following elements in EPLAN:

The corner of two radiating lines
The corner between a line and a polyline
The corner between two polylines
The corners of polylines (open and closed)
Rectangles.
Filleting / chamfering rectangles will result in the rectangle being converted into a polygon with four segments (starting point of the first
polyline segment = start point of the rectangle).
To enable this, the Polyline tab has been amended to include the field
Radius. You can also use this field to change a fillet radius or fillet a
"straight" polyline segment.
28
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
To fillet a corner select the menu option Edit > Graphic > Fillet corners.
To chamfer a corner select the Chamfer menu option in the same menu.
Alternatively click on the
(Fillet corners) /
(Chamfer) button in the
Edit graphic toolbar.
Click on the corner to be filleted/ chamfered. Click to set the fillet radius /
chamfer width. The corner is correspondingly filleted / chamfered. Once
defined, a fillet radius / chamfer width is applied until you cancel the
action.
Notes:
If it is not possible to apply a selected fillet radius you will receive a
system message.
You can also fillet or chamfer corners of single elements in a group of
elements.
Tip:
Once you have chosen the corner to fillet or chamfer, you can also use
the opened window of the input box to set the fillet radius or the chamfer
width (see the section "Input Box for Editors" on page 33).
Drawing a Rectangle through Center

You can now also use the center and a corner point to define a rectangle. To do this select the menu option Insert > Graphic > Rectangle
through center. Start by defining the center of the rectangle and click
with the left-hand mouse button. Drag the rectangle out from the center
and click with the left-hand mouse button to set a corner point for the
button to select this functionality from the
rectangle. Click on the new
Graphic toolbar.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
29
Tip:
Rather than using the mouse you can also set the center and corner
points of the rectangle via the input box (see page 33). Since relative
coordinates are used when entering the second point and the input
relates to the center, the point entry for a corner point of the rectangle
(e.g. 20 20) corresponds to half the width and height of the rectangle
(e.g. 40 mm 40 mm).
Drawing Assistance with Perpendicular and Tangential

Points
When drawing graphical elements in the editors (graphical editor, symbol
editor, etc.) you are now assisted by new snap points (perpendicular and
tangential points).
Benefit: Drawing using tangential points assists you particularly when
constructing slotted holes which you define via two drill holes
connected by lines placed on the circle tangents. You then
use the Cut off functionality to erase the inner circle segments. The result is a fast, simple, and cleanly-constructed
slotted hole.
Perpendicular and tangential points

If the Object snap option is activated when drawing graphical elements,
or tangential
point is displayed at the cursor as
a perpendicular
soon as a perpendicular or tangential line element is possible.
If the Object snap option is deactivated, then these (and other) points
are not treated as snap points and are accordingly also not displayed.
30
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Perpendicular or tangential mode when drawing

Irrespective of whether the Object snap option is selected, the two new
modes Perpendicular and Tangential are available in the popup menu
when drawing particular graphical elements (lines, circles, etc.).
These functionalities can help you draw a perpendicular line or a tangent. Once you have selected a mode in the popup menu, the icon at the
cursor changes. The respective modes are available for the following
graphical elements:
Perpendicular mode (cursor:
):
for lines, polylines, and polygons
):
Tangential mode (cursor:
for lines, polylines, polygons, circles, arcs through center, and sectors.
Drawing perpendicular or tangential lines

With the help of the Perpendicular and Tangential modes you can draw
a line perpendicularly or tangentially to an object.
Defining the start point for a line
When drawing lines (polylines) you can use the new modes once to
define the start point for a line (polyline).
Once you have selected the relevant menu item in the Insert > Graphic
menu (Line, Polyline, Polygon), you can e.g. select Popup menu >
Perpendicular.
The
icon at the cursor indicates that the Perpendicular mode is
active. Next click on the respective object (line, rectangle, circle, etc.) to
which you wish to draw a perpendicular line. Provided you have not
defined the end point yet, the start point is variable and the line can be
moved up and down vertically to the selected line segment of the object.
Click once more to determine the end point of the line (the next corner
point of the polyline).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
31
Defining the end point for a line

You can also use these modes to set the end point of a line (the next
corner point of a polyline).
To do this, once you have defined the start point, select the mode via the
popup menu (e.g. Perpendicular). Then move the
cursor to the
object to which you wish to draw a perpendicular line. As soon as you
have reached a perpendicular point, the possible line is displayed. Click
to draw this perpendicular line.
Defining a radius through a tangential point

Tangential mode additionally lets you define the radii of circles, arcs,
and sectors in your drawing.
Once you have selected the corresponding menu item in the Insert >
Graphic menu (Circle, Arc through center, Sector), start by clicking
with the left-hand mouse button to define the center.
Then select Popup menu > Tangential. The
icon at the cursor indicates that Tangential mode is active. Now move the cursor to the object
to which you wish to draw a tangent. Once you have reached a tangent
point the possible arc is displayed. Click again to draw the circle / arc /
sector.
Line projection
It is now possible to define a projection for lines.
Benefit: This new feature lets you produce a DIN-compliant center
line, i.e. with projection.
If this is required for a line, open the respective properties dialog on the
Format tab and activate the Projection check box. A projection is then
drawn at the start and end point of the line. This is calculated according
to DIN on the basis of the line thickness and drawn with a length of
"12 d" (wherein d = dashed line diameter (Line thickness)).
32
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Note:
The line's snap points and dimensions are not changed by inserting a
projection.
Input Box for Editors

The new input box in EPLAN offers you the option for various functionalities in the editors (graphical editor, 3D view, etc.) of entering values via
the keyboard.
Benefit: The input box permits fast, clear input of values. You can
define all the required dimensions for a high-quality production document without use of the grid.
If the input box is activated, a small text window for inputting numbers
appears at the cursor for these functionalities (e.g. for inserting a line).
This window exhibits a predefined level of transparency which you can
change in the settings.
Tip:
You can use the input box in combination with the base point shift e.g. to
construct recesses in an enclosure door quickly and easily.
To do this select Options > Move base point and click on the bottom
left corner of the enclosure door. This defines the auxiliary point for the
relative input. Then select Insert > Graphic > Rectangle. If the Input
box option is activated the input box text window is displayed at the
cursor.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
33
Input two values to set the position of the first corner of the rectangle.
This point entry relates to the movement of the reference point on the
bottom left corner of the door. Enter one more point in the input box and
the rectangle is drawn to the exact preset size as a recess.
Using the input box

The input box text window consists of two heading rows and the actual
input box. The first header row shows the respective action (e.g. Start
point for line) and the second row shows the required input as comment
text. The numbers input via the keyboard are displayed in the input box.
The sequence of values to be input is defined in the system for each
functionality. Thus, e.g. in the case of the line, two entries are possible in
the order "X and Y value of a coordinate" or "Angle and length".
In the case of the point entry the input of two values separated by a
space is interpreted as the X and Y values of coordinates (start or end
point). In this case the input values relate to the graphical coordinate
system with its origin at the bottom left and which is specified in "mm" or
"inch" depending on the unit presetting.
Note:
Note that only the first point entry uses absolute values while the subsequent point entries use relative coordinates.
You input one value to define the angle of a line. Use "Value<Value" to
input the angle and the length of a line. Negative values are also admissible. To set decimal places, enter the decimal separator used in the
operating system ("," or ".").
Click on [Enter] to apply the values entered to the respective functionality; the input box is then cleared. The input box is closed after the last
input or after exiting the action.
34
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
You can not request other functionalities with the relevant shortcut keys
when the input box is open. Press [Esc] to cancel the input box.
Functions with input-box support

Input-box entries are permissible for the following EPLAN platform
functionalities:
Inserting graphical elements:
line, polyline, rectangle, circle, arc, sector, text.
Inserting dimensioning.
Editing graphical elements:
rotate, duplicate, move, mirror, scale, stretch, cut off, change length,
fillet corners, chamfer.
Inserting 3D items:
mounting rail, wire duct (cable duct), enclosure, mounting panel,
locked area, logic item.
Editing 3D items:
Place via adopt length, change length, rotate around axis, define
mounting point and handle.
Activating the input box

You can configure the EPLAN user settings so that the input box is
always displayed for the functionalities listed above. To do this, select
the Always show input box (2D) and Always show input box (3D)
check boxes in the new Settings: Input box / Mini toolbars dialog.
Under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Input box /
Mini toolbars you can also change the transparency of the text window
for the input box.
Along with this setting you can, however, also activate / deactivate the
input box depending on the selection of a functionality. To do this the
Options menu now includes the new Input box menu item and the View
toolbar has a new button .
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
35
Note:
The setting for activation and deactivation of the input box is synchronized. I.e., if you activate the input box in the settings and then deactivate it in the editor, it is also deselected in the settings.
Keys for input boxes
Irrespective of whether or not you activate the input box when running
the functionalities listed above, you can also open the text window for the
input box with the [C] key. In this case the cursor is located immediately
in the input box of the text window. The same applies for the number
keys and for the [+] and [-] keys which also open the input box.
Note:
For this reason the View menu no longer has the default settings of the
[+] key for zoom In and the [-] key for zoom Out. And the shortcut key
for zoom to 100% has been changed to [Alt] + [3].
Tip:
With the help of the number keys and the [+] and [-] keys you can input
values via the input box even during an interaction and even if the Input
box option is deactivated. If you draw, e.g., a circle with Insert >
Graphic > Circle and have already placed the center, the subsequent
input of a value (e.g. "1") opens the input box and you can input the
radius, for example "10".
36
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes

EPLAN now allows you to set elliptical and circular text and / or alignment boxes for texts. It makes no difference what type of text this is
(simple "graphical" text, property text, special text, etc.). For placed
property texts you can also show leader lines.
Example:
Our example shows circular alignment boxes for various part placements
on a mounting panel. The leader lines show which legend item belongs
to which part placement.
Benefit: You have more flexibility in laying out text boxes. Leader lines
between a device and the associated property placements
make the schematic easier to read.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
37
Elliptical Text Boxes

You can set the options for elliptical text boxes as follows:
Project-wide by means of an appropriate setting in layer management:
You can now select the values for the Text box property from a dropdown list. Select "Ellipse" from this list if you want texts or device tags
on the layer concerned to be surrounded by an elliptical border
throughout the entire project.
Individually by means of the corresponding properties dialog:
The setting options for borders have been extended for this purpose.
As already mentioned in "Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the
Properties Dialog" on page 22, the relevant settings are no longer located on the separate tab or in the subsequent Border dialog but in a
table on the Display / Format tab.
To obtain an elliptical text box for an individual device tag or text, select the new "Ellipse" option from the Draw text box drop-down list in
the Border area of this table.
38
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
The illustration below shows the new settings in the properties dialog for
a component on the Display tab.
Using the new Size from project setting check box you can specify that
the static size of the text box is taken from the new Text box project
setting. To access this setting select Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name" > Graphical editing > General. Equal values for the
Width and Height fields will produce a circular text box.
If the Size from project setting check box is not selected, the size of
the box is determined by the text.
Elliptical Alignment Boxes and Leader Lines

If you want texts or device tags to have elliptical alignment boxes and / or
leader lines, you can specify the relevant settings individually in the
associated properties dialog.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
39
If you also select the new Activate leader line check box, a leader line
is drawn from the placed property text to the center of the associated
component. If the property text is moved, the position of the leader line is
adjusted accordingly. No leader line is drawn for simple "graphical" texts
or special texts.
To draw an elliptical alignment box you must first select the Activate
alignment box check box. This activates the new Draw alignment box
drop-down list, and you can specify whether a graphic is displayed for
the alignment box and what shape this graphic should be. For an elliptical box select the "Ellipse" option. Equal values for the subsequent
Width and Height fields will produce a circular alignment box.
40
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Features in Dimensioning

New Project-wide Settings for Dimensioning
There are new setting options for dimensioning, making the creation of
dimensions in EPLAN more versatile and convenient.
Benefit: You have new representation options so you can dimension drawings for customers in Europe and North America
according to local standards:
- Display dimension value as fraction
- Dimension value centered in dimension line
- Horizontal dimension value.
You can use the Distance 1st dimension help line and
Distance 2nd dimension help line settings to create a
gap between the graphic and the dimension help lines.
Clear dimensioning enables you to create high-quality production documentation. You therefore lay the foundation
for smooth production and assembly processes while still
in the engineering phase.
To open the relevant Settings: Dimensioning dialog, select the menu
path Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical
editing > Dimensioning.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
41
Display two units:

If this check box is selected, the dimension value is displayed as a metric
unit (mm, cm, etc.) and in inches.
The dimension value with the second unit (i.e. the one that is not set in
the Unit field) is displayed in square brackets immediately after the first
dimension value with the first unit (e.g. 88 mm[3,46]). The dimension
value for the second unit is shown to the same accuracy as the first dimension value; however, a maximum of two decimal places is displayed.
If the check box is not selected, the dimension value is displayed with the
unit specified in the Unit field only.
Note:
Two units cannot be displayed for an angular dimension. In this case, the
Display two units check box in the properties dialog is grayed out.
42
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Display dimension value as fraction:

If this check box is selected, decimal numbers such as "0.5", "0.25",
"0.125", "0.0625", or multiples thereof will be displayed as a fraction.
Possible values for fractions are therefore "1/2", "1/4", "1/8", "1/16", and
multiples thereof. Other decimal numbers are not shown as fractions.
Horizontal dimension value:
If this check box is selected, the dimension value is always displayed
horizontally, irrespective of the dimension direction.
If this check box is not selected, the dimension value is displayed
according to the dimension direction.
This means that for vertical dimensions, for instance, you no longer need
to rotate the dimension value in the properties dialog. To do this, on the
Dimensioning tab, you must first deselect the Center dimension value
check box and then change the setting in the Angle field on the Format
tab.
Dimension value centered in dimension line:
If this check box is selected, the dimension value is placed in the center
of the dimension line and the dimension line is interrupted.
With this setting, the dimension value is always displayed horizontally
and centered. Any set distance from the dimension line is ignored. Furthermore, no format settings for alignment and angle can be specified in
the relevant properties dialog for dimensioning.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
43
Example:
Linear dimension on a rectangle with Dimension value centered in
dimension line selected:
Note:
Note that the Horizontal dimension value and Dimension value centered in dimension line settings are ignored in incremental dimensions.
Dimension line interrupted by dimension value:
If this check box is selected, the dimension line is interrupted if the
dimension value intersects with it.
If the check box is not selected, the dimension line is never interrupted,
irrespective of the position of the dimension value.
Display start value for incremental dimension:
If this check box is selected, the start value, i.e. the value at the first
measuring point, is also displayed for incremental dimensions.
If the check box is not selected, this value is not displayed.
44
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Note:
The Display start value for incremental dimension setting is not a
property but just a display aid. Therefore this setting can not be specified
for a dimension in the properties dialog, but only project-wide.
New Settings in the Properties Dialog

In addition to the project-wide default setting, you can also specify all the
properties described above individually for a dimension. To do this, in the
graphical editor click on the relevant dimension line to open the Properties dialog.
Dimensioning tab:
The Dimension value group box on this tab contains new check boxes
as follows:
Display two units
Display dimension value as fraction
Horizontal dimension value and
Dimension value centered in dimension line.
Lines tab:
For the sake of clarity, the settings for the dimension help line and
dimension line termination have been moved to the new Lines tab.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
45
This tab also contains the new Dimension line interrupted by dimension value check box.
It also contains the option of setting shorter dimension help lines. For this
reason, the Dimension help line group box has two new fields:
Distance 1st dimension help line and Distance 2nd dimension help
line, in which you enter the distance between the measuring point and
the start of the dimension help line for the dimension help line in question. The dimension help line is shortened for positive values and extended for negative values.
46
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Features in the Page Navigator

Page Filter with Schemes
There are two different options in the page navigator to define a page
filter:
By defining filter criteria in the "Filter" dialog
This new option is a field-based default filter which you will already
recognize from other navigators, for example. Here, you can use
various page properties as filter criteria and store them in a scheme.
Via detailed selection in the "Select pages" dialog
This option corresponds to the page filter used to date. Here, you can
compile the desired pages manually in a tree structure, with support
from a prefilter and a postfilter.
Benefit: When using the default filter, the page filter now no longer
has to be updated after creating new pages. You are always
given the current view of the subset of project pages defined
via the page filter. Consistent use of the familiar filter technology facilitates operation of the program.
Specifying page filters via default filter

Predefined filter schemes can be selected via the new Filter drop-down
list. If you then click the [...] button next to the drop-down list, this takes
you to the Filter dialog. Here, you can create new schemes and make
changes to the relevant filter criteria.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
47
As this is a default technique in EPLAN, we will not be looking at this in

greater detail. For more information on this, see the EPLAN online help
in the section entitled "Filters".
Specifying page filters via detailed selection

To specify a page filter via the Select pages dialog, select the new
Detailed selection menu item in the page navigator popup menu.
Once you have made your settings in this dialog, the filter specified
here is automatically stored in a scheme and given the name
"Selection_<project name>". If you make another page selection via the
detailed selection, the scheme "Selection_<project name>" is overwritten
with the current settings.
As the selection filter is saved to a scheme, it is retained even when the
project is closed. Filters of this kind can be changed or deleted in the
Filter dialog for the page navigator, like any other filter scheme.
Tip:
When printing / exporting pages, if you want to output only the current
pages of an activated page filter, you have to activate the Selection
option in the Print dialog, and you must not activate the Apply to entire
project check box in the export dialogs.
Other changes
You can also access the default filter in the Copy pages dialog when
copying pages between different projects.
Both types of filter are saved according to user. This has made removal
of the page filter via the Compress project dialog superfluous. For this
reason, the Page filter setting has been removed from the Remove
project data area in the compression settings.
48
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Selection in the Page List Takes Place when Scrolling

Pages
When you "scroll" through the pages of a project in the graphical editor,
e.g. by clicking the [Image down] / [Image up] buttons, the page currently opened is now selected in the page navigator list.
Benefit: The selection behavior in the list is now clearer, so navigation
in the list takes place more quickly and more easily. With the
Tree and List tabs, optimal views are available for various
project planning tasks.
Automatic Page Names when Inserting Pages or Macros

When inserting copied pages or page macros, a functionality is now
available to you with which the new page names are automatically
suggested.
To do this, you can activate the new check box Automatic page name
in the Pages tab in the Adapt structure dialog. If this check box is
enabled, the highest page number available for the structure is determined and the second-highest number / numbers suggested for the
Page name column.
Example:
You have opened the EPLAN-DEMO sample project and selected the page
=EB3+ET1/1 with the page description Power supply in the page navigator. You then insert a single-page macro. The page name of the
created page macro is initially the default setting in the Adapt structure
dialog on the Pages tab (e.g. 5). When you have activated the Automatic page name check box, the page name as the highest page number
assigned in the partial structure is 8 is changed to 9.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
49
Customizing the Displayed DT for Location Boxes when

Inserting Pages or Macros
If there are also location boxes on the copied pages or page macros, you
can now not only change the page structure of the pages to be inserted,
but also the displayed device tag of the location boxes before insertion.
Benefit: The displayed device tags of location boxes can now be
adapted during copying. This removes manual editing after
insertion. Automatic adaptation of the device tags saves
project planning time and ensures quality when working with
macros.
For this purpose, the Adjust page structure dialog has been extended
and renamed Adapt structure. The fields and buttons for editing the
page structure are now located in the Pages tab. If there are also location boxes in the page / page macro to be inserted, the Location boxes
tab is also displayed.
In the table under this tab, the displayed device tags for the source location boxes, their placement and the displayed target device tags for the
location boxes are displayed. To change a displayed DT, click the appropriate field in the table and enter the new tag manually.
50
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If you have input structure identifiers which are not yet present in the
target project, the familiar Place identifiers dialog is opened before
insertion.
If the settings are set to default for online numbering, numbering of the
devices then takes place using the Insertion mode dialog. The
components in the location boxes are also taken into account here.
Determining Number of Pages / Page Name per Property

The new menu item Number of pages / Page name per property in the
Page menu allows you to determine the number and names of the pages
which have the same value of a specific property. When you have selected this menu item, a reporting run is started which calculates the
number and names of the pages with the same value and writes the
result to the new Number of pages per property <11062> and Page
names per property <11063> properties.
Benefit: This functionality allows you to (e.g.) determine the number of
pages in the project which have the same structure identifier
for the "higher-level function" and print this information on the
pages. This provides you with an easy overview of the scope
of the individual documentation sections, even in larger
projects.
You define the property used for comparison in the report run via the
project-specific settings for the pages (under Options > Settings >
Projects > "Project name" > Management > Pages). In the Settings:
Pages dialog, the new Number of pages / Page name per property
field is available. The Higher-level function (main identifier) property is
set as the default here. You can use the [...] button next to the field to
open the familiar Property selection dialog and select a different
property.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
51
Using the also new setting Automatically execute 'Number of pages /

Page name per property' before generating the table of contents
under this, you can set EPLAN so that the Number of pages / Page
name per property report run is started automatically before generating
and updating a table of contents.
The two properties Number of pages per property and Page names
per property can be displayed in the page properties for a page or
entered in a plot frame as Special text - page properties. The semicolon is used by default as a separator for several output page names, as
is in the case of combined values the character sequence "...".
For this, the separators for this functionality are transferred from the form
properties of the set table of contents form (properties: Separator for
multiple values and Separator for combined values). For more information on this, see section "Combining overview reports" on page 228.
To check these properties, a number of new messages is available to
you in the settings for messages and error checking. The message class
"Other" has been extended to include the messages "022014", "022015",
and "022016". With the aid of these project checks, you can determine
whether the property selected in the Number of pages / Page name per
property setting is blank on one page of the project, whether the pages
combined via this setting are not consecutive, or whether letters are
contained in a page name.
52
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
Using Terminals
Project editor:
As a project editor, you must read this section before you work with the
new version.
Using Main Terminals

If you insert a terminal, this component is now inserted by default as a
main terminal.
Benefit: The default use of main terminals offers complete device
management for terminals.
So you can now store device definitions for terminals in
parts management and insert terminals as devices, for
example.
You can also carry out device selection at main terminals.
Multi-level terminals that have been defined using main
terminals are no longer separated if they are edited
(moved, copied, etc.).
The new function definitions for terminals mean that the
field of application of a terminal can be defined with much
greater precision and flexibility.
You can edit saddle jumpers centrally in the Edit terminal
strip dialog. This makes configuring a terminal strip clear,
quick, and easy.
The changed behavior is indicated by selection of the new Main terminal check box on the Terminal tab in the properties dialog.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
53
Using Terminals
If this check box is selected, the terminal is a main terminal and behaves
in the same way as a main function. For example, if parts with function
templates are assigned to a main terminal of this type, these function
templates are now also displayed in the terminal strip navigator. Parts
can be entered at a main terminal if it has the representation type "Multiline".
If the check box is not selected, the terminal is an auxiliary terminal. In
this case, the Parts tab is hidden in the properties dialog and no parts
can be stored.
If a part with function templates is entered at a main terminal, these templates overlay the terminal auxiliary functions belonging to the main
terminal.
54
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
Managing terminal strips

Terminal strips are managed as before using terminal strip definitions.
However, these now only contain specific terminal strip parts, e.g. labels,
rails, etc.
However, the terminal parts are now stored at the individual main
terminals rather than at the terminal strip definition as before. In this
case, the terminal strip is divided into "independent areas", with each
main terminal defining an independent area.
Managing terminal strips as in the previous versions

If the entire terminal strip is to be defined purely by the terminal strip
definition as previously (before EPLAN 2.0), then the terminal strip can
only consist of one independent area. This means that either the terminal
strip must contain no main terminals or the property Do not use main
terminals must be selected for the terminal strip definition.
If this new property with ID <20229> is selected for a terminal strip
definition, main terminals are treated in the same way as "normal"
terminals. The function templates of the parts entered at the terminals
are not used, but the parts are output in reports.
Note:
This procedure is only supported by the program for compatibility reasons. We recommend managing parts at the main terminals in future.
Definition of multi-level terminals

In EPLAN, multi-level terminals are displayed with "normal" terminal
symbols. Terminals inserted into the schematic are part of a multi-level
terminal if they carry the same DT, they directly follow one another in the
sorting order, and if they have ever increasing values for the level.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
55
Using Terminals
The changed behavior when inserting terminals has to be taken into

account in the definition of multi-level terminals too. Each multi-level
terminal can only contain one main terminal. The other associated
terminals must be auxiliary terminals.
To define a terminal as a multi-level terminal when editing or inserting
terminals, enter a value > 0 in the Level field on the Terminal tab in the
properties dialog. The main terminal can be the terminal with either the
lowest or the highest level. Deselect the Main terminal check box if it is
an auxiliary terminal.
When you click [OK] to close the properties dialog, the value set for the
terminal is accepted. The level set is shown in the terminal strip navigator tree in square brackets (e.g. [1] for the lowest level).
Previously the levels of a multi-level terminal could only be sorted in
ascending order. However, the use of main terminals means that the
levels can now be sorted in descending order too:
If the main terminal is level "1", then the levels are sorted in ascending
order. The function templates of the associated part are moved into
ascending order.
If the main terminal level is > 1, then the levels are sorted in
descending order. The function templates of the associated part are
moved into descending order.
Storing multi-level terminals in parts management
Multi-level terminals with a part number and multiple function templates
can be created in parts management. The multi-level terminal then
placed in the schematic consists of a main terminal (with the part number
and function templates) and multiple auxiliary terminal functions. The
main terminal should normally be assigned to the first function template.
If this is not the case, this is reported by the new 001023 check run.
56
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
A multi-level terminal defined in this way is an independent device for

which a device selection is also possible.
Converting older projects and macros

When you open projects and insert macros from older EPLAN versions,
they are automatically converted. This has the following consequences:
For terminal strip definitions
The new property Do not use main terminals <20229> is activated
at terminal strip definitions from older projects. A terminal strip of this
type is only defined by the terminal strip definition. Main terminals are
then treated in the same way as auxiliary terminals.
For terminals
Terminals with level "0" or "1" are converted into main terminals when
they are opened or inserted. At the corresponding terminals the Main
terminal check box on the first tab is selected. Terminals with higher
level values become auxiliary terminals. At terminals for which the
Main function property was enabled, the corresponding check box on
the Symbol / function data tab is deselected.
This automatic customization safeguards the previous behavior in terminal editing (before EPLAN 2.0) and you can generate reports for your
old projects in the usual way.
Notes:
When you open older projects, a prompt now asks you whether you
wish to convert the project to the current version (see page 69). Note
that the terminals / terminal strip definitions are converted even if you
close this prompt with [No].
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
57
Using Terminals
If you have already consistently entered the terminal parts at the terminals in your old projects, then all you need to do is to deselect the
Do not use main terminals check box at the terminal strip definitions
in order to activate the new behavior. If function templates are stored
in parts management for the parts entered at the terminals, these are
displayed immediately and the terminal functions are overlaid by the
templates.
Terminal Strip and Terminal Accessories

Up to the present version, the terminal strip accessories were stored as
parts at the terminal strip definition. If you now use main terminals, then
you enter the parts for the accessories at the appropriate main terminal.
A distinction is made here between accessories for terminals and for
terminal strips:
Alignable accessories
Alignable accessories are attached to the terminal strip. They can be
positioned before or after a terminal. These accessories are entered
as parts at the appropriate main terminal.
Non-alignable accessories
Non-alignable accessories belong to either a terminal or a terminal
strip and are attached to this, e.g. labels.
These accessories are entered as parts at the terminal or at the terminal strip definition. Non-alignable accessories are not shown in
reports or in the Edit terminal strip dialog.
Defining alignable accessories for terminals

Previously certain product subgroups of the terminal accessories were
given a fixed definition of "alignable" in EPLAN. In the new version you
can now choose whether an accessory part for terminals is alignable or
not.
58
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
In order for an accessory part to be reported as an alignable accessory,

the Alignable check box on the Terminal data tab must be selected for
this part in parts management.
Terminals are always alignable, i.e., for the "Terminals" product subgroup the Alignable check box is selected and cannot be changed.
Possible parts for alignable accessories
A part can be an alignable accessory if it belongs to one of the following
product subgroups:
Cover
Terminator
General
End angle
Terminal label
Strip label
Cross-connector
Rails
Plug housing
Plug accessories
Test accessories
Mounting rail
Partition
Undefined
Other labels
Tools.
If you select the product subgroups "Terminator", "End angle", or
"Partition" for a part, the Alignable check box is selected by default.
For all other product subgroups it is deselected by default.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
59
Using Terminals
All other parts are simple parts in the terminal or terminal strip and are
not represented as accessories in reports or in the Edit terminal strip
dialog.
Note:
If you convert an older parts database (pre-version 2.0), the Alignable
check box is selected for all parts in the "Terminals" product group which
belong to one of the following product subgroups:
Cover
Terminator
End angle
Terminal
Strip label
Rails
Plug accessories
Test accessories
Mounting rail
Partition
Other labels
Tools.
New Features in Editing Terminal Strips

All settings and data for a highlighted terminal strip are shown in the Edit
terminal strip dialog. The new features in this dialog are listed below.
Assigning alignable accessories when editing terminal strips

The changed behavior in terminal editing is also evident in the Edit
terminal strip dialog. A check box in the new Main terminal column
shows you whether a given terminal is a main terminal.
60
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
In connection with the new features for alignable accessories, the previous popup menu items Add strip accessories, Display strip accessories, and Delete strip accessories have been renamed accordingly.
Displaying alignable accessories
In order for alignable accessories to be displayed in the dialog, the
Alignable accessories visible option must be enabled. If you select
Popup menu > Alignable accessories visible, the accessories are
shown in a separate row.
Adding alignable accessories
If you open the Part selection dialog via Popup menu > Add alignable
accessories, then only parts from the product subgroups which also
qualify as alignable accessories are displayed.
Once you have selected a part, the accessory is inserted as a separate
hatched row below the current cursor position. You can move the row as
you wish. In the Row column a small arrow indicates the position in
which the accessory is added, before or after a terminal.
Using the new Alignable accessories following popup menu item you
can choose whether to add the accessory before or after a terminal.
When you click [Apply] the accessories are assigned to the terminal and
the parts are entered at the terminal.
The terminal and accessories and the function templates belonging to a
terminal are now grouped together in a block similarly to the multi-level
terminals and can be moved together. The row numbers are grouped
together in one field in the Row column.
Disconnecting accessories / multi-level terminals
To disconnect a block of this type, select Popup menu > Disconnect.
This allows you to move an accessory or a level of a multi-level terminal
to another terminal.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
61
Using Terminals
Note:
If you wish to continue using the previous behavior in terminal editing
(before EPLAN version 2.0), then you can continue to enter accessories
at the terminal strip definition. To do this activate the Do not use main
terminals property on the terminal strip. In this case, the parts added in
the Edit terminal strip dialog are entered at the terminal strip definition.
The rows for the accessories and the direction arrows for sorting are
unaffected.
Information about terminal connection points

In addition to the targets, now you can also display information about the
terminal connection points. The Edit terminal strip dialog contains the
following two new columns for this purpose:
Terminal connection point (external)
Terminal connection point (internal).
The connection point designation in these columns indicates the terminal
connection point to which a given external / internal target is connected.
Note:
The Terminal connection point (external) and Terminal connection
point (internal) columns are not displayed by default in the Edit terminal strip dialog to start with. Instead they must first be added by
selecting Popup menu > Configure columns.
Generating saddle jumpers manually

In the Edit terminal strip dialog you can now also define saddle jumpers
via the popup menu. Using the Manual saddle jumper menu item you
can generate a manual saddle jumper between the highlighted terminals
or remove an existing one.
62
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
The menu item is only active if multiple adjacent terminals are highlighted. If manual saddle jumpers have already been defined for some
(but not all) terminals within the highlighted block, a continuous saddle
jumper is generated. If manual saddle jumpers have already been defined for all terminals within the highlighted block, the saddle jumper for
the highlighted area is removed; it is retained for the terminals included
in the non-highlighted area.
External / internal saddle jumpers

A distinction is now made in EPLAN between external and internal
saddle jumpers in the same way as for wire jumpers.
Existing displays in the Edit terminal strip dialog or in the reports are
not affected by this. The existing Saddle jumpers column in the Edit
terminal strip dialog and the Graphic for saddle jumpers placeholder
in the reports continue to group external and internal saddle jumpers
together.
If you want to know whether a saddle jumper is external or internal, you

can show the information in the editing dialog using the two new
columns: Saddle jumpers (external) and Saddle jumpers (internal).
And for output to reports (e.g. terminal diagram, terminal connection
diagram, etc.) the two new properties Graphic for external saddle
jumpers <13066> and Graphic for internal saddle jumpers <13065>
have been added to the Terminal properties placeholder element.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
63
Using Terminals
Notes:
The Saddle jumpers (external) and Saddle jumpers (internal)
columns are not displayed by default in the Edit terminal strip dialog
to start with. Instead they must be added first by selecting Popup
menu > Configure columns.
Please note that this additional feature means that it is possible to
display or to output a saddle jumper twice i.e. as both a "normal"
and an external / internal saddle jumper.
New Features in the Terminal Strip Navigator

Display in the navigator
The main and auxiliary terminals of a terminal strip are displayed in the
navigators (device navigator, terminal strip navigator) at the same
hierarchy level. Main terminals as is usual for main functions are
indicated by a "shopping cart"
in front of the terminal. The levels of
multi-level terminals are shown here in square brackets (e.g. [1] for the
lowest level).
Generating new terminals

The popup menu of the terminal strip navigator now includes the menu
option New terminals (devices). The dialog that this option opens allows you to generate multiple unplaced terminals for a new or existing
terminal strip in accordance with a defined numbering pattern.
Unlike the New functions menu option, a function definition is not
selected in the Generate terminals (devices) dialog. Instead a part is
entered in the Part number field or selected using the [...] button. In
order for a terminal to be able to be inserted in this way, the selected part
must have at least one terminal function template. Once you have
clicked [OK] to close the dialog, the terminals are generated from the
function templates of the selected part, the terminal designations being
determined by the numbering pattern.
64
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
Sorting terminals of a terminal strip

The new Sort terminal strip menu item means that you can now automatically sort all terminals of a terminal strip according to certain criteria
in the terminal strip navigator too. The sort options offered in the submenu correspond to the known functionality for sorting terminals from the
Edit terminal strip dialog.
If you highlight a terminal in the navigator, the entire terminal strip is
sorted according to the selected sort criterion. In this way you can now
delete terminal sort codes, for example in the terminal strip navigator, by
selecting Popup menu > Sort terminal strip > Default.
Note:
Multi-level terminals and other independent areas are retained when the
terminals are sorted. The properties of the first terminal in the area
(usually the main terminal) influence the sort order. The main terminal
always has the lowest sort code within its independent area.
New Function Definitions for Terminals

The new EPLAN version offers many new function definitions for terminals. These new function definitions have been greatly simplified, and
their structure is improved in comparison to those previously used. They
offer greater variability in terms of numbers of connection points and can
map up to eight connection points and more.
We recommend that you no longer use the old function definitions for
terminals in project planning. If you use the function definition library
supplied with this version, the "old" function definitions are no longer
offered for selection in the Function definitions dialog.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
65
Using Terminals
New properties for characterizing terminals

The new function definitions for terminals mean that terminals are described by the number of their connection points and by predefined
connection points for saddle jumpers. To enable you to characterize
inserted terminals more precisely, the following new properties are
included in the Settings category in the properties dialog:
Terminal category <20230>
The drop-down list for this property allows you to characterize a
terminal more precisely. A terminal could be a feed-through terminal,
isolating terminal, switching terminal, diode terminal, etc.
Terminal with LED <20231>
You can use the check box for this property to indicate that a terminal
has an LED.
Terminal opened <20232>
You can use the check box for this property to indicate that the terminal is open. You can show the state of an isolating terminal in this
way, for example.
All of these properties are available in terminal reports and can be used
there to output terminal graphics using the form property Assignment:
Property / value to graphic [1-10].
Online Numbering of Terminal Sort Codes

Existing terminal sort codes can now be taken into account in online
numbering. In this way on insertion of macros and copies, the sort codes
in the terminal strips existing in the source are determined and the sort
code of the newly inserted terminals incremented.
To this end the Numbering formats dialog on the Designations tab
now includes a Terminal sort codes check box.
66
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Using Terminals
Note:
This setting only affects existing terminal sort codes on insertion of macros and copies. On symbol insertion or on creation of terminal strips in
the terminal strip navigator, sort codes are not generated automatically.
If the check box is selected and if in addition one of the numbering options is chosen in the Insertion mode dialog, then existing sort codes
are automatically numbered on insertion.
The highest sort code in the terminal strip is identified and incremented
by one. Therefore, the newly inserted terminals are always sorted at the
end of the terminal strip. If several terminals have a sort code, their
sequence is retained by ascending sort code values. The numbering
does not separate consecutive terminals.
If the check box is deselected, the sort codes of the inserted terminals
are not changed. The terminals are then sorted between the existing
terminals according to their sort code or terminal designation. This can
mean that terminals that were previously consecutive (e.g. multi-level
terminals) can be separated.
Online numbering of terminal and pin designations

If you copy and insert terminals / pins, then the inserted terminals / pins
are now numbered in the logical sequence and not in the graphical sequence any more. In this case, multi-level terminals are now retained in
online numbering rather than being separated.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
67
Using Terminals
Extended Reports for Terminals

Output terminal connection point in addition to target
In reports for terminals (terminal diagrams, terminal connection diagrams) you can now choose to output information about the terminal
connection points to the targets too.
To enable this to be taken into account in the report, the new placeholder
elements Terminal connection point external and Terminal connection point internal are now available for the corresponding forms. These
placeholder elements allow you to output the connection point designation of the terminal connected to a given external or internal target, for
example.
Terminal report generation in relation to connection points or targets

Using the new form property Connection point-specific output
<13113> you can determine whether terminals in terminal diagrams or
terminal connection diagrams are output in relation to connection points
or to targets.
If this property is activated, a row is generated in terminal diagrams and
terminal connection diagrams for each pair of connection points. Terminals with more than two connection points are automatically split
across multiple rows. In addition, terminal connection points that are not
connected are output.
If the form property Connection point-specific output is disabled, terminals are reported in relation to targets. In target-specific reports the
external and internal targets of the terminal are output.
68
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Optimized Database Structure for Projects

Project editor:
new version.
The new version of the EPLAN platform supports a new, improved database structure for projects.
Benefit: The additional data and new functions of the new EPLAN
version can only be supported with the new database
structure.
The consequences for the opening of projects are as follows:
New projects
New projects are now always created in the new database structure.
It does not matter how the projects were generated (e.g. via project
management, via data transfer, or via the EPLAN Engineering
Center).
Old projects
In order for old projects to be edited in the new EPLAN version, the
application of the new database structure is absolutely essential for
these projects.
When you open an old project in EPLAN, a prompt is displayed asking
whether you want to convert the project to the new version. If you
confirm this prompt with [Yes], the project is updated. The project is
given the new database structure and is then opened.
This process also creates a backup copy of your project in the project
directory. The name of this backup project includes the old project
name and the conversion date.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
69
If you choose [No], the project retains the old database structure. Although the project is opened it cannot be edited, only viewed. In this
case the project can continue to be opened and edited with old
EPLAN versions. The prompt will appear each time you open the
project in the new EPLAN version.
Warning:
New projects and old projects that have been updated will no longer be
able to be opened with old EPLAN versions.
70
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin
Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin

If you now delete a local project, the project file and project directory,
with all the data in them, are moved to the recycle bin of the operating
system. The relevant project may as is usual with Microsoft be
restored from the recycle bin.
Benefit: The option of restoring accidentally deleted projects via the
Windows recycle bin provides you with protection against
unintentional loss of project data. Occasional users get up
and running with projects more safely and more quickly.
Here, it does not matter whether a project is deleted in project management or by selecting Project > Delete. This also applies to revised
EPLAN projects (*.elr). Even when overwriting projects (e.g. when
copying or renaming), the project already in existence will be moved to
the recycle bin.
Note:
If you have deleted a project from a network drive, then you can no
longer restore that project due to the behavior of the operating system.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
71
PDF Export in Archiving Format
PDF Export in Archiving Format

When exporting PDFs it is now also possible to output PDF files in the
archiving format PDF/A. This format is a standard for the long-term
archiving of electronic documents in accordance with the ISO 19005-1
standard.
Benefit: The PDF/A archiving format safeguards the long-term display
and use of your documentation.
A new user-specific setting has been added to enable you to output PDF
files in the archiving format. Select Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > PDF export. Then in the settings dialog switch to the General
tab and select the new Archiving format PDF/A check box.
If this check box is selected, then the output data is saved in PDF/A-1b
format. In this case, it is not possible to generate a write-protected PDF.
You cannot select the corresponding Read-only check box. The generated PDF files still have the *.pdf extension.
Notes:
Note that if the Archiving format PDF/A setting is selected, 3D
models and linked documents belonging to the project are not output
on export.
If they are opened with Adobe Reader 9, such documents are displayed by default in PDF/A mode. In this mode you cannot use the
hyperlinks output by EPLAN to navigate within the PDF document. If
PDF/A mode is disabled, then the hyperlinks in the PDF are available
for use again.
72
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists
Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory

Lists
The management of accessory parts has been optimized with the new
EPLAN version. Individual accessory parts and / or accessory lists can
be assigned to a main part via a separate tab. If accessory parts are
stored for a main part, they too are offered for selection in device selection.
Benefit: Accessory lists are useful when you are selecting optional
parts. In addition, EPLAN shows you absolutely essential
parts during project planning. In this way, you can assign
accessories more quickly and more accurately.
Managing Accessory Parts in Parts Management

Clear identification of parts as accessories
Accessory parts are now clearly identified in parts management. The part
types "Assembly", "Component", and "Module" are now available for all
parts on the new Accessories tab.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
73
Identification of a part as an accessory is no longer carried out using the

Accessory code property but on the Accessories tab. To clearly
identify a part as an accessory, select the Accessories check box on
this tab. A part for which the check box is deselected is a main part.
You can distinguish between main and accessory parts as follows:
Accessory part
The Accessories check box is selected. Accessory parts and accessory lists cannot be assigned to this type of part on the Accessories
tab. The table of accessory parts is grayed out accordingly.
Main part
The Accessories check box is deselected. Both individual accessory
parts and accessory lists can be assigned to a main part on the
Accessories tab.
Displaying accessory parts in parts management

Using field-based filters for accessory parts
The "Accessories" filter scheme is used by default for field-based filters.
If this filter scheme is selected, then the Accessories property <22054>
is used as a filter criterion and only accessory parts are displayed on the
Tree, List and Combination tabs of parts management. In addition to
the accessory parts, the tree view also shows data from the hierarchy
levels "Construction", "Connection points", etc.
If you want to know the main parts for which a particular accessory part
is used, then you can use the new Is used as an accessory property
<22963>. To do this, create a new filter scheme with this property as the
criterion and enter the part number of the accessory in question as the
value.
74
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Note:
You can also access the field-based filter schemes for parts management from the part master data navigator and from the Part selection
dialog.
Accessory parts in tree view
To make it easier to distinguish accessory parts from "normal" parts in
the parts management and parts selection tree views, etc., you can
adapt the tree configuration accordingly. To do this, select the Accessories property <22054> as an additional main node when editing the tree
configuration.
Parts for which the Accessories check box has been selected are then
displayed under an Accessories hierarchy level. Parts which have not
been identified in this way are listed under a Main part hierarchy level.
Example:
If the tree configuration has been adapted in this way, a superior
"Product group" hierarchy level is subdivided into the "Main part" and
"Accessories" hierarchy levels. The illustration shows an example of
the subdivision of the "Relays, contactors" product group.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
75
Here the default tree configuration has simply been extended. The
Accessories property was added to the bottom of the properties list in
the Tree configuration Main nodes dialog.
Using accessory lists

In EPLAN parts management, you can now create various lists for accessory parts. These accessory lists make it easy to manage alternative
accessory parts. Using these lists you can select a part from a list of
possible alternatives in device selection.
Example:
You want to create an illuminated pushbutton. The main element a
component is the rim of the button that is used to fix it in the front of the
enclosure, and a contact that is already screwed on.
The following colored caps are then created in an accessory list:
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Orange.
This list is defined as a necessary list, i.e., a part must be selected from
this list for the pushbutton to be complete.
Creating an accessory list
Accessory lists form their own highest hierarchy level in the parts management tree view. To create a list of this type, select the "Accessory list"
entry on the Tree tab and then choose Popup menu > New. The two
tabs Accessory list and Parts then appear on the right-hand side of
parts management.
76
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
On the Accessory list tab enter a unique name and a description for the
accessory list. This name appears in the parts management tree view
and in the selection of accessory parts on the Accessories tab, for
example. The other two fields, Creator and Last change, are filled out
automatically by EPLAN.
On the Parts tab, choose the accessory parts to be included in the
accessory list. Click the
(New) button on the toolbar above the table
to generate a new line. In the Part number field you can select parts in
the same way as for an assembly. To do so, click [...] in this field. The
Part selection dialog opens. Only the previously defined accessory
parts are displayed here. Choose the accessories you wish to include.
Once you have created an accessory list, you can assign this list to a
main part as an accessory.
Exporting and importing accessory lists
You can export and import accessory lists in text format, in XML format,
and in CSV format. The new file type CSV for accessory lists is
available for data exchange in CSV format.
If this file type is selected in the Export records dialog, all settings
relating to the part type and trade are grayed out and the data for all
accessory lists are exported. To export the data for a specific accessory
list, highlight it in the "Accessory list" hierarchy level and then select
Popup menu > Export.
Assigning accessories to a main part

To assign an accessory to a main part, click the
(New) button on the
Accessories tab. A new row then appears in the accessories table.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
77
Part number / name:

Click [...] in the relevant field in this column to select a part or part variant
from part selection. If the field-based filter "Accessories" is selected, only
defined accessory parts are displayed. You can also access the accessory lists here.
Required:
Select the appropriate check box in this column if the part is to contain a
required accessory part.
Variant:
The corresponding variant number of the part is displayed in this column
for an accessory part. You can overwrite this if required.
Part type:
The Part type ("Component" or "Accessory list") is entered automatically. The field is for information only and is grayed out.
The accessory parts stored here are displayed in the device selection for
the main part and can be selected there as accessory parts.
Data transfer on update of the parts database

If the parts database is in an older version, you are prompted to update
the database on opening parts management. If you answer this prompt
with [Yes], the parts database is updated.
If you click [No], then the parts database is not updated. The parts management data fields will then remain empty and cannot be edited.
Other program components which also access the data in the parts database (e.g. device selection) will output an equivalent message if the
parts database does not correspond to the current version.
78
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
When the database is updated, a data transfer for accessory parts from
the "Relays, contactors" product group takes place in the background. All
parts from this product group which have an accessory code and no
"Coil" type function template are accepted as accessories. This means
that on the new Accessories tab the check box of the same name is
selected for these parts. The parts to which this applies can be seen in
the System messages dialog.
Note:
As automatic recognition of other accessory parts is not possible during
the update, accessory parts from other product groups will be disregarded when the data is transferred and will have to be assigned
manually.
Accessory code in the list view
To enable you to identify the former accessory parts more easily after a
data transfer, the Accessory code property <22025> can be used in the
column configuration for the parts management list.
If you select the associated check box in the Column configuration
dialog, the "old" accessory code appears in the list. You can then select
the corresponding parts in the list and mark them as accessory parts
using the Accessories tab.
Accessory Parts in Device Selection

The changes made in parts management in relation to accessory parts
and the addition of accessory lists have implications for device selection
too. These are described in the next section.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
79
Changes in the "Device selection" Dialog

To make it easier to distinguish the parts in the list on the left-hand side
from the accessory parts, the name of this list has been changed to Main
parts. This list displays all the parts from the Parts management module
that are suitable for the selected device and for which the Accessories
check box on the Accessories tab is not selected.
If you select a main part in the list on the left-hand side, then all associated accessory parts are now displayed on the right-hand side. These
accessory parts must have previously been assigned to the main part in
parts management by entering them in the table on the Accessories tab
there.
The following new features have also been introduced in the Device
selection dialog:
New device selection
In a new device selection the most recently selected parts are now
highlighted in the Main parts list.
Devices with the "graphic" function definition
For devices with function definitions from the "Graphic" group, all parts
which have function templates with the "graphic" function definition
are displayed when the device is selected. In addition, all parts
without function templates and accessory parts are displayed. This
allows you to select parts from the "Mechanics" generic product
group, for example.
Parts without function templates
In the new EPLAN version parts without function templates are now
also displayed in the Selected parts: Functions / templates list.
These may be accessory parts or parts which have been assigned to
the device using part selection, for example.
80
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Device selection for special functions

Functions which are only needed for defining a device are handled in
a special way in device selection. These include black boxes, PLC
boxes, terminal strip definitions, plug definitions, cable definitions, and
shields.
If device selection is performed for a device which consists only of
such functions and is otherwise empty, then all parts which have at
least one function template for this function are displayed when the
device is selected.
Example:
For example, if you carry out a device selection at an empty PLC box,
only parts which have a function template with the function definition
"PLC box" (plus any number of function templates for the PLC connection points) are displayed. Parts which only have function templates for
the PLC connection points and none for the PLC box, however, are not
displayed.
Benefit: A device selection can also be carried out now for "empty"
PLC boxes, terminal strip definitions, etc.
As the most recently selected main parts are highlighted at
the same time, an appropriate accessory part can be selected immediately. This makes device selection faster.
Selecting accessories
In order to be able to transfer an accessory part to the Selected parts:
Functions / templates list, you must first select a part number for the
accessory in question. To do this click in the Selection column in the
appropriate accessory row.
To transfer an accessory part with a part number to the Selected parts:
Functions / templates list (and hence to select it), click as before on the
button (Select accessory part), for example.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
81
Note:
The procedure described above applies if the default settings are
selected for device selection. If the Overwrite old parts with current
selection check box is selected in the Settings: Device selection
dialog, then a main part can be selected in the Device selection dialog
with just one click. A part included in the Selected parts: Functions /
templates list is deleted and replaced with the highlighted main part. The
same applies when selecting an accessory. As soon as a part number is
entered for an accessory, the accessory too is accepted with just one
click.
Accessory lists as accessories
If the highlighted accessory is an accessory list, clicking in the Selection
column opens a selection dialog. Here you can select the part number of
the accessory part you require.
Required accessory
If you have defined an accessory part as "required" in parts management, then the part number of this accessory is automatically copied to
the Selection column. For "required" accessory lists the part number is
not copied automatically. In the Selection column click on [...] to open a
selection dialog in which you can select the part you require.
When you click [OK] to close device selection, the part numbers for the
selected main and accessory parts are copied to the Parts tab of the
properties dialog.
Note:
If the parts database is in an older version, you are prompted to update
the database on opening device selection. If you click [Yes], the parts
database is updated and you can access new accessory parts in the
device selection. If you click [No], the device selection is still opened
but no accessory parts appear in the Accessories list.
82
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Check Run for Missing, Required Accessory Parts

You can use the new check run 007018 to check devices to determine
whether the required accessory parts assigned to a main part are
present. If a main part is entered on the Parts tab for a device but the
required accessory part is missing, then this message is displayed.
Changes to the Device Selection Settings

Changes have also been made to the Settings: Device selection
dialog, which can be opened from device selection for example using
the [Settings] button.
The Use previous run setting has been renamed and its function has
changed.
Old name:
New name:
Use previous run
Automatic device selection
If the check box for this setting is selected, during device selection the
data for the part entered at the function are compared with the criteria set
for device selection. The Device selection dialog is only opened if a new
device selection is required (because an error such as over-allocation
has been found) or if no part has been entered at the function yet. If on
the other hand the part meets the criteria set for device selection, the
Device selection dialog is not opened. If you are carrying out a device
selection for multiple devices, then the devices to which an appropriate
part has already been assigned are skipped.
If an appropriate part has already been entered at a function but the
technical data for the part is missing (e.g. because the part number was
entered manually or via external editing), then this part data is automatically added during device selection. The data for the function templates
stored at the parts is also transferred.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
83
If the check box is not selected, the Device selection dialog is opened
for all selected devices, regardless of whether an appropriate part has
already been assigned. The automatic addition of technical data for an
existing part is not possible in this case.
Note:
If this check box is selected, the Device selection dialog is opened
under the following conditions:
No part has been entered at the device.
The Use available function data check box is selected. The function
data differs from the corresponding parts data.
The device is under-allocated with functions.
The Minimize unused functions check box is not selected. The
device is over-allocated with functions.
The Minimize unused functions check box is selected. The device is
over-allocated with functions, and the number of unused functions
exceeds the value set in the Number of unused functions field.
Consider accessories:
This check box no longer exists. Now if you highlight a main part in
device selection, all associated accessory parts are always displayed.
Only consider main function:
This check box is deselected by default. In this case only those devices
that cover all functions, i.e. both the main function and all auxiliary functions, are now offered. Devices that match the selected main function
and have any number of accessories are also offered. (No check is
made as to whether the accessory matches the functions.)
If the check box is selected, then as before all parts that match the
selected main function are offered, regardless of which auxiliary functions are available.
84
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Use available function data:

In the tabs under this check box you can specify which available function
data should be used as selection criteria for device selection.
Some new criteria have been added on the various tabs. For general
devices, for example, the Connection point description, Plug DT, and
Relevant to safety check boxes have been added. The Wire tab is also
new. This new feature has been introduced for the device selection for
wires (see section on page 339).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
85
New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On
The EPLAN Pro Panel add-on is used for placing electrical engineering
and fluid power devices from the EPLAN project, from the EPLAN parts
management, or from the EPLAN Data Portal, as required. In conjunction
with mechanical components such as cable ducts, mounting rails, mounting panels, or entire enclosures, EPLAN Pro Panel simplifies the construction of complex 3D mounting layouts dramatically.
Benefit: EPLAN Pro Panel makes it easy to construct complex 3D
mounting layouts. The user is supported by means of intelligent placement aids, implicit locked areas, information on
minimum distances, predefined handles, and mounting surfaces of the components used known as EPLAN eTouch
Technology.
86
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Qualified production and mounting diagrams in conformance

to standards can be created automatically on the basis of the
3D model information. The correct display of hidden lines and
associated customizations to the drawing if changes are
made to the 3D structure are both taken into consideration.
Finally, the EPLAN reporting process allows detailed legends
to be added to drawings and order lists and bills of materials
to be created for the pre-cut part, even for variable-length
parts.
Note:
The EPLAN Pro Panel add-on is available as an option for EPLAN
Electric P8 Compact, EPLAN Electric P8 Select, and EPLAN Electric P8
Professional, and for EPLAN Fluid Compact and EPLAN Fluid.
Some mechanical components can have several individually selectable
mounting surfaces, allowing the placement of other items. These include
mounting panels, doors, walls, profiles, and also electrical engineering
and fluid power devices, which are represented by a 3D graphical macro.
Other mechanical components have only an internally defined mounting
surface for devices, which cannot be changed and which are therefore
not shown in the tree view of the layout space navigator. These components include mounting rails and pole rails of busbar systems.
You can generate 2D model views of the mounting panels and enclosures mounted in the layout space, and these are saved on project
pages. These model views can include dimensions and other information
and can be used as production documents.
Reports in the form of enclosure legends and bills of material help you
with calculating and planning materials requirements.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
87
The following two new navigators are the central tools for the project
planning of 3D mounting layouts:
The layout space navigator lists the layout spaces and their structure.
The 3D mounting layout navigator lists the intended equipment
items.
More details about the functions of this add-on can be found in "Special
Topics EPLAN Pro Panel" in the complete PDF version of the News (see
page 342). Extensive and more detailed information can also be found in
the online help in the "EPLAN Pro Panel" section.
Note:
Just like pages, layout spaces defined in EPLAN Pro Panel belong to an
EPLAN project. If layout spaces are defined in a project, then they can
be opened in the EPLAN platform and viewed in 3D even without a
license for the EPLAN Pro Panel add-on. In this case you can use the
new Layout space menu option in the menu bar with its corresponding
functions and the layout space navigator. The same applies to EPLAN
View.
88
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Protected Devices
Protected Devices
Devices can now be protected from being changed in EPLAN. You can
use protected devices to identify already completed parts of a plant, for
example. A graphical editing operation such as "Delete pages", for example, will not remove these devices from the project. They are retained
as unplaced devices and continue to be displayed in the navigators and
reports (e.g. parts lists).
Benefit: Protected devices allow you to protect information stored on
items and components in preplanning from being accidentally
deleted. The protected devices are a fixed element of your
project and information stored there is permanently retained.
Multiple entries are avoided. All preplanning information is
available to all project participants for the entire lifetime of the
project, ensuring transparency and high-quality project documentation.
The new Protected function property <20475> is assigned to protect a
placed or unplaced function. This protection mainly applies to parts that
have been assigned to a function, but it also prevents the function from
being deleted. The protection also extends to any function templates that
may be stored on a part.
It is also possible to assign protection to all functions of a device simultaneously, thereby protecting the entire device. You can find out more in
the following sections: "Assigning Protection" on page 90 and "Using
Protected Devices" on page 93.
In addition, the new Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main
function property allows you to edit the entire device when working with
macros and copy functions. More information on this is provided in the
section "Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function"
on page 94.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
89
Protected Devices
Note:
Device groups are not protected as a single entity; each device in a
device group must be protected separately.
Assigning Protection
You can protect individual functions and connections or a complete
device.
Protecting functions or connections

To protect a function, first select it in the graphical editor or in a navigator
dialog. You should select a connection to be protected in the connections
navigator. Then open the appropriate properties dialog and switch to the
first tab (e.g. Plug definition, Connection, etc.).
In the Properties table, display the Protected function property. To do
this, click
(New) and select the property in the Property selection
dialog. Select the check box for the Protected function property.
As soon as you select this check box, the function or connection is protected. In this case, the function can no longer be deleted from the
project. In addition, assigned parts can no longer be used. This means
that device selection or part selection or actions such as "Exchange
part", "Edit part", or "Add part" cannot be executed.
90
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Protected Devices
Protecting devices
Under Project data > Devices there are now two new menu options,
Activate protection and Deactivate protection, which can be used to
switch protection of one or more selected devices on or off.
Protection for a device can only be switched on or off at a main function
or main terminal. Highlight one or more appropriate functions in the
graphical editor or in a navigator dialog and then select Project data >
Devices > Activate protection.
All functions of the device are then given the property Protected function. The device or individual functions of the device cannot be deleted.
The parts assigned to the device cannot be changed. In this case too, a
device selection or part selection or actions such as "Exchange part",
"Edit part", or "Add part" are not possible.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
91
Protected Devices
Changing properties
With both protected functions or connections and protected devices, it is
still possible to change properties on the first tab, <Function category>
or Connection.
Tip:
You can extend device protection by defining the check type "Prevent
errors" for the new check run 007019. In this way, you can prevent the
over-allocation of a protected device, the addition of further functions, or
the modification of data transferred to the functions from the parts.
Displaying protected devices in the navigators
In the tree view of the navigators protected functions are indicated by an
orange circle. The following icons are displayed for protected functions:
Icon
Meaning
Protected, placed main function.
Protected, unplaced main function.
Protected, placed auxiliary function.
Protected, unplaced auxiliary function.
Filter for project data

In the navigators, you can also filter by protected or unprotected functions. In the criteria selection for the various filters you can now access
the new property Protected function <20475> for this purpose. The new
property can also be displayed as an additional column in the list view in
the navigators (via Popup menu > Configure columns).
Removing device protection

To remove protection for one or more devices again, highlight the corresponding main functions or main terminals in the graphical editor or in a
navigator dialog and then select Project data > Devices > Deactivate
protection.
92
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Protected Devices
This removes the device protection. The Protected function property is

deactivated again for all functions of this device.
Using Protected Devices

To use the functions of protected devices when editing schematics, you
must assign the Protected function property to all functions of a device
that you wish to protect. A new check run, number 007021, allows you to
determine whether a device contains both protected and unprotected
functions.
Creating macros / copies of protected devices

If you create a macro or a copy in the schematic of a protected device,
then the Protected function property is stored with the main function in
the macro or copy.
When you insert such a macro or copy, the Protected function property
is inserted along with the main function.
Deleting functions
Protected functions cannot be deleted completely from the project; only
the placement can be deleted. This has the following implications:
For the graphical editor:
If you delete a placed, protected function in the graphical editor, only
the placement is deleted. This means that after deletion protected
functions remain as unplaced functions in the project and in the bill of
materials.
For the navigator dialogs:
Placed or unplaced protected functions cannot be deleted in the
navigator dialogs. In the Edit menu and in the Popup menu, the
Delete menu option is disabled for protected functions.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
93
Protected Devices
Using existing functions / assigning functions

The "Use existing" option for functions in the DT selection dialog is
not available for protected functions. Similarly, a device tag or function
cannot be assigned to a protected function in the graphical editor. The
target function must always be an unprotected function.
If on the other hand the protected function is the source for a "Use
existing" or "Assign" action with regard to an unprotected function, the
editable properties of the source function (together with the Protected
function property) are copied to the target function in their entirety and
the source function is then deleted.
Actions in the graphical editor

For actions in the graphical editor, e.g. moving or inserting additional
functions, for which DT adoption would be possible, the original full DT is
not changed by protected functions. If a protected device is affected by
such an action, then the identifying device tags of all components on the
page in question are protected against a DT change.
Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main

Function
The new property Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main
function <20476> is now available at main functions. If this property is
activated at a main function, the assigned, unplaced auxiliary functions
are managed together with the main function. For auxiliary functions this
property shows the value of the associated main function.
Benefit: The association between main function and unplaced
auxiliary functions makes handling even complex device
configurations easier and speeds up project planning for
these components.
94
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Protected Devices
Using this new property you can save all functions of a device to a macro
or a copy, for example, even if only some of the functions are placed in
the schematic. If only the placed auxiliary functions of a device are selected in the schematic, the associated main function is also written to
the macro or the copy as an unplaced function. It makes no difference if
the main function has not been placed or not been selected in the
schematic.
Creating macros / copies
If you have activated this property for a main function and you create a
macro or a copy of this main function in the schematic, then the unplaced
auxiliary functions are also written to the macro or the copy.
On inserting corresponding macros / copies, the unplaced auxiliary functions are inserted along with the main function. The unplaced auxiliary
functions thus behave in exactly the same way as function templates in
these actions.
Renaming functions
If main functions are renamed (e.g. in the properties dialog or by moving
them to a different location box), the unplaced auxiliary functions are
automatically renamed at the same time.
Deleting functions
If the main function is deleted, then the associated unplaced auxiliary
functions are also deleted.
Using existing functions / assigning functions
The behavior of the unplaced auxiliary functions when using existing
functions or assigning functions depends on whether the Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function property is activated
at the source function and / or at the target function.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
95
Protected Devices
Property activated
Behavior on using existing / assigning
at source function and

target function
The source function comes with its unplaced

auxiliary functions. The unplaced auxiliary
functions of the target are deleted along with
the main function.
at the source function

only
The source function comes with its unplaced

auxiliary functions. The unplaced auxiliary
functions of the target are retained.
at the target function

only
The source function does not come with any

unplaced auxiliary functions. The unplaced
auxiliary functions of the target are deleted
along with the main function.
Note:
The Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function
property can be used both separately and in combination with the
Protected function property.
96
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on
Definition of Multi-line Connections in the

"Single Line" Add-on
Note:
The "Single Line" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric P8
Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN
Electric P8 Professional.
The "Single Line" add-on permits the production and logical management of single-line schematics. It substantially simplifies e.g. the creation
and integration of plant overviews in your project documentation.
EPLAN now permits a purely single-line documentation of the schematic.
This can be useful if the connections between the equipment are largely
standardized and therefore no further detail in the form of a multi-line
diagram is necessary (e.g. two modules connected via a serial interface).
If the single-line plan is followed by further project planning stages based
on multi-line connections (reports, e.g. connection lists), you need to
create multi-line connections from the single-line connection schematic.
A new functionality (described next) now lets you define multi-line connections in the single-line diagram.
Benefit: From now on you can use intuitive, single-line diagrams to
plan detailed information for component circuitry. The number
of schematic pages and their complexity is reduced while
detailed documents for production and assembly are available as usual.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
97
The following preconditions must be in place for this:

The multi-line functions of the device (e.g. the pins) must be present
in the project as unplaced functions.
The single-line function of the device (e.g. of the plug connector)
placed in the single-line diagram must be a main function. The
Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function property should be activated for this function (see also the corresponding
section on page 94).
You can define the multi-line connections on single-line connection definition points. To this end the properties dialog for connection definition
points has been amended to include the new Interconnect devices tab.
This tab is the same in structure and functionality as the possibly familiar
Interconnect devices dialog.
Defining Multi-line Connections on a Single-line Connection Point

Once you have created single-line connections in the single-line diagram
by inserting macros / symbols, place a connection definition point on the
desired autoconnecting line in the single-line schematic.
In the Properties (components): Connection definition point dialog,
switch to the Symbol / function data tab and in the drop-down list for
the Representation type field select the "Single-line" setting. The Interconnect devices tab is then also displayed in the properties dialog.
98
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Device source:
The device which is the source of the single-line connection is automatically displayed in this field. The device connection points are displayed in
the Connection point column in the table below. In this case only connection points of unplaced multi-line functions are displayed.
Device target:
The device which is the target of the single-line connection is automatically displayed in this field. For the device target again, only connection
points of unplaced multi-line functions are displayed in the Connection
point column.
These two fields do not let you select a device as in the Interconnect
devices dialog.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
99
Note:
If a cable is assigned to the single-line connection (e.g. via a manual
cable definition), the Interconnect devices tab displays information
about this cable (in the fields Cable DT, Cable type, Statistics). You
cannot create a new cable.
Generating connections
To generate multi-line connections, select the same number of connection points in the left-hand and right-hand dialog areas and click on
[Generate connections]. The multi-line connection points are generated
and the targets for the respective connection points displayed in the table. Cable connections are generated if a cable is assigned to the singleline connection, otherwise conductor / wire connections are generated.
Editing connections
As you may be familiar from interconnecting devices, you can edit the
properties of the connections, delete connections, insert insulation, etc.
in the Interconnect devices tab. You can then e.g. use Popup menu >
Properties to edit the properties of a connection and for example define
the connection color and the connection designation. The multi-line connections and your connection data are saved at the connection definition
point.
Copying or moving connection definition points
If a complete schematic section (i.e. the connection definition point and
the relevant graphical symbols) is copied and pasted or moved, all connection data stored at the connection definition point is retained. The
same defined connections are created even if the pasted devices are
renumbered.
If only the connection definition point is copied and pasted or moved to
another existing single-line connection, the connection data is retained
only if this applies to the new connection points.
100
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Benefit: Using this copy function you can duplicate schematic-sections with minimum effort and you need only define the detailed wiring. In similar system parts, duplicating pre-defined
partial circuits saves you project planning time and increases
the quality of the project documentation in terms of detailed
connection information.
Defined multi-line connections in the connection navigator

In order to recognize the newly-produced multi-line connections in the
connection navigator you need to configure the columns of the navigator
such that the Connection type property <31075> is displayed. The
defined multi-line connections are characterized by the new "Multi-line
(automatic)" connection type.
New messages for defined multi-line connections

The settings for messages and check runs contain several new messages with which you can check the defined multi-line connections.
The following messages have been added to the "Connections" message class:
Message 005060 "Connection point has a multi-line connection in
both single- and multi-line representation"
Message 005061 "More than one multi-line connection definition at a
single-line connection"
Message 005062 "Multi-line connection definition does not match
source / target"
Message 005063 "Connection point is not contained in the multi-line
connection definition".
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
101
Graphical Device Tag List

Graphical device tag lists are a particular form of device tag list. This
display generally contains the device schematic, references to the
position of the associated functions in the schematic (device crossreferences), and technical and commercial data. This display, which is
common in the power supply industry, is now supported in EPLAN.
Benefit: The EPLAN platform automatically creates the graphical
device tag list display, which is widely used in the power
supply industry, from prepared master data. This automatic
creation means that all reports are always up to date and
always provide a 1:1 reproduction of the configuration and
connection point conditions of the devices. High-quality
device tag lists create transparency and ensure a uniform
level of information between all project participants.
Simple Graphical Device Tag Lists

To obtain the desired display, you need to use a dynamic form for device
tag lists (*.f03) and customize it accordingly.
102
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
The illustration below shows an extract from a simple graphical device
tag list.
Customizing forms for device tag lists

We recommend selecting the following properties in the form properties
of the relevant forms and setting them accordingly:
Combine in a line by <13111>
Here you indicate the form properties for which identical data should
be combined in one line. For example, you could combine the part
numbers of the device for the device tag list.
Dynamic line adjustment <13009>
You must activate this property in order for a separate line to be
created for each device.
Align graphics to insertion point (without alignment box)
<13112>
This property applies to graphical device tag lists with overviews.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
103
It applies to all placeholders for graphics for which the alignment box
is deselected. For symbols inserted by means of such a placeholder,
the handle is positioned on the insertion point of the placeholder text.
This means that the symbol graphic is not adjusted to fit the alignment
box.
Customizing the form's data areas
Next you must prepare the data header area and data area of the dynamic form for output. To do this, place placeholder texts in the form's
data header area for the parts data and for the component graphic.
The best way to do this is to split the data header area into two halves
one half for the technical data and one half with the device symbols
and separate these two parts using graphical auxiliary lines.
In the data header area of device tag lists you can now also output the
subtotal of subsequent data lines in a summation. Previously this was
only possible for the data area. In this way you can show the total number of parts for the devices which are listed in the following lines in the
header.
In the data area of the form you insert placeholder texts for output of the
device tag and for display of the placement. The resulting device tag list
then contains references to the placement of the associated function in
the schematic.
Specifying settings
After creating a form for the graphical device tag list, select this form in
the Settings: Output to pages dialog for the Report type "Device tag
list".
Before you generate a report for this report type, you must first ensure
that in the project-specific settings for the part in the Include parts group
box the Device without part number check box is not selected.
104
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
You can then generate the graphical device tag list. To do this, select the
"Device tag list" report type in the Select report dialog. The example
above shows one possible result.
Jumping to the schematic

From a graphical device tag list you can jump back to the schematic
again.
To do this, position the cursor on the desired device tag, press the
[Shift] key, and then click the DT in the report page. If only the device is
highlighted, select the menu option Find > Go to > Graphic to jump to
the component for the main function in the schematic.
Graphical Device Tag Lists with Overviews

If you use overviews (internal schematics) for complex devices in your
projects and you want this overview to be retained in the output graphical
device tag list, you must store data for the report in parts management
and define "subforms" for your dynamic form.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
105
Example:
The illustration below shows an extract from a graphical device tag list
with overviews.
Symbols for display in reports

You may need to create the symbols for the overview of the complex
devices first. We recommend that you create a separate symbol library
for this.
Note:
Do not select a basic symbol library in the Symbol library properties
dialog, as the newly created symbols from this library will only be used
for graphical purposes.
When you create the new symbols, in the Symbol properties dialog
select the new list entry "Graphic" for the Symbol type drop-down list.
This gives you the option of inserting macros and image files. The components in a macro are converted into graphical objects. You can also
copy components in the schematic and insert them as graphical objects.
106
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Note:
When you use a symbol, remember that there must always be a complete symbol library in the project. For symbols with lots of image files
this can lead to large volumes of data. Check the file sizes of the image
files used. When using symbols with image files, use multiple symbol
libraries if this will enable you to reduce the volume of data for the
project.
Data for reports

The overview symbol that is to be output in the graphical device tag list is
stored by default at the main part of the device in parts management.
(This is the first part on the Parts tab in the properties dialog.)
You can use the new Data for reports tab in parts management for this.
You can also assign an "Identifier for reports" for the part here. Using this
identifier you can specify in the form editor which subform is to be used
for the part (using the Conditional forms function).
This tab is available for the part types "Component", "Assembly", and
"Module".
Identifier for reports:
Select the appropriate identifier for the reports from the drop-down list, or
enter a new identifier manually. You can use this identifier in a dynamic
form to define the subform to be evaluated.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
107
Symbols:
In this table click [...] to open symbol selection and select the symbol to
use to display the device.
Notes:
Note that identifiers for reports are managed in a single language only
and that the values for the report are case-sensitive.
Note that only the symbols from the symbol libraries stored in the
project are displayed in symbol selection here.
Conditional forms
Conditional forms allow you to define a "subform" for a dynamic form.
The output of a subform is associated with certain conditions. This produces a so-called "main form" and the "conditional forms" assigned to it.
The conditional forms must be the same form type as the main form.
For the output of a graphical device tag list this means that both the main
form and the subforms must be of the "Device tag list" type (*.f03).
The conditional forms and the conditions are defined in the form editor
using Insert > Conditional forms. The icon for conditional forms is
then attached to the cursor and can be placed by clicking anywhere in
the desired main form. The Conditional forms dialog is then opened.
108
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Form name:
If subforms have already been defined, this list shows their names. Click
(New) to select a suitable form from the Select form dialog.
If the list contains several forms with different conditions, these forms are
displayed in groups and, if the condition changes, separated by a line.
To open a subform, select it in the Form name list and then click on
(Open form). The form is then opened in the form editor and the Conditional forms dialog is closed.
Filter:
In this table, you specify filter criteria for the forms.
In the toolbar for the filters click on
(New) to go to the Criteria
selection dialog and select the criterion you require for the conditional
forms. For graphical device tag lists select the property Identifier for
reports <20858>.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
109
Note:
Note that you can also use any other available criterion for conditional
forms. If you use the function definition as a criterion, for example, you
could define subforms for PLC boxes in this way and hence output them
separately in the device tag list.
Value:
Enter the comparison value that is to be compared to the selected
property in this column. If the condition specified here is met when the
report is generated, then the associated subform is used. To output
graphical device tag lists enter the corresponding value of the property
Identifier for reports in this column.
For certain other properties or function data (e.g. function definition) you
can click [...] to open a selection dialog and select the value you require.
Editing conditional forms
To edit conditional forms, double-click in the open main form on the
placed icon for the conditional forms.
You cannot insert more than one icon for conditional forms in a main
form.
Generating reports of conditional forms
The subforms selected in the Conditional forms dialog must be dynamic forms too.
If several forms with filter criteria are entered in this dialog, then on
generating reports each object is checked to determine whether the
defined conditions match one or more subforms. All matching forms are
reported in succession (in the order in which they appear in the dialog);
only the dynamic areas "Data header area", "Data area", and "Data
footer area" from the subform are reported.
110
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Form properties, graphics outside areas, and the dynamic areas

"Header", "Conditional area", and "Footer" are disregarded and taken
from the main form.
You can design the subforms in any way you want. If you want to use
full-page symbols for the report, then you must make this area in the
data header area of the subform big enough.
Example:
Example of the design of a subform for a graphical device tag list with a
full-page overview.
Here A and B represent the data header area of the form (A: area containing placeholder texts for the part reference data, B: area in which the
symbol for the report (overview) is output). The data area C is where the
device tag and the function placements are output when the report is
generated.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
111
If the defined conditions do not match any subform when a report is

generated for an object, then this object continues to be reported with the
main form.
Outputting symbols on multiple pages
If several subforms match an object, you can choose to split large
symbols for overviews.
In order to do this you must store several symbols at the part in parts
management. Then create several subforms with placeholder texts for
the various part symbols. For instance, you could place the property
Parts data [1] / Symbol for report [1] on the first subform, the property
Parts data[1] / Symbol for report [2] on the second form, and so on.
On generating reports these forms are used one after another, and if the
symbols are full-page symbols, several pages are generated.
The desired display is thus created automatically for each device and
can be updated at any time.
112
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Symbols for Complex Devices

Switchgear and protective gear from electrical engineering are often
planned in two different displays. These devices have a large number of
complex functions and are therefore displayed in an overview. By contrast, the individual functions in the multi-line schematic are often used in
a distributed manner in the project. Until now, special complex symbols
created by users themselves were used for the individual functions.
To make it easier to display the functions of complex devices in future,
we have included many new "standard symbols" in the new version.
These symbols, consisting only of 1 to 4 connection points, can be
customized with graphics in any way you want. For consistent project
planning in EPLAN the symbols are saved as symbol macros and stored
in parts management.
Benefit: The new standard symbols reduce the number of symbols
needed to display complex devices. This makes creating and
managing symbols for complex devices easier and more efficient. You have much more freedom in the graphical design
of schematics, yet at the same time the logic is standardized.
Example:
The illustration below shows the overview of a complex switchgear.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
113
Procedure
To create an individual function of a complex device, start by selecting
one of our new standard symbols in the Symbol selection dialog (see
"New Device Connection Points") and insert this symbol in the schematic. Add your choice of graphic to the symbol.
Then set the appropriate function definition at the inserted symbol. If the
complex symbol is to represent an NO contact, for example, then select
a corresponding function definition for the inserted symbol in the Symbol
/ function data tab (e.g. "NO contacts, thermal releases").
Then save the edited symbol as a symbol macro and store it at the
corresponding function template for a part in parts management (see
"Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template" on page 117). The
function definition at the symbol in the symbol macro must match the
function definition of the template at the part. Such a part can then be
inserted as a device in the schematic.
New Device Connection Points

New standard symbols have been provided for creating symbol macros.
In the SPECIAL symbol library under Electrical engineering//
Electrical engineering special function// Device connection point// Device connection point, variable you can select
many new device connection points with 2, 3, and 4 connection points.

The following device connection point types are available:
Static device connection points:
In these device connection points all connection points are a fixed
distance apart and point in the same direction.
114
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
The illustration below shows the static device connection points S2DCP
(variant F), S3DCP (variant D), and S4DCP (variant F).
Dynamic device connection points:

In these device connection points the connections point in opposite
directions.
Example:
The illustration below shows the dynamic device connection points
D2DCP, D3DCP, and D4DCP (all variant A).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
115
If you have selected a dynamic device connection point, then the first
click defines the insertion point and the position of the first connection
point. The other connection points remain attached to the cursor and can
be placed by pointing the mouse at a selection area. A second click then
defines the position of these connection points.
All these device connection points have the function definition "Device
connection point, variable".
New device connection points with just one connection point
In addition, the following four symbols (with plugs) have been added to
the existing device connection points with just one connection point:
DCPP3
DCPPJIC
DCPPO
DCPPOJIC.
So device connection points are now available in all connection point
variants with one to four connection points.
116
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template

To enable the created symbol macros to be stored at the function templates in parts management, on the Function templates tab the Symbol
macro column has been added to the Device selection (function
templates) table.
Click [...] to go to the Select macro dialog and select the desired symbol
macro. Selecting a symbol macro deletes the content of the Symbol cell
and vice versa.
If a corresponding part is entered as a device, then the symbol macros
stored at the function templates are used on placement. If this is done
using the menu options Insert > Device, then you can browse through
the functions (templates) using the [N] key and select the one you want.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
117
Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on
Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus

Extension" Add-on
Note:
The "PLC & Bus Extension" is an optional add-on for EPLAN Electric P8
Channel-oriented operation allows fast assigning of PLC connection
points from the navigator to the placed functions in the schematic.
Assignment via a channel display in the tree is thereby facilitated.
Benefit: Channel-oriented operation of the PLC connection points significantly simplifies and speeds up editing of the PLC connection points. You will see immediately which connection points
belong with a channel, and you can edit the connection points
together.
The following sections deal with channel display in the tree, and with a
possible procedure:
"Improved Views in the PLC Navigator" on page 119
"Inserting PLC Cards" on page 123
"Macro Placement" on page 123
"Assigning Functions" on page 124.
118
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Improved Views in the PLC Navigator

The tree view in the PLC navigator has been extended to add the
Channel-oriented view so that channels can be displayed. In addition,
the two views mentioned previously have been renamed as follows:
Old name:
New name:
Schematic-oriented
DT-oriented
PLC-oriented
Address-oriented
In addition, the address-oriented view has been adapted to fit with the
other views and now also displays PLC boxes and other PLC data.
This means that all PLC data present in the project is now displayed in
all views, i.e. PLC boxes, all PLC connection points and function templates. Thus empty PLC boxes are also displayed, such as PLC boxes
which contain only function templates.
If you want to restrict the display to specific data, this can be done by
means of a filter.
Example:
If you want to display just the I/O connection points which have a PLC
address in the address-oriented view as in the earlier versions, you
need to filter by the criterion Properties > PLC address.
To do this, go to the PLC - <project name> dialog, click [...] next to the
Filter field, and specify the following settings in the Filter dialog:
Active Negated Criterion
PLC address
Operator Value
<>
If only I/O connection points are displayed in the address-oriented view

(i.e. also I/O connection points without addresses), filter by the function
group PLC connection point, I/O, 1 connection point.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
119
To do this, specify the following settings in the Filter dialog:

Active Negated Criterion
Function group
Operator Value
=
PLC connection point,

I/O, 1 connection point
The following views are now available in the popup menu in the PLC
navigator:
DT-oriented: The PLC data is ordered by their device tags according
to the project structure.
Address-oriented: The PLC data is arranged by addresses within the
project structure.
That is, the I/O connection points are displayed under the PLC address. The associated power supplies are only also displayed under
the PLC address if the corresponding PLC address is entered at the
power supply. In addition, the PLC boxes and connection points are
grouped under the relevant CPU if this property is entered at the
associated PLC box.
Channel-oriented: The PLC data is ordered by channel within the
project structure (see the following section on page 120).
Channel display in the PLC navigator

To switch to channel-oriented view, select the menu path Popup menu >
View > Channel-oriented in the navigator tree.
All the PLC connection points belonging to a channel are summarized
and displayed under the channel ( icon). That is, the I/O connection
points and associated power supplies are displayed under the channel
designation. The
icon for the channel shows whether there is a safetyrelevant connection below. In addition, the preceding
icon indicates
whether the channel contains unplaced I/O connection points.
120
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
PLC connection points which do not have a channel designation which

has been either determined or manually input will be arranged according
to their DT.
The following icons are some of the ones displayed in the PLC navigator
tree view:
Icon
Icon
Meaning
(Unplaced) (Placed)
Device
PLC box (main function with representation
type "Multi-line" or "P&I diagram")
Superimposed PLC box (main function)
Channel
Channel with safety-relevant connection point
Function template
Multi-line auxiliary function (here: PLC
connection point)
Superimposed function (here: multi-line PLC
connection point)
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
121
Example:
The illustration below shows the channel-oriented view for the sample
project EPLAN-DEMO.
Here, the tree structure level has been opened with the channel Out0 for
the PLC box with the DT A7 and a PLC connection point for Out1 has
been set to Relevant to safety.
122
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Inserting PLC Cards

Before actual assigning, first add the PLC card that you want to use in
the project as a device to the PLC navigator (via Popup menu > New
device). If the part selected has only function templates and not macros,
a PLC box will be generated which only contains function templates. If,
on the other hand, the part also has macros, the function templates will
be superimposed via the multi-line macros from the macro file registered
for the part.
Note:
If you would like to assign the functions individually, it is wise to use parts
which contain no part macros so that no superimposed functions arise.
DT inheriting is taken into account during assigning. If you assign a single function, you may find that additional, as yet not assigned PLC connection points inherit the DT from this function. These PLC connection
points then appear twice under the channel as an unplaced function
with an inherited DT (
icon), and as a placed, superimposed function
( icon). As soon as all PLC connection points have been assigned, only placed, superimposed functions will be displayed.
Macro Placement
With the procedure described here, the next thing you will do is insert the
multi-line macros in the schematic. These serve as target functions for
assigning. The macros should include only PLC connection points (without PLC boxes) to PLC functions where possible, as only PLC connection points will be assigned from channel-oriented view during assigning.
If the macros do indeed include PLC boxes, these must not have a part
as they will otherwise represent devices themselves, i.e., their PLC connection points have already been assigned automatically.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
123
Tip:
When placing the macros, use the Number with flag "?" mode in order
to identify PLC target functions. All other functions included in the macro
(wiring of the PLC connection points) can be subsequently numbered
later using DT numbering.
Assigning Functions
Once the macros have been placed, assign the unplaced functions or
PLC card function templates to the component. To do this, mark the
channel in the PLC navigator and select the Popup menu > Assign
menu item. All PLC connection point functions or function templates belonging to the channel marked can be assigned individually to the PLC
connection points placed in the schematic.
As soon as a channel contains a placed multi-line I/O connection point
through assigning, the channel will no longer be identified in the PLC
navigator via the additional
icon for unplaced functions which preicon for the target functions in the
cedes the channel. Moreover, the
schematic is no longer displayed in the PLC navigator as the original
function of the PLC connection point is replaced by the unplaced function.
Note:
During assigning, a check is carried out to find out whether the unplaced
function or the function template (source function) has the same function
group as the PLC connection point in the schematic (target function). If
the function groups of source and target function do not match, a message is displayed.
124
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Tips:
Simultaneous assigning of all functions / function templates belonging
to a channel is possible via a multiple choice of target functions. To do
this, after selecting the Assign menu item click in the schematic and
draw a frame around the required PLC connection points. Another
option is to group the PLC connection points in the schematic prior to
assigning (one group per channel).
The unplaced functions or function templates are then assigned in the
order in which they are displayed in the PLC navigator. The appropriate target functions are sought in the schematic according to their
graphic sequence.
You can also assign a function using drag & drop, by holding down
the key combination [Ctrl] + [Shift] and dragging the desired function
from the PLC navigator to the target function in the schematic.
Taking account of the representation type

If the selection in the PLC navigator contains only one representation
type for the source function, this will be assigned to the appropriate
target function (with the same function definition) independently of the
representation type. The target function retains its representation type.
If you have selected several representation types of a specific source
function in the PLC navigator, the function will be assigned which has the
same representation type as the appropriate target function. If there is no
identical representation type for appropriate source or target functions
(with the same function definition), an appropriate source function will be
selected using the sequence for global editing.
With this type of multiple choice, the representation type of the function
which is attached to the cursor will be displayed by means of additional
text on the cursor. Use [Tab] to toggle between the representation types.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
125
Using existing PLC connection points blockwise

As an alternative to assigning, you can also use the Use existing PLC
connection points blockwise action to allocate the PLC connection
points. To do this, first mark the target functions in the schematic and
then select the Project data > PLC > Use connection points blockwise menu items.
As part of the extensions noted previously, the dialogs for blockwise use
of existing data now also display the Channel designation (automatic)
column by default. In addition, in the list representation of the Select
PLC connection points to place them blockwise dialog, it is possible
to configure the dialog columns and select the Channel designation
(automatic) property as the column header.
126
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module

Note:
The "Net Based Wiring" add-on is available for EPLAN Electric P8
Professional as an optional extra.
The order in which components are connected in EPLAN Electric P8 is
defined by default as soon as the connections are drawn. This is done
through the choice of the appropriate connection symbol (T-node,
jumper, double junction, etc.), in which the logic model for the target
specification is stored.
Net-based connections in the new add-on module "Net Based Wiring"
enable a schematic to be created without having to immediately define
how the connections are arranged. EPLAN notes the internal flow of the
connections, irrespective of how they are graphically represented in the
schematic.
Benefit: You can generate the schematic without taking into account the precise wiring. When the spatial arrangement of
the components and their optimal wiring is clarified, this
information can be added as required.
Connections can easily be represented in the schematic
even in the case of complex wiring sequences. The plans
become more legible, particularly with potentials over more
than one page which are distributed throughout the entire
project.
Simple net connections in the schematic and detailed
reports of the connections via connection lists can also
meet the requirements of the new machine guideline in
respect of clear, readily legible machinery / plant documentation with minimal effort.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
127
Example:
The following illustrations clarify how the connections in the schematic
are represented simply and clearly, even in the case of a complex wiring
sequence, by using net-based connections.
Prior progression of the autoconnecting lines for the connections of a
potential with target specification.
New progression of the autoconnecting lines for a net with net-based

connections. The connections defined at the net definition point NBW are
also shown in the illustration.
128
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Nets with Net-based Connections

In EPLAN Electric P8, it is now possible to define nets with net-based
connections. Unlike a "normal" net with automatic connections, the connection sequence within the net here is not determined via the connection symbols in the schematic; it must be specified later in the properties
dialog of the associated net definition point.
The following is possible for nets with net-based connections:
Working methods employing both target specification and net-based
connections can be mixed within a project.
A mixture of connections with target specification and net-based
connections can also occur within a net.
In net-based connections, connectors are always drawn as connection points.
Net-based connections are defined using a net definition point. Which
connection points of the net are connected to each other is stored in
the net definition point.
The connections and their order can be retrospectively edited without
having to modify the drawing.
Net-based connections can be automatically designated in the same
way as normal connections using connection numbering.
Interruption points enable net-based connections to be continued on
different pages.
The connection properties of net-based connections can also be
modified using "external editing". The connection itself cannot be
modified using "external editing".
Net-based connections are also taken into account on data transfer
from EPLAN 21 (see the relevant section on page 180).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
129
Note:
Cable definition lines can not be used for net-based connections. The
connections under a cable definition line are not recognized as cable
conductors in a net with net-based connections.
Defining net-based connections

Net-based connections are defined using a net definition point. Which
connection points of the net are connected to each other is stored in the
net definition point. The connection points are identified by a connection
point ID that is unique within the net. The IDs are automatically assigned
but can be changed manually. These IDs are also copied when a net is
copied, so the connections stored in the net definition point are retained.
Example:
In a "normal" net with automatic connections, the potential L1 is connected with the four fuses (-F1 to -F4). For the connection sequence
at the T-nodes, the 1st target right, 2nd target below directions have
been defined.
130
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The following four connections are shown in the connections navigator:

Connection (source)
Connection (target)
L1
-F1:1
L1
-F2:1
L1
-F3:1
L1
-F4:1
At the T-nodes, the Specify targets check box is unchecked and a net
definition point with the net name N1 is added.
After defining the net connections in the net definition point, the following connections appear for the five connection points:
Connection point ID
Connection (source) Connection (target)
L1
L1
-F1:1
-F1:1
-F1:1
-F2:1
-F2:1
-F2:1
-F3:1
-F3:1
-F3:1
-F4:1
-F4:1
To achieve a complete net, the connection points can also be connected with one another in different sequences.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
131
In practice, the sequence of the relay is compliant with the optimized

wiring sequence (for example) in the enclosure.
Disabling target specification of connection symbols

If you want to define a net in a project in which only net-based connections appear, or only partially net-based connections appear, you have
to disable target specification of the associated connection symbols
(T-nodes, jumpers, double junctions) to do this. For this, you have the
following two options:
Disable target specification manually:
To disable target specification at an individual connection symbol
with a branch option, the relevant properties dialogs now control the
Specify targets check box.
132
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If this check box is deactivated, the target order for the relevant connector will not be evaluated and the connector will be shown as a
point. In this case the connections are not automatically generated
and have to be specified manually.
If the Specify targets check box is selected, EPLAN automatically
generates connections.
Disable target specification by default:
To do this, go via Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing >
Connection symbols to the Settings: Connection symbols dialog
and select the new Deactivate 'Specify targets' property when
inserting a net definition point check box.
If this is the case, the Specify targets property in the corresponding
connection symbols is deselected when net definition points are
inserted.
Note:
If you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on module,
the Specify targets check box will normally not be displayed. If you
open a project in this instance in which this check box has been deselected for a connection symbol, the check box still appears in the dialog
but you cannot cancel deactivation of the target specification.
Specifying Nets with Net-based Connections

To define a net with net-based connections, you first have to insert a net
definition point.
Inserting net definition points

Using a net definition point, you can assign properties to the connection
running via this point (such as Connection designation, Cross-section
/ diameter, etc.) and give the net in question a unique name.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
133
To do this, select the Insert > Net definition point menu items. The
symbol for the net definition point hangs on the cursor. Click in the schematic to place the net definition point. The Properties (components):
Net definition point dialog is opened.
Net name:
Enter the name of the net defined via the net definition point. The new
EPLAN410, Property placement.Net names layer is used to display
the net name.
134
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Notes:
Remember that the net name must be unique within a project. To
check this, you can use the new message 005054 in the check runs.
No potentials and signals can be defined at net definition points. The
potentials and signals must be defined via a potential definition point
or a potential connection point in the project.
The net has a higher priority than the signal or the potential. For forwarding properties to a connection, this means that the properties
stored in a net definition point take precedence over the properties
stored in a potential definition point.
Tip:
As an alternative to insertion via the menu item, you can also insert a
net definition point via a symbol button. To do this, click the
(Net definition point) button on the Connections toolbar.
Then on the Net connections tab, define the connections within the net.
Defining daisy chains

A net with net-based connections will not be complete until all connection
points have been connected. This takes place at the net definition point
on the Net connections tab. This generates a list of connection points
which are connected to one another pairwise in sequence a so-called
"daisy chain".
In the Properties (components): Net definition point dialog, select the
Net connections tab. The Connection points table displays all the connection points in the net. Select Popup menu > Create daisy chain.
Click the connection point at which the daisy chain is to begin. The connection point is shown in the Connections table.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
135
Click in sequence on the other connection points that are to be included

in the daisy chain. The connection points in the daisy chain are shown in
the Connections table. Select Popup menu > End daisy chain. A
horizontal line is added to the Connections table to indicate that the
daisy chain is complete.
If not all connection points are connected with one another, you can repeat this action in order to define another daisy chain. Click [Apply] to
save the defined daisy chains.
Note:
If a net has more than one daisy chain, these must also be interconnected in order to create a complete net.
Tips:
As an alternative to creating and ending daisy chains via the popup
menu, you can also click the
(Create daisy chain) and
(End
daisy chain) button in the Connection points table.
Double-clicking on a connection point in the Connection points table
starts a new daisy chain. If a daisy chain has already begun, doubleclicking ends the daisy chain so begun.
136
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Connection points:
All connection points for the net are shown in this table.
(Edit) allows you to
Selecting the popup menu item Properties or
change the connection point ID (the property ID for net-based connections). Using the popup menu item Change target order, it is also
possible to change the order of the targets for the selected connection
point.
Connections:
In this table, each daisy chain is displayed as a list of connection points.
You can also display and edit the properties of the connections.
Double-clicking on the popup menu item Properties or the
(Edit)
button here opens the properties dialog for the connection between the
connection point selected and the connection point following this in the
list.
Clicking on
(Delete) removes a selected connection point. To move
selected connection points, use the
(Move up / Move down) buttons. All of these actions also change the connections.
Connection sources and targets
The first connection point of a daisy chain is the source of the first connection. The second connection point of the daisy chain is the target of
the first connection. Similarly, the second connection point in the daisy
chain is the source of the second connection, and the third connection
point is the target of this connection. The same applies to all further connections in a daisy chain. You can modify the order of the source and
target of a connection stored in a net definition point by activating the
Exchange source and target property in the properties dialog for that
connection.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
137
Other connections
You can use the Other connections popup menu item of the Connections table to open a subsequent dialog. Here, the other connections for
this net are displayed that are not stored in the net definition point. These
include connections that are defined using connectors with target specification or via other net definition points.
Tip:
You can select the complete daisy chain by clicking on the separator
underneath it. This allows you to move the entire daisy chain using the
arrow buttons, for example, or to delete it using the
button.
Displaying Nets and Net-based Connections

Note:
Net-based connections, defined nets, and net tracking are displayed
even if you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on
module. In this instance, the properties dialog of a net definition point
already inserted in the project can in fact be opened, but the net
definition cannot be edited.
Net-based connections in the connections navigator

The connections stored in the net definition point are not immediately
visible in the connections navigator. Connections are not generated from
the information contained in the net definition point until the connections
are updated. Only then will these connections be displayed in the connections navigator.
Displaying nets in the potential navigator

The nets defined in a project are displayed in addition to the defined
potentials and signals in the tree and list view of the potential navigator.
138
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Tree view
and its net name are displayed under the
In this view, a defined net
tree structure levels "Potential" and "Signal". A tree structure level under
this shows the net definition points
with their placement.
The following icons are displayed in the tree view of the potential navigator:
Icon
Meaning
Identifies the project level. This icon is only displayed when
several projects are open.
Potential
Signal
Placed potential definition point
Net
Placed net definition point
Example:
The illustration below clarifies the representation of a net (here with the
net name N1) and net definition point in the tree view of the potential
navigator.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
139
List view
In this view, the net name is also shown as a column header in addition
to the potential and signal names and for placement.
When selecting a net name in tree or list, the corresponding net definition
point is displayed in an opened preview (Graphical preview dialog,
Property preview dialog).
Note:
Nets without net names or net definitions are not displayed in the
potential navigator.
Highlighting nets
In addition to potentials or signals, nets can now also be temporarily
highlighted in color to allow a quick overview of their extent. The currently selected net is then colored according to the colors you have
defined in the user settings.
Benefit: The color identification allows you to quickly check selected
nets in the graphical editor. This provides you with security
when defining net-based connections and enhances the
quality of your work results.
Select View > Net tracking. Click a connection symbol or connection
line. EPLAN searches for the associated net and colors this completely
(i.e., also over page boundaries). Click another connection to remove the
highlighting of the first net and color the net associated with this connection. Again select the View > Net tracking menu items to remove the
highlighting of the net.
140
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Notes:
The color settings for potential, signal and net tracking are defined
jointly under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > 2D
in the same Track potential drop-down list.
Color highlights for potentials, signals, or nets can only be removed
when the connections are active.
Once potential, signal or net tracking has been terminated by pressing
[Esc] or selecting Popup menu > Cancel action, tracking has to be
disabled and enabled again (e.g. by selecting View > Net tracking)
before you can remove the color highlights from a potential / signal /
net again.
Tip:
You can also enable and disable net tracking by clicking on the
(Net tracking) button in the View toolbar.
Editing Nets with Net-based Connections

Connecting nets
In EPLAN, a net is a subset of a signal. It consists of connection points
that are connected directly to each other and the connections between
these connection points.
Normally, a net in the graphical editor ends at a function. Most functions
have net isolation as standard. In the new version, you now have the
option of identifying a function (e.g. a terminal) as "net-connecting" and
thereby extending a net. Potential connection points are always netconnecting.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
141
For this purpose, the new Net-connecting check box is available in the
properties dialog for components in the Symbol / function data tab in
the Function data (logic) group box. Select this check box if the function is to be net-connecting.
Example:
It may sometimes be necessary to continue a net via a terminal or a pin.
If, for example, the Net-connecting property is assigned to the terminal
-X100, the lamps -H10 and -H20 will be part of the same net and can be
connected to each other using a net-based connection.
Modifying nets
The connections stored in the net definition point are managed using the
connection point ID (ID for net-based connections property).
Renaming a function
If functions within the net are renamed, the connections are retained, as
the connection point IDs will not have changed.
142
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Removing a function from a net

If a function is deleted from a net, its connection points and the connections to these remain stored at the net definition point but will be flagged
as invalid in the Connections table.
The invalid connections must then be deleted either manually in the
properties dialog of the net definition point or automatically when the
project is compressed. For this, the new Remove invalid connections
setting is available in the Settings: Compression dialog under Net
definition points.
Replacing a deleted function
If you insert a new function in a net and assign the same connection
point IDs as those of the previously deleted function to the connection
points, the connections are retained and lead to the new function. If the
new function has different connection point IDs, these connection points
will not be connected and the net will be incomplete.
Further editing options and examples are provided in the EPLAN online
help. For more information, see the section entitled "Net-based connections".
Net-based connection reports

Net-based connections can also be taken into account in the reports. On
the one hand, you have the option of placing the connection property Net
name <33007> as placeholder text in various forms (e.g. connection list,
parts list, etc.).
Secondly, net-based connections can be output in reports sorted by nets
and daisy chains. The following new properties can be used for this
purpose:
Net index <31076>: Identifies the net in the case of net-based
connections.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
143
Daisy chain index <31077>: Identifies the daisy chain within a net in
the case of net-based connections.
Connection index <31078>: Identifies the connections within a daisy
chain in the case of net-based connections.
In addition, the Connection type property <31075> can be used as a
filter criterion in reports so that only connections with the value "netbased" are output.
Correcting connections
To be able to automatically correct errors which may occur when working
with net definition points, the correction run for connections has been
extended.
Now, when you select the menu path Project data > Connections >
Correct, the new Correct connections dialog will open in place of the
previous prompt. For correction of net definition points, the following
check boxes are available here:
Merge net definition points:
If this check box is activated, a number of net definition points within a
network are combined to form a single net definition point. The remaining
net definition point contains all the connections and properties that were
defined in the other net definition points. In the event of a conflict, the
first graphical net definition point "wins".
Remove superfluous net definition points:
If this check box is activated, the net definition points that are not required to define the connections are removed. This will be the case, for
instance, if the connections of the net are defined using connectors with
target specification. If additional properties are stored in the net definition
point, a connection definition point with identical properties is placed here
instead of the net definition point.
144
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Note:
If you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on module,
the Correct connections dialog will not be displayed. In this instance,
the Merge connection definition points action is directly executed after
a prompt.
New messages for net-based connections

To check nets with net-based connections, a number of new messages
is available to you in the settings for messages and error checking. The
following messages have been added to the "Connections" message
class:
Message 005046 "Incomplete net"
Message 005047 "Net definition point contains incomplete
connections"
Message 005048 "Net contains connection symbols with the 'Specify
targets' property"
Message 005049 "More than one net definition point on a net"
Message 005050 "Duplicate ID for net-based connections within a net
(%1!s!)"
Message 005054 "Different nets with identical net name (%1!s!)"
Message 005055 "Several signal definitions on one signal"
Message 005056 "Conflict between net and potential or signal"
Message 005057 "Net definition point with incorrect potential"
Message 005058 "Net definition point with incorrect signal".
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
145
New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration

The new EPLAN EMI technology (EPLAN Mechatronic Integration) allows mechanical and automation engineering to access common design
data. The basis for this is the shared storage of EPLAN data and design
data from AutoCAD Inventor in the EPLAN platform. This makes it possible to edit a project in parallel in different engineering disciplines, allowing a mechatronic workflow to be displayed.
Benefit: EPLAN EMI allows data exchange between the different
engineering disciplines. Information from one team can also
be used "across the disciplines" by other teams involved
in the design process. This two-directional data exchange
accelerates the design process. It helps to avoid errors and
inconsistencies, reinforces information exchange between
departments, improves the quality of documentation, and
encourages collaboration between departments.
EPLAN EMI Add-ons

EPLAN Mechatronic Integration now provides the following add-ons:
EPLAN EMI Collaboration for AutoCAD Inventor:
This module enables AutoCAD Inventor to be connected to the
EPLAN platform at item level. It allows the user to synchronize item
lists in both directions and import as yet unplaced mechatronic items
directly into their planning environment.
EPLAN EMI Cabling for AutoCAD Inventor:
This module allows cable data to be exchanged between EPLAN
Electric P8 and AutoCAD Inventor. The electrical engineer can use
the 3D model, the virtual prototype, to calculate cable lengths and
therefore create the production documents for cabling in EPLAN
Electric P8 early in the project.
146
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
EPLAN EMI Piping for AutoCAD Inventor:

Fluid power, instrumentation & control and process engineers can use
this module to import the length and diameter of pipes and tubes into
EPLAN Fluid and / or EPLAN PPE from the 3D model in AutoCAD
Inventor.
Note:
The EPLAN EMI add-ons are available as an option for EPLAN Electric
P8 Professional, EPLAN Fluid, and EPLAN PPE.
Importing Mechanical Data

To import model data from Mechanics into the EPLAN platform you
must first open the mechatronics navigator using Project data > Mechatronics > Navigator. Then select Popup menu > Import mechanical
model. In the next dialog, open the AutoCAD Inventor file to be imported
using the [Open] button.
When the mechanical model has been imported into the project, the
mechatronic data is displayed in the mechatronics navigator. The model
can be displayed in the 3D view of the EPLAN platform. The mechanical
model can also be placed on a project page as a model view (see the
section "Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI" on page 154).
Mechatronics Navigator
When the mechanical model has been imported into the project, the data
is displayed in the mechatronics navigator. This navigator visualizes the
essential mechatronics data which is used in both disciplines (EPLAN
platform and AutoCAD Inventor).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
147
Tree view
In the tree view of the navigator, all the components from the 3D model
are displayed in a hierarchical structure. The tree structure reflects the
assembly topology of Inventor's assembly view.
The icons displayed in the tree view of the mechatronics navigator
include the following:
Icon
Meaning
EPLAN project
Inventor file (assembly)
Inventor file (item)
General fluid item
General electrical engineering item
Pipe / tube
Inventor item, mechanical
Inventor assembly, mechanical
Cable
Terminal
Note:
Please note that the icons shown here for the Inventor files (assemblies
*.iam, items *.ipt) may differ from the icons displayed in your mechatronics navigator. The icons displayed here depend on which symbols
are linked to the relevant file extensions in your operating system.
148
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Recognizing assignment status

The different status icons are also used to show whether an item is being
used in the 3D model and synchronously in the relevant schematic, is not
in either the model or the schematic, or is redundant.
In this document, items which are used synchronously will be referred to
as "linked", while items which only appear in one of the disciplines and
are missing (as yet) in the corresponding area will be referred to as "not
linked". It is also possible to reject links in order to document that a suggested link is not wanted. This is the case, for example, if there is no
need to import a mechanics item into the automation engineering
schematic.
The following icons are available:
Icon
Meaning
"Not linked mechanics": The mechanical item can / must be
linked to a schematic object, but the link has not yet been
made.
"Not linked schematic": The schematic object can / must be
linked to a mechanical item, but the link cannot be made
because the mechanical item is missing.
"Linked": The mechanical item has been assigned to a
schematic object.
"Link rejected".
New filtering options in the navigator

In the mechatronics navigator you also have the option of restricting the
amount of data displayed by using a filter.
You can use the filters that are available for selection in the Filter dropdown list to set up the navigator so that each editor only sees the components that are relevant to his specialist area.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
149
The following filters are available as standard:

"Processing list":
This filter can be used to provide an overview of all the items that are
relevant to the schematic. Their status may be "Linked", "Not linked",
or "Rejected".
"Electrical engineering", "Fluid power", and "PPE":
With this filter, only the mechanics items that are relevant to the corresponding trade are displayed in the navigator; all other components
are hidden. The components that have been filtered out are displayed
transparently in 3D display and cannot be selected.
"Information":
With this filter, only components which contain information for tracking
are displayed.
"Not linked", "Outdated mechanical models", and "Linked":
These filter options are used to monitor the level of assignment between the mechanical model and the schematic.
Updating the mechanical model

You can use Popup > Check for more up-to-date data to check that all
the models loaded are up to date. If discrepancies are found, the models
are selected accordingly.
To update the data in the mechanical model, select Popup menu >
Update mechanical model. All the changed 3D components are then
reloaded for the selected 3D model.
The components and their assignments to the devices in the schematic
are also updated. The note "Data updated" is automatically entered in
the Information dialog for the relevant main assembly so that all the
editors working on the project can see that the status of the model has
changed.
150
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Assigning data
The data in the mechatronic navigator initially has no references to the
devices in the corresponding EPLAN project. The data for the different
disciplines must be assigned to one another.
Assigning from the device navigator
In this version, if you want to assign mechatronics data in the mechatronics navigator you must first select this data in the device navigator. Then
press [Ctrl] + [Shift] and drag the function required to a suitable component in the mechatronics navigator using drag & drop. If the objects
assigned do not match, EPLAN will display a message to this effect.
Assigning and placing from the mechatronics navigator
In this version, you also have the option of assigning mechatronics items
to a suitable object in the schematic from the mechatronics navigator. To
do this, select the relevant model, press [Ctrl] + [Shift], and drag it to the
component in the schematic using drag & drop. You can also use the
Assign popup menu item. If the objects assigned do not match, EPLAN
will display a message to this effect.
To place an object which is not yet in the schematic from the mechatronics navigator, select Place from the popup menu or drag it into the
schematic using drag & drop.
Transfering data to Inventor

Unlinked schematic objects (icon: ) are objects that you have dragged
into the mechatronics navigator from the schematic but which do not yet
have the appropriate mechanics items / assemblies in the 3D model.
Under certain conditions, you can transfer these unlinked schematic
objects to Inventor.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
151
In order to do this, an Inventor assembly or an Inventor item must be

specified at the part of this schematic object. You can enter a corresponding Inventor construction file in the 3D macro field in parts management, on the Mounting data tab.
To transfer 3D data, select the unlinked model, then select Popup menu
> Place in Inventor.
Tip:
If the conditions listed above have been met, the mechanical model for
this type of part can be dragged directly into the open Inventor using
drag & drop and placed in an assembly there.
Inserting a device tag into Inventor drawings

The mechatronics navigator offers the Popup menu > Insert device
into drawing functionality for inserting device tags into Inventor drawings.
Select this menu item, then in the next dialog, select the Inventor drawing (*.idw) for the imported mechanical model into which the device
tags are to be written. The default for the file to be opened is the file
name of the associated main assembly. When you click [Open], the
selected file is opened and all the components of the main assemblies
which have been given a device tag by means of assignment from the
schematic are found in the drawing.
If device tags are present, a guide line text with the DT entry is generated and placed in the drawing close to the drawing component for each
device tag found. Intersections with other drawing elements are not
taken into account.
If the EMI model does not contain any assigned device tags, the process
is canceled with an appropriate message.
152
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Creating and reading information

A new information dialog gives you the option of saving texts at Inventor
components, e.g. to make additional information available to other
editors (mechanics, electrical engineering, fluid power, etc.).
To open the Information dialog, select Popup menu > Create / read
information in the mechatronics navigator. Enter your new information
in the Create new information field. Close this dialog by clicking [OK];
the new information is then carried over to the Information for tracking
field.
Next time the dialog is opened, the information will be shown in the
Information for tracking field. In the mechatronics navigator, items
with information for tracking are marked with this icon .
When the information has been read and acted on, select the Information completed check box. Completed information is then only visible in
the information history. All the information saved to date is displayed in
the relevant Information history field and cannot be changed.
Calculating the connection length

Using the EMI "Cabling" and "Piping" add-ons you can calculate tube
and pipe lengths in addition to cable lengths; the Calculate cable length
menu item under Project data > Mechatronics has therefore been renamed.
Old name:
New name:
Calculate cable length
Calculate connection length
This functionality is now also available in the popup menu in the mechatronics navigator.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
153
For length calculation, select the relevant cables or tubes in the graphical
editor (multiple selection is possible) then select the Calculate connection length menu item to calculate the new lengths. The connection
lengths are also updated.
Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI

The data in the mechanical model are now accessed independently of
the representation on the project pages. Therefore the former preview
screen of the mechanical model has been replaced by a model view.
Benefit: The model view offers greater flexibility. You can decide
whether a mechanical model is represented on project pages
and the appearance of this view.
You can place this model view on project pages, as before. However, the
model view is not required to represent the mechanical model in the 3D
view or to assign electrical engineering data to mechanical data.
To insert a model view for EMI on a project page, select Insert >
Graphic > Model view (EMI). Then place the corners of the model view
by opening an area. The Model view dialog then opens; select the 3D
object to be represented and specify the properties of this model.
Settings for EPLAN EMI

Addition for length calculation
EPLAN now has a settings dialog where you can specify an additional
length for connection length calculation. You can open the Settings:
General (mechatronics) dialog via Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name " > Mechatronics > General.
154
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Benefit: Accurate length calculation based on the 3D model combined

with the optional additional length means that cables and
tubes can subsequently be installed during production without
complications (e.g. unwanted tension) and there is no need
to build a physical prototype.
Specify the addition length for the calculation of cable / tube lengths for
EMI in the Addition for cable length calculation / Addition for tube
length calculation group boxes.
Enter an absolute extra length which will be added to the calculated
length once per cable / tube in the appropriate Value field. The result will
then be rounded up to the "full" value of the unit in use. Select the unit to
be used for the additional length from the Unit drop-down list.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
155
New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal

At the same time as the release of the new version of the EPLAN platform, a new version of the EPLAN Data Portal with increased functionality has also been released.
Our Internet portal for device data the EPLAN Data Portal provides
you with categorized master data of major manufacturers for direct transfer to the EPLAN platform. In addition to alphanumeric parts data, among
other information this master data also contains schematic macros, multilingual parts information, preview images, documents, etc. The data is
directly integrated into the EPLAN platform when downloaded.
Benefit: The EPLAN Data Portal enormously simplifies parts selection
for the designer. While planning, he or she can directly
access master data that has been classified and checked for
EPLAN compatibility, without time-consuming searching of
manufacture catalogs, which thus reduces the project planning time.
High-quality master data makes it easier to use throughout
EPLAN and increases the quality of the project documentation, from the schematic, through detailed reports, to integration of manufacturer documentation (data sheets, operating
manuals) in high-quality manufacturing specifications. Detailed item data is of crucial significance even in downstream
use of documentation during servicing and maintenance
work.
To productively access the portal, you require the "EPLAN Data Portal"
add-on module and a valid Software Service Contract for your EPLAN
license.
156
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
This add-on can be used with the following variants of the EPLAN
platform:
EPLAN Electric P8 (Version 2.0)
EPLAN Fluid (Version 2.0)
EPLAN PPE (Version 2.0)
EPLAN Education for Classrooms (Version 2.0).
Notes:
You must be connected to the Internet in order to use the EPLAN
Data Portal, and you must make sure that access is not prevented by
a firewall or any other security mechanism! If you have problems, you
should first check your firewall, virus scanner, or proxy settings.
Note that the EPLAN Data Portal has been released for Microsoft
Internet Explorer 7.
After installation via the usual EPLAN installation wizard, the add-on
module and its dialogs (navigator, settings, etc.) are integrated into the
user interface of the EPLAN platform. Once a user account has been
created, open the EPLAN Data Portal navigator by selecting the new
Data portal navigator menu item from the Utilities menu. The menu
item for the navigator has been moved. It can now be found directly
below the Parts menu item.
An overview of the main new features of the EPLAN Data Portal:
New data
The amount and scope of item data in the EPLAN Data Portal is constantly growing. Additional manufacturers have been newly added to
the list of 20 component manufacturers. Manufacturers already established in the portal are constantly expanding the scope of their data in
the EPLAN Data Portal.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
157
Unique part IDs for all parts

All parts in the EPLAN Data Portal now have a "Unique part ID". This
means that two parts with different part numbers can now be placed in
relation to one another (see the section "Unique Part ID for Parts in
the EPLAN Data Portal" on page 158).
Stronger integration into the EPLAN platform
With the new version, the EPLAN Data Portal has been integrated
more strongly into the EPLAN platform. So now, for example, the settings for the portal can be input via the EPLAN settings dialog (see the
section "Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal" on page 159).
Find out about all of the new features at our website
www.eplan.de/portal-news. Information on new functionalities is also
available in the online help function of the EPLAN Data Portal server.
Unique Part ID for Parts in the EPLAN Data Portal

All parts in the EPLAN Data Portal are now identified by means of
"Unique part IDs". Using this ID, it is possible to place two parts with
different part numbers in relation to one another. When importing a part
from the EPLAN Data Portal, the "Unique part ID" is used for identification of the part in question.
Benefit: If the part number for a part has changed, it is still possible
with the help of the Unique part ID property to provide the
desired part with data during part import.
For all other parts in the EPLAN parts database, issuing this kind of
identification is optional, i.e. a part does not have to have this property.
So that the Unique part ID property cannot be changed accidentally, this
can not be created or changed via the parts management interface.
158
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Tip:
By means of the "API Extension" add-on module, the property Unique
part ID can be used to assign a part or read it.
Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal

Integration into the EPLAN platform
For the new version, the EPLAN Data Portal has been integrated more
strongly into the EPLAN platform. So now you can make the settings for
the EPLAN Data Portal via the EPLAN settings dialog.
The menu path to the dialog Settings: Data Portal is as follows:
Options > Settings > User > Management > Data Portal.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
159
The settings options are split across three tabs: Portal, Connection, and
About. The [Reset] button has been removed from the Portal tab. If you
now want to restore altered default settings (e.g. the website address of
the EPLAN Data Portal in the Portal URL field), click in the relevant field
and select the familiar Go to default menu item from the popup menu.
This change also makes it possible to export and import the settings for
the EPLAN Data Portal, e.g. via the
and
buttons. This facilitates
the exchange and synchronization of these settings between several
EPLAN workstations.
160
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Features in Device Numbering

Subcounters in Offline Device Numbering
A new setting for format elements in offline device numbering is now
available. With this setting you can specify that a counter should behave
like a subcounter.
Benefit: Automatically assigning device tags in the desired format
saves a considerable amount of time and ensures that the
identifiers assigned are correct and unique. With the new
settings, EPLAN supports standardization without generating
additional project planning work.
If you select a counter as a format element in the Settings: Numbering
(offline) dialog, in the next dialog opened you can specify that the counter should behave like a subcounter. If you select the new Counter is a
subcounter check box, the counter is incremented again from the start
value as soon as the other numbering changes.
If the check box is not selected, the counter is incremented independently of the other characters.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
161
Example:
For offline numbering of a project, the numbering format specified is
Page + Identifier + Column + Counter, consecutive by
columns. If the Counter is a subcounter check box is not selected,
in offline numbering with a start value of 1 the result is as follows:
If the Counter is a subcounter check box is selected and all other

settings are the same, the result is as follows:
If the value of the "column" format element changes (with -1F2), the
counter starts again with the start value (-1F21).
162
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Numbering Formats for Busbars

A separate DT format is now available for online numbering of busbars.
A new setting option has been added to the DT tab in the Numbering
formats dialog. (To open this dialog, follow the menu path Options >
Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online) and in the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, click [...] next to
the Numbering format field.)
Benefit: Busbars can be numbered separately in online device numbering. EPLAN offers flexibility the settings you make determine how the system will behave, allowing you to implement
your individual project planning standard.
By default, the connection point designations for busbar connection
points are also automatically numbered when they are inserted. The
Designations tab in the dialog referred to above now has a Busbar
connection points check box and an option to edit format elements.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
163
Safety-relevant Functions
In EPLAN, functions can now be identified as relevant to safety.
Benefit: The safety-relevant functions give you the option, for instance, of distinguishing between "safe" and "unsafe" PLC
signals in the project. Another piece of detailed information
which is easily stored in the engineering to guarantee even
higher-quality machine and plant documentation.
For this reason, the properties dialog for components now has a new
Relevant to safety check box in the Function data (logic) group box on
the Symbol / function data tab. Select this check box if you want the
function to be relevant to safety. In the navigators, functions that are
relevant to safety are indicated by the icon .
Note:
Connections can not be identified as relevant to safety. In the properties
dialog for connection definition points, the Relevant to safety check box
is therefore grayed out and cannot be selected.
Safety-relevant PLC connection points
The new version introduces some PLC connection points that are relevant to safety.
For these new symbols with the names PLC_S_CBOX* and numbers
330-339, the Relevant to safety check box is already selected (see the
section "Master Data: Symbols" from page 402 onwards). These symbols
have a yellow border to make them easier to identify.
164
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Safety-relevant function templates

The function templates in the Parts management have also been expanded to take account of this new property during device selection and
overlaying. On the Function templates tab you can also select the property Relevant to safety <21006>. For this reason, the Device selection
(function templates) table now has an extra Relevant to safety column
(except for the "Cables / connections" and "Wires" product groups).
In the settings for device selection, Relevant to safety can be set as a
selection criterion for all parts groups (except for "Cable" and "Wire").
Filter for project data
In order to filter for safety-relevant functions in the navigators, you can
access the new property Relevant to safety <20216> when selecting
criteria for a filter. This new property can also be displayed as an additional column in the list view in the navigators (via Popup menu >
Configure columns).
Safety-relevant functions in reports
Safety-relevant functions can also be taken into account in reports. One
option is to place the property Relevant to safety <20216> as placeholder text in various forms (e.g. parts list, device connection diagram).
Another option is to use this property as a filtering and sorting criterion
for functions when generating reports.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
165
Connections and Connection Numbering

Applying Predefined Values for Connection Colors and
Cross-section / Diameter
In the properties dialogs of connections, connection, potential or net
definition points, you now have the option to apply project-specific, predefined values for the connection colors and for the connection crosssections and connection diameters.
Benefit: The selection of predefined values ensures that only data
specific to the project is used. This standardization means
that errors are avoided and the workflow for planning is
improved.
166
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The Color / number and Cross-section / diameter fields have been

extended by the relevant selection options in the respective tabs.
Color / number:
If you click the [...] button next to this field, the Connection colors dialog
opens. Select the desired color here.
You can create your own project specifications for the connection colors
in the settings under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name"
> Connections > Connection colors.
Cross-section / diameter:
If you click [...] for this field, you go to the Cross-sections / diameters
dialog. In this selection dialog, you can apply a predefined value, including the associated unit. This unit is then displayed in the Cross-section /
diameter unit field.
Define your own default values for a project in a new settings dialog
under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections
> Cross-sections / diameters. If the unit set for a value here is "As in
project", the unit from the project-specific settings dialog Settings: Properties is applied (Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Connections > Properties).
Note:
You can also use the entries you have made in the Settings: Crosssections / diameters dialog as default settings for the conductor crosssections or conductor diameters of cables and shields. In the Cable /
Shield tabs, the Conductor cross-section / diameter field has also
been extended by the selection option described above.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
167
Determining Connection Sources and Targets

You now have two options to choose from when determining connection
sources and targets. The default is for the device tags of the connected
functions to be considered in the determination. But you can also configure EPLAN so that the position of the connected functions in the
schematic is considered when determining the sources and targets
of connections. This reflects the behavior in EPLAN before version
1.9 International SP 1.
Benefit: With appropriate sorting, you save additional processing time.
Now available to you under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project
name" > Connections > General, to affect the behavior when determining connection sources and targets, is the new setting Determine the
source and target of connections from the placement. If this check
box is selected, the connection sources and targets are determined
using the graphical position of the connected functions. The connection
sources and targets are then sorted in the reports, according to their
placement in the schematic.
If the check box is deselected, the device tags of the connected functions
are compared, to determine the connection sources and targets. The
sorting of the structure identifiers in structure identifier management will
be used for these comparisons; the "smaller" device tag will become the
source.
The check box is deselected by default. When transferring data from
EPLAN 5, this results in correct source and target determination and thus
in correct wiring lists.
Note:
Cable connections are not affected by this setting.
168
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Aligning Connection Definition Point Placements with

Each Other
Now you can set connection numbering in such a way, that the connection definition points can be aligned horizontally or vertically to each
other, when placing on connection sections.
Benefit: The placement of the connection definitions is instantly and
easily legible and visually appealing. There is no need for
time-consuming, manual positioning.
If you want to perform this type of placement, in the settings for connection numbering on the Placement tab, you must activate the new Align
placements with each other check box. (A possible menu path to the
settings dialog is: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Connections > Connection numbering.)
Conditions for aligned placement
An aligned placement of the connection definition points can only occur if
the following conditions are met:
The sections run parallel.
The spacing between sections is always the same.
The sections have a common coordinate area (in the X direction for
connections running horizontally, and in the Y direction for connections running vertically).
The sections that meet these criteria make up a group, within which the
connection definition points are aligned to each other. Thus the parallel
sections that have different spacing are not recognized as a group. The
connection definition points on these sections are not aligned to each
other either.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
169
Normally, the connection definition points are aligned at the first graphical connection definition point within the group. If this is not possible, because the connection definition point is outside the common coordinate
area, the next connection definition point of the group is considered. If
none of the connection definition points is within the common coordinate
area, the connection definition points in this coordinate area are moved.
Example:
In the following illustration, the Align placements with each other
check box is initially deselected. The connection definition points are
placed according to the settings in the Number of placements group
box. In this case, the option On every individual section is set.
The Align placements with each other check box is selected. The
connection definition points on parallel sections with the same spacing
are aligned horizontally or vertically to each other (highlighted here by a
green border).
170
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If the Align placements with each other check box is deselected or if

the conditions mentioned earlier are not met, the connection definition
points are placed by means of the other criteria specified in the Placement tab.
Resetting the Counter for Connection Numbering per

Structure / Page
When numbering connections, it is possible to reset the counter to its
start value and then restart, subject to the established conditions, such
as on every page, for every plant, etc. Previously, this was only possible
manually, but now you have the opportunity to enter the counter reset in
a scheme for connection numbering as well.
Benefit: Counter reset can now be entered in a scheme for
connection numbering. Requests for relevant numbering
systems can thus be easily met and automated.
The Designate connections dialog has been redesigned for this
purpose. Instead of the previous check boxes, the Overwrite and Avoid
identical designations settings are now made in drop-down lists.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
171
For the counter reset, in the Avoid identical designations drop-down

list, select the new option Per counter reset range (structure / page).
As a result, the connection designations are only unique within a certain
range; identical designations are also allowed in the project.
Example:
You have selected the "Per counter reset range (structure / page)" setting and the counter reset range is defined so that the counter is reset
when the page changes. The connection designations are then unique
within a page. However, the same connection designations are allowed
on different pages.
172
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Defining the counter reset range

To be able to use this new option, you must define the so-called "counter
reset range" in your scheme for connection numbering. This is the range
within which the counter is incremented, and within which the designations are unique.
In the Connection numbering: Formats dialog, double-click on the
selected "Counter" format element, for example, to open the Format:
Counter dialog. Select the new Reset per structure / page check box
here and then click [Settings].
In the new Settings: Counter reset range dialog that then opens, define
for the counter the range within which the counter is incremented. When
one of the specified criteria changes, the counter is reset to its start
value. To do this, in the Structure / Page area, select the required check
boxes (Higher-level function, Mounting location, Page, etc.). You can
use the From source or From target options to define whether the
criteria established above are applied to the source functions or target
functions of the connections.
Numbering Card Power Supplies and Bus Cables with

General Connection Numbering
The connections at PLC connection points for bus cables and card
power supplies can now be numbered, together with the general connections.
Benefit: PLC bus ports and PLC card power supplies can now be
numbered together with general connections. Combining
these operations means that some steps are no longer
necessary and the result is unique.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
173
The new predefined connection group "Connections connected to PLC

connection points (except card power supply and bus cable)", is available in the Connection numbering: Formats dialog for this purpose.
Note:
The connections are numbered according to the sequence of the connection groups. If you want connection numbering like that cited above,
in your scheme for connection numbering, you should firstly list the
"Connections connected to PLC connection points (except card power
supply and bus cable)" connection group and secondly, the "General
connections" group should be in last position.
174
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform
Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN

Platform
Optimizing Performance by the Use of Modern Processors
Use of multi-core processors
One of the most important trends in computer technology over the past
few years is the use of a number of main processors on a single chip.
In the latest version, such multi-core processors are now also used by
EPLAN in order to enhance performance.
These are optimized accordingly so that our application can benefit from
the additional computing power of these multi-core processors. Thus different database accesses by EPLAN are distributed over the individual
processors. This does not affect their operation in EPLAN.
Use of more updated processors

EPLAN has also been optimized for the use of newer processors. The
command set extension SSE2 (Streaming SIMD Extensions 2) is used
for this, for example. As a consequence of this optimization, EPLAN now
supports only later processors (e.g. Pentium 4, Athlon 64, etc.).
Warning:
EPLAN may no longer be capable of running on computers with older
processors which were made before 2005 (see also the section
"Hardware Requirements" on page 457).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
175
Project Editing
New projects with current creation date and creator
When new projects were created, the data in the template was in part
used for the Creator <10020> and Creation date <10021> properties.
With the new EPLAN version, you now have the option of changing
creator and creation date of a new project. For this purpose, the input
fields Specify creation date and Specify creator, which you already
know from Copy project, are now also available when creating projects.
Benefit: You can enter the relevant creator and current creation date
for new projects, and change this if necessary.
New dialog when creating projects
If you create a project by selecting Project > New, the new Create
project dialog is now opened. The sequence and designation of the
fields match the interface in the project wizard.
176
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Project name:
Enter the project name without file extension in this field.
Storage location:
This field contains the directory where the new project is to be saved.
EPLAN suggests using the directory specified under Options > Settings
> User > Management > Directories in the Projects field as the save
location. Use [...] to open a dialog for choosing a directory. Here, you
can choose another directory as the storage location for the project.
Template:
The template used for the new project is shown here. You can select
project templates or basic projects as the template. Click [...] in order to
open the Select project template / basic project dialog. You can select
a template in this dialog.
Specify creation date:
If this check box is selected, then you can specify a different creation
date for the new project in the field below. In this case, the current date is
entered here initially. If necessary, you can change this date.
If the check box is deselected, the creation date of the selected template
will be used.
Specify creator:
If this check box is selected, your logon name or user code will automatically be entered in the field below, depending on the settings under User
> Display > User code / address. If you do not want to use your logon
name or user code, you can also input a different name.
If the check box is deselected, the creator who created the template will
be shown. If there is nothing entered in the field, no creator was specified
for the template.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
177
Change in the project wizard

The Project wizard, which you can open by selecting Project > New
(Wizard) has been extended accordingly. The new setting options for
creation date and creator can be found here under the first tab, Project.
New projects are now named "New project" by default, irrespective of
how they have been created. If there is already a project with this name,
the project name then has a number added ("New project (2)", .... etc.).
Automatic data format checking

If EPLAN is abruptly ended during editing (e.g. due to a power outage
or via the Windows Task Manager), incomplete data may remain on the
hard disk. Such projects for which the project database has been left
"improperly" are now automatically recognized when opened.
Benefit: Project data is now even more robust against external influences because errors do not propagate.
In a case like this, you will be warned that the project has not been
closed correctly, then you can decide whether you want to carry out a
consistency check. Confirm the Consistency check prompt by selecting
[Yes], and a consistency check will be carried out for the project.
If no errors are found during the check, the project will then be opened.
A damaged project, on the other hand, will not be opened. In such a
case, the problems will be listed in the system report file and then displayed in the System messages dialog.
If you click [No], the project will not be opened. In this case, you have to
select a different project for editing.
178
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN Data Import

Symbol library sequence in the settings
During EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN data import of projects, if some symbols
from an original symbol file (e.g. DIC_WUPD.SYM) cannot be replaced with
symbols from the symbol library IEC_symbol EPLAN inserts this original
symbol file in the list of symbol libraries in the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog.
Up to now, the relevant original symbol file had been listed after the
SPECIAL library and before the IEC_symbol library in the second line of
the dialog. This later led to problems in EPLAN when certain actions
were executed (e.g. when inserting devices) as symbols from the first
library listed (e.g. DIC_WUPD.SYM) were used.
In the case of EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN data import, if a case of this kind
appears, the sequence of the symbol libraries will be swapped in the
settings. The default symbol library IEC_symbol is listed before the
original symbol file in the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog.
Note:
This altered sequence may possibly lead to problems with the exchange
of pages / macros with other projects which have been imported with
EPLAN version 1.9 (or older) and which used the other EPLAN 5 /
fluidPLAN original symbol files (e.g. DIC_ESSD.SYM). Here, it is possible
that individual symbols (e.g. change-over contacts) cannot be displayed.
In this instance, we recommend that you manually revise any symbols
not displayed. For this, select a suitable symbol from the IEC_symbol
library from the properties dialog under the Symbol / function data tab
by clicking the [...] button, which is located next to the Number / name
field.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
179
EPLAN 21 Data Import

Including net-based connections
Within the scope of the extensions of the new "Net Based Wiring" add-on
module, you now also have the option of transferring net-based connections on data import from EPLAN 21.
For this purpose, the general default settings for EPLAN 21 data import
in the General tab have been extended to include the new Include netbased connections drop-down list. (One possible menu path for the
dialog Settings: EPLAN 21 data import is: Options > Settings > User
> Interfaces > EPLAN 21 data import.)
Here, select whether and how net-based connections are to be
included:
No: Net-based connections are not included.
Yes: Net-based connections are included. I.e. during data import, a
net definition point is automatically placed on the net, the T-nodes are
adapted, and the connections are written in the form of "daisy chains"
to the net definition point.
From project settings: The setting indicating whether or not netbased connections are to be included are taken from the project. If the
EPLAN 21 property Net-based connections is enabled for a project,
the net-based connections will be included.
Inherit black box structures to interruption points

In EPLAN 21, it is possible for interruption points placed in black boxes
or PLC boxes to take over the structure identifiers of the superior boxes.
This behavior is also available to you in the EPLAN platform.
180
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
For this, the dialog Extended project structures has been extended to
include the new check box Inherit black box structures to interruption
points. (This dialog can be accessed via the project properties, for
example, by clicking on the [Other] button in the Structure tab.) This
check box is now selected by default when importing data from
EPLAN 21. With this, the structure identifiers such as higher-level
function, mounting location, etc. are inherited from black boxes and PLC
boxes to the interruption points.
Note:
Please note that when creating new projects, this check box must be
enabled so as to achieve the same behavior as in EPLAN 21.
Data Backup
Distribution of directory information during data backup
When backing up project data and master data, information on the original directory is now also backed up internally. When restoring the data,
this directory information is then output and suggested as a default for
the target directory.
If you have already backed up the data once, the directory saved when
you did this will automatically be suggested as your target directory. If
this data is new to you, on the other hand (e.g. a project passed on by
e-mail), the directory settings from the last data backup will be suggested
as the target directory.
Benefit: Data exchange and distribution of projects and master data
are more user-friendly. Optionally, the data can be imported
into the original directory structure or into a different one. This
provides you with the requisite flexibility in data exchange
with clients or subcontractors and allows projects to be
managed in a uniform, well-defined directory structure.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
181
Note:
With data backup, to allow the directory structure to be passed on successfully to other project editors or to clients, we recommend that you
save your projects in the default directory set for projects. You can create
corresponding subdirectories here to allow you to manage client-specific
projects more effectively. For projects outside the set project directory,
only the default directory can be suggested as the target directory when
restoring the data.
Backing up projects
Concerning the extension already mentioned, you now have the option
of editing the name of the backup file even when backing up projects.
For this purpose, the Back up projects dialog has been extended to
include the Backup file name drop-down list.
Backup file name:
This name is used for both backup media ("Storage medium" and
"E-mail"). A maximum of 260 characters is permitted for the file name
including file path.
The following options are available:
If the project is located either directly in the project directory or in a
directory outside the project directory, the project name will be suggested automatically.
If the project is located in a subdirectory to the project directory, the
project name will be suggested as the first entry in the drop-down list.
After that, a suggestion follows in the list which is made up of the
entire subdirectory path and the project name. All components of this
name are separated by means of periods (e.g. "Customer1.Commission.EPLAN project").
182
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Tip:
This second suggestion supports you when restoring projects. You can
immediately identify the subdirectories used by the extended project
name. The components of the name which appear in the subdirectory
path are not included as a project name when the project is restored.
If several projects are backed up, it is not possible to edit this field,
and the project names in each instance will be used as the backup file
names.
In the case of the first two options, you can click [...] to go to the Select
backup file dialog and navigate to the desired directory there or create
a new one. If you have selected a directory via this dialog, the relevant
directory will also be transferred for the Backup directory field.
Restoring projects
The Subdirectory field and the Restore in subdirectory check box
have been added to the Restore project dialog.
Subdirectory:
This field is used only for display. Here, the subdirectory is displayed
under the default directories in which the project was located at the time
of the backup. If no subdirectory was available, nothing is displayed.
When restoring, if a number of backed up projects is selected with
different subdirectories, the entry "<<...>>" is displayed here.
Restore in subdirectory:
Select this check box if the project is to be restored to the original subdirectory. If no subdirectory is stored in the data backup, this check box
will be grayed out.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
183
Notes:
The Restore in subdirectory check box is disabled by default every
time the dialog is opened, so you have to decide specifically whether
you want to restore the data in a subdirectory.
If you have not set the target directory to the default directory, a
prompt will be displayed when you select this check box. This can
be used to reset the target directory back to the default directory.
The correct name is suggested for the subsequent Project name field,
independently of the file path components in the name of the backup file.
If the backup file is nevertheless renamed, EPLAN in this instance suggests the name of the backup file as the project name.
Backing up master data
The input field Backup file name has been extended in the relevant
dialogs (e.g. Back up form) to add the [...] button. This allows you to set
a different file name and a different target directory.
As mostly several master data files are backed up when master data is
backed up, no name is taken from the selected master data for the backup file name; instead, the last name suggested is input.
Restoring master data
The dialogs for restoring master data (e.g. Restore form) have also
been extended with the Subdirectory field and the Restore in subdirectory check box. The Subdirectory field is, again, for display.
184
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
When master data is restored to subdirectories, it is possible to differentiate between the following two cases:
If data backup took place in a subdirectory of the master data directory set, that subdirectory is displayed here. This means that an entry
such as "$(MD_FORMS)\Customer1" in the Directory field was input
when, e.g., backing up forms. In such cases, the Restore in subdirectory check box is available and you can select it. That is, you
can state whether or not the master data is to be restored in the
original subdirectory.
If, on the other hand, data backup takes place in the master data
directory (e.g. "$(MD_FORMS)") and if files are also backed up in
subdirectories, no directory is displayed here in the Subdirectory
field. The Restore in subdirectory check box is deactivated, and it
is also not possible to change this setting. Master data from subdirectories also backed up is restored to a subdirectory of the target
directory set, with no selection opportunity.
For the Restore in subdirectory check box, the same instructions apply
otherwise as those to be noted when restoring projects.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
185
Extended PDF and DXF / DWG Export of Pages

In this version, the export functionalities for outputting pages in PDF and
DXF / DWG format have been greatly extended.
Benefit: By combining the settings for PDF export as a scheme,
you can quickly and reliably adapt this export option to
customer requirements.
You now use the page filter to select the relevant pages
for output as a PDF. The file is smaller, easier to handle,
and tailored exactly to the intended use.
Sending PDF and DXF / DWG files directly by e-mail
speeds up data exchange considerably.
The PDF export in grayscale corresponds to the output
from a black and white printer. This means that the customer receives a printout and a PDF file that look the
same.
A PDF export means that the 3D models from EPLAN Pro
Panel and EPLAN EMI can also be viewed and forwarded
outside EPLAN.
Instead of a PDF file, the pages can now be split into subdirectories containing several files. This simplifies connection to higher-level management systems and enables
further partial output from large projects.
186
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The innovations now available include the following:

The settings for PDF export can also be saved as a scheme (see
page 187). During actual output you can access the predefined
settings by selecting a scheme (see page 192).
A filter created in the page navigator can be taken into account in the
PDF and / or DXF / DWG export (see page 188 onwards).
Like the data backup, in the PDF and / or DXF / DWG export you can
now either output the files to a storage medium or send them as an
e-mail (see page 188 onwards).
In both export functionalities you now have the option of automatically
generating subdirectories (see page 188 onwards).
In the PDF export, linked documents which are not stored in the project can also be copied into the target directory during the output (see
page 192).
3D models from add-ons can also be included in the output during the
PDF export (see page 194).
Saving PDF settings as a scheme

For the sake of consistency, the Settings: PDF export dialog has been
moved to the other user-specific settings for interfaces. You will now find
it under Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > PDF export.
All user-specific settings for PDF export are now combined in a scheme.
For this reason, the settings dialog has the new Scheme drop-down list
plus the familiar toolbar for creating and editing schemes.
If you want to output the pages of a project in PDF format using Page >
Export > PDF, the PDF export dialog now shows you the current
scheme. Use the [...] button next to the Scheme field to move to the
settings dialog for PDF export where you can change the settings.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
187
New user-specific settings for export

There are some new setting options for PDF and DXF / DWG export.
The Export tab for DXF / DWG output has just been extended for this
purpose, but the tab of the same name for PDF export is new (see
illustration).
Page filter:
You can use this drop-down list to include a filter from the page navigator
by default when exporting PDF and / or DXF / DWG files.
Select a page filter that you have generated in the page navigator from
this drop-down list and select the Active check box next to the list. In this
case, the page filter applies to the selection made in the page navigator.
If the check box is not selected, a selected page filter is not included and
the PDF and / or DXF / DWG output is determined by the selection made
in the page navigator only.
188
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Export medium:
For PDF and / or DXF / DWG export you can now decide whether to
store the files in a directory or send them by e-mail. The following options
are available in this group box:
Storage medium: If this option is selected, the files generated are
output to a storage medium. Enter the storage location in the Output
directory field. You can specify any drive and subdirectory as the
target for the export.
E-mail: If this option is selected, the files generated are sent as an
e-mail. Once the function has been called up, the files (including any
directories generated) are zipped using the internal zip program and
your installed e-mail editor is started. Select the maximum size of an
individual mail file from the Split size drop-down list.
The setting options in this group box and the behavior of the program
correspond to the established conditions for data backup.
Note:
In order to exchange e-mails, an e-mail editor must be installed and
correctly set up on your computer.
In the export process itself, you have the option of changing the export
medium previously defined in the settings and selecting a different
option. For this reason, the PDF export and DXF / DWG export dialogs
also have the Export medium group box.
Generate file names:
You can now automatically assign a name to the file to be generated during the PDF export, just as you could previously for DXF / DWG export.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
189
For the PDF export, the following options are available in this drop-down
list:
None: If this option is selected, the PDF file field in the PDF export
dialog is enabled and you can change the file name manually.
From page names: If you select this option, EPLAN assigns
names to the PDF files in a standard way using the pattern
<Page name>.PDF.
From properties: If you select this option, the file name is formed
from the page and project properties plus freely definable separators.
Use the [...] button to open the Format: Property dialog to configure
the file name.
Generate subdirectories:
In this drop-down list you specify the default method for generating subdirectories during the PDF and /or DXF / DWG export:
None: If this option is selected, no subdirectories are generated
during the export.
From page tree: If this option is selected, subdirectories which reflect
the project structure are automatically generated during the export. All
the pages associated with a structure are exported into the relevant
subdirectory.
Example:
You are carrying out a PDF export for the sample project EPLAN-Demo
and you have selected the From page tree option in the Generate subdirectories field. In this case, e.g. for the higher-level function with the
structure identifier =EB3, a corresponding subdirectory =EB3 is generated
during export into the output directory. Like the project structure with
various mounting locations, this subdirectory includes the other subdirectories +EBS, +ET1, +ET2, +ET3, +ET4, and +ETA. Each of these
subdirectories contains a PDF file.
190
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
From properties: If this option is selected, subdirectories are

automatically generated during the export if a predefined property
changes. The subdirectory names created from project and / or page
properties and freely definable separators can be combined.
To configure the properties, use the [...] button to move to the Format: Property dialog. Here you can, for instance, use the "Directory
separator" format element to generate a directory structure with
several subdirectories arranged one below the other.
Example:
In the settings for the DXF / DWG export, you have set the From properties option for the Generate subdirectories field. In the Format:
Property dialog you have selected the following format elements:
Format element
Symbol
Project properties (Project: Type)
P10031
Separator
Page properties (Higher-level function)
P1120
Directory separator
Page properties (Mounting location)
P1220
If you then export the sample project EPLAN-Demo in DXF format, several
subdirectories are generated in the output directory specified. Below the
directory with the project name EPLAN-Demo are the subdirectories
AT78_CA1, AT78_EB3, AT78_FB3, and AT78_REPORT (AT78 is the value
for the project property Project: Type entered in the sample project).
Further subdirectories with the structure identifiers for mounting locations
are located below these hierarchical levels (e.g. AT78_CA1\EAA,
AT78_EB3\EBS, AT78_EB3\ET1, etc.). These subdirectories contain
the exported DXF files.
Note:
PDF file output is split up if you generate subdirectories during the PDF
export. All the pages output to a subdirectory are combined into a PDF
file. You can not jump between the different PDF files.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
191
Output:
Only available in the settings for PDF export! You can use this group box
to specify the default settings for the output.
In addition to the previous functionalities Color and Black and white,
you now have the option of Grayscale. Select this option if you want the
PDF to be output in grayscale. The grayscale is calculated from the
colors for the white color scheme.
"Device pages" tab
The Device pages tab has been redesigned as part of the improvements
to PDF export. The option of saving additional filter criteria for the device
pages as a scheme has been removed because you can now define an
overall scheme for all user-specific PDF settings.
You now specify the filter criteria for the device pages in the Device filter
table. To select a filter criterion, click
(New) above the table.
PDF export with linked documents

You can now set the PDF export in EPLAN in such a way that external
documents / linked documents which are not stored in the project are
also copied into the target directory during output.
To do this, select the new Copy externally linked documents to
output directory check box in the user-specific settings for the PDF
export. A possible menu path here is: Options > Settings > User >
Interfaces > PDF export. Select the General tab in the dialog that is
displayed.
Exporting pages in PDF format

To output single pages or an entire project in PDF format, select the
menu items Page > Export > PDF. EPLAN opens the redesigned PDF
export dialog.
192
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Here you have the option of individually changing the default settings
that you have saved in a scheme. To do this, select the settings required
in the new Export medium and Output group boxes and in the previously existing Use print margins check box.
You also have the option of using the new Scheme drop-down list to
select a different predefined scheme for the PDF export. Or click [...] to
open the Settings: PDF export dialog to create or edit a scheme.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
193
Other settings available for the export

In the PDF export dialog you can also access all the other settings relating to PDF export. For this upgrade, the [Settings] button has been
changed into a menu with the following menu items:
Output languages: Opens the project-specific Settings: PDF output
languages dialog.
Print margins: Opens the dialog with the relevant print settings for
the PDF export.
Outputting 3D models in the PDF export

The PDF export dialog also contains the new Output model check box.
Using this upgrade, you now have the option of including 3D models
from EPLAN Pro Panel and EPLAN EMI in the output. If you use this
option, extra document pages containing the exported models are added
at the end of the PDF file.
So that you can make default settings for this PDF export, the Settings:
PDF export dialog has been expanded by adding the 3D tab. On this tab
you can specify separately whether the 3D models for EPLAN Pro Panel
and / or EPLAN EMI should be included in the PDF export.
194
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Finding and Replacing

Jumping forwards and backwards in the jump sequence of cross-referenced functions
All representation types, placements, and report entries for a cross-referenced device are integrated into a jump sequence. Previously, you
could only enter these cross-referenced functions in the Go to list using
Find > Go to > Cross-referenced function. In the new version, you
also have the option of jumping forwards or backwards in this jump sequence for a cross-referenced device.
Benefit: This new functionality allows for fast navigation in the jump
sequence for a cross-referenced device.
Therefore the Cross-referenced function menu item now has new submenu items as follows:
List
Corresponds to the old Cross-referenced function menu item.
Enters all cross-referenced functions for a selected function into the
Go to list and opens the list.
Forward
Jumps forwards to the Go to list and displays the relevant function in
the graphical editor.
Backward
Jumps backwards to the Go to list and displays the relevant function
in the graphical editor.
You can see the jump sequence from the sequence in the Go to list.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
195
Tip:
To jump between the various cross-referenced functions of a device in
the graphical editor, use the shortcut keys [Alt] + [Page down] and [Alt]
+ [Page up]. First select the function required in the graphical editor (or
in a project data navigator). Use [Alt] + [Page down] to jump forwards
through the cross-referenced functions in the jump sequence in the
graphical editor. If there are currently no entries for the selected function
in the Go to list, new entries are added to the list and the list opens. Use
[Page up] to move backwards through the jump sequence in the graphical editor in the same way.
Go to part assemblies
Another innovation is that the Find menu now includes the Part assemblies menu item under Go to.
Benefit: Using this new functionality, you can jump specifically to the
part assemblies for an object to find further information about
the relevant part.
First select the object required in the schematic. Then select Find > Go
to > Part assemblies. EPLAN enters all the output locations where the
parts of the object occur in parts lists and summarized parts lists into the
Go to list and opens it. In this list, the part number for each part listed is
displayed in the Name column. Use the Popup menu > Go to (graphic)
menu item to jump from the list to the relevant locations in the part assemblies.
Tip:
This menu item also functions on report pages where the part number for
an object has been output (e.g. device tag lists).
196
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Including objects in the layout space in the search

The find operation in EPLAN now offers the option of including objects in
a layout space. Layout spaces and associated objects such as mounting
surfaces, mounting rails, etc. can be added to a project using the new
"EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on (see the relevant section on page 342).
The Search location group box in the Find dialog has been expanded
by adding the new Layout space check box for this purpose. Select this
check box to search for the term in layout spaces.
If the check box is deselected, layout spaces will be ignored in the
search.
Example:
You want to find a specific mechanical item in a layout space. In the Find
what field of the Find dialog, enter the search term U and in the Search
in group box select the DT / designation check box. In the Search
location group box you also specify whether the search should include
the entire project as well as the layout spaces. The Search results
dialog then lists all the part placements (mounting surfaces, mounting
rails, etc.) which have a U as the displayed DT.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
197
Influencing the Value and Unit Display

For many properties in EPLAN you now have the option of specifying the
way in which entered values are displayed. The values entered (e.g. in a
properties dialog) do not change but they are displayed according to the
unit and other settings specified. This relates to the display in the graphical editor and in output report pages and labeling.
Benefit: The extended functionality for values and units means that in
reports, you can quickly and easily create totals in a specified
unit (e.g. m). The data in the schematic is displayed in different units (e.g. cm, km) which are more suitable for detailed
representation.
New display properties

For extended display of values and units, the display settings on the
Display and Format tabs (for texts) have been extended by adding the
new Value / unit area.
The new, clearer listing of display and format properties has already
been discussed. More information on this is provided on page 22.
198
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The following settings are available under Value / unit:

Displayed measuring unit:
The default setting for this property is "Unchanged". With this setting, the
property is displayed exactly as it has been entered in the particular field.
The other settings under Value / unit are then grayed out.
To select a different displayed measuring unit, click in the Assignment
column, and then on [...]. An alphabetical list of physical dimensions
(such as "Pressure", "Length", "Frame", etc.), is opened in a hierarchical
tree structure. Click the character to open the required hierarchy level
of a specific dimension (such as "Power"). Double-click in the hierarchy
level underneath to select one of the listed units (e.g. "mW"). The other
display properties under Value / unit will then be validated. All the units
listed for a dimension are designated a "unit of measurement group"
here.
The base units are highlighted in the list by appearing in bold type. The
dimensions and units displayed here are managed internally by EPLAN,
and you are not able to adapt or extend them. With certain dimensions
("Length", "Frame"), you can also apply the displayed measuring unit
from the project or user settings.
Display:
Use this drop-down list to specify how the value of the entered string and
unit are to be displayed:
All: Value and unit are displayed.
Hide unit: The selected unit is not displayed.
Hide value: All the values of the selected unit are hidden. In contrast,
the additional texts and units are displayed.
Only first value: Only the first value of the selected unit is displayed.
Only unit: Only the selected unit is displayed. Values and additional
texts are hidden.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
199
Decimal places:
Select the number of decimal places to be output from this drop-down
list.
You can also apply the decimal place setting from the Displayed unit of
length user setting. A relevant entry for this is available in the list.
Decimal places, variable:
Activate this check box if the number of decimal places is not to be filled
with zeroes. However rounding is always carried out to the number
specified under Decimal places.
Example:
You have entered the following information for a device in the Technical
characteristics field:
Power A: 750 W, Power B: 500 W
In the Display tab, under Value / unit, the Displayed measuring unit
kW and the Decimal places value 3 have been specified for this
property. Once you have clicked [Apply], the entry in the Technical
characteristics field remains unchanged, and this text is displayed in
the graphical editor:
Power A: 0.750 kW, Power B: 0.500 kW
If you select the Decimal places, variable check box, the display
changes to:
Power A: 0.75 kW, Power B: 0.5 kW
There is a new project setting to output spaces before the units. More
information on this is provided in the section "New project setting for
output of the unit" on page 203.
200
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Notes:
If you have entered values with units from two different unit of measurement groups in one data entry field, you can only influence the
display of one unit with the settings under Value / unit.
If no unit has been specified in a string, the base unit of the chosen
displayed measuring unit is taken as the basis for converting the
numeric values.
If the displayed measuring unit is selected from a unit of measurement
group different from the unit specified in the data entry field, then it will
be assumed for all the values that the entry is made in the base unit of
the selected displayed measuring unit.
Using the new display properties

The extended display properties are used at the following locations in
EPLAN:
In input fields for properties (Display tab)
And anywhere where you can enter strings or multilingual strings.
In path function texts (Format tab)
In special texts (Format tab)
In placeholder texts in forms (Format tab)
The display settings stored in the forms are used to format the data
that is output in reports. The value and unit settings that have been
specified can be viewed in the relevant placeholder text on the report
pages but cannot be changed.
In labeling (Property - <Property type> dialog)
The properties dialog, which opens when selecting format elements
for the header, label area, and footer, has been redesigned for this
purpose. The formatting settings on the right-hand side are now also
selected in a table with a tree-like structure.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
201
The extensions for value and unit can not be used at the following
locations:
In graphical texts
In placeholder texts on report pages
In length fields for dimensioning and for graphical positioning (e.g. in
properties dialogs for graphical elements).
Use of separators
In the fields and properties listed above, if you now enter numeric values
with a full stop and a comma, the first separator is evaluated as a thousands separator and the first character of the opposite type (comma / full
stop) as a decimal separator.
If there are several separators of the same type in a number (full stop or
comma), this separator is evaluated as a thousands separator. If only
one separator (full stop or comma) occurs in a number, this is interpreted
as a decimal separator.
New properties for full-length values
In some of the properties used so far (e.g. for cable and connection
lengths or for weight specifications) the values may be full-length internally, but they are rounded up or down for display. In order to retain
accuracy in any potential conversions to other units, the properties listed
below are now available:
Cable length (complete) <20257>
Subset / length (full) <20510>: Subset or length of a part including
unit. This property may be used in bills of materials, for example.
Working pressure (full) <22230>
Control range (full) <22231>
Flow (full) <22232>
Weight (full) <22233>
202
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Free properties: Value and unit (full) <22234>: Value of a free

property including unit.
Length (full) <31090>: Length of a connection including unit.
Subset / length (full) <31091>: Subset or length of a part entered at
the function, including unit. Using the index, you can differentiate between 50 entries.
New project setting for output of the unit

The Settings: Date / time / numbers dialog now has a new setting for
outputting the unit (menu path: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Display > Date / time / numbers). The For numbers
output unit with blanks check box is available here.
Select this check box if you want numbers that are output with a unit,
such as kg, to have a blank before the unit.
If this check box is deselected, no blank is inserted between the number
and the unit.
Enhancements to the EPLAN API

So that the EPLAN API user can also use the enhanced display properties for values and units, all the new format properties are available in the
EPLAN API. The new UnitParser class also enables you to convert
values defined in one unit into the values of another unit (from the same
unit group).
You will find further details about this in the online help for EPLAN API.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
203
Graphical Editor
Rapid opening of page properties
In the graphical editor, double-clicking on the plot frame of an open page
opens the Page properties dialog which displays the properties of this
page.
Extending the search for path function text

The EPLAN platform now provides the option of extending the search for
the path function text to the complete schematic path.
Benefit: You can position path function texts more freely, making
them easier to read. Errors due to inaccurately positioned
path function texts are prevented. Several adjacent components in a path can now automatically use the same text. This
provides a quick and easy way of creating clear schematics
and makes working with path-specific function texts even
more flexible.
The project setting Extend path function text on the schematic path
(under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical
editing > General) must be selected. This setting allows you to decide
whether to carry out an extended search for the path function text or
whether the search should be carried out as before.
If this check box is selected, the search for the path function text is carried out within the limits of the path defined by the plot frame. In this
case, a path function text is carried over into the Function text (automatic) property of a component if it is located anywhere within the same
path. However, the insertion point of the path function text does not need
to be located immediately above / below the insertion point of the component in question.
204
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If the check box is not selected, path function texts are only carried over
into the Function text (automatic) property if the component insertion
point and the path function text insertion point lie immediately above or
below one another. This is the default setting and is the same as the
previous method of searching for path function text.
Setting the displayed language of multilingual texts blockwise using

actions
In EPLAN you now have the option of changing several multilingual texts
on a page to a specific displayed language by means of two actions.
Benefit: You can change the displayed language of all placed texts on
a page with two mouse clicks. The ability to switch display
languages quickly makes it much easier to handle international projects.
Therefore the command line parameter /language:? was added to the
two actions shown below:
"Set component format"
With this action (action name: XGedIaFormatSymbol) you can specify
the language of property texts (function texts, remarks, etc.).
"Set text format"
With this action (action name: XGedIaFormatText) you can specify
the language of free, graphical texts.
After linking the buttons on a toolbar with these two actions and specifying the language required (e.g. French /language:fr_FR) in the
command line, you can set the texts in a selected area to this language
with a mouse click.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
205
Example:
You want to change the function text and other placed property texts for
specific components on a schematic page to French. The entry in the
command line of the Set button dialog looks like this:
XGedStartInteractionAction /Name:XGedIaFormatSymbol
/language:fr_FR
Note:
Before the texts can be displayed in the language selected, they must be
available in multiple languages in the project and must have been translated into the relevant language.
Multilingual texts for designation of hyperlinks

In the new version of EPLAN, the text / designations of hyperlinks can be
displayed in the language of the user interface.
Benefit: Even in multilingual documentation, you can now create
hyperlinks as self-explanatory text. This makes it easier for all
project participants to understand the information embedded
in the drawings, even in international projects.
The relevant popup menu items, e.g. Translate, Multilingual input, etc.,
have been added to the Text / designation field in the hyperlink properties dialog. Multilingual entries are also possible for description texts in
external documents which are stored for a part on the Technical data
tab of the Parts management dialog and can be placed as hyperlinks in
the graphical editor.
Note:
Before the text / designation of a hyperlink can be displayed in the
current dialog language of the interface, it must be available in the
project in the appropriate language.
206
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Property texts for boxes when changing scale

If the scale on schematic pages is changed, the appearance of property
texts for boxes (location, black, PLC, and macro boxes) can now be
adjusted (scaled) in exactly the same way as for other components.
Benefit: When the scale changes, the proportions of the schematic
remain the same. There is no longer any need to change the
font size, etc. This means that the scale can be changed with
a minimum of manual work. Even retrospective changes do
not cause delays to project editing.
On "Panel layout" type pages, changing the scale does not affect the
property texts for the boxes: The corresponding texts remain optically
unchanged.
Plug DT and channel designation retained when moved

The plug DT of PLC or device connection points and the channel designation of PLC connection points can be adopted in the same way as DT
adoption, e.g. from the left (or from above). If you hold down the [Shift]
key when moving PLC or device connection points e.g. from a PLC box
or black box the properties listed below will be retained in addition to
the full DT of the connection point moved:
Plug DT (automatic)
and Channel designation (automatic) (only for PLC connection
points).
Benefit: This allows you to change the graphical representation of
plugs and PLC connection points without changing the logical
functionality of the device. Use these EPLAN functionalities in
a targeted way in different phases of a project to define how
the system should behave when devices are moved in different situations.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
207
For the functions in question, the Plug DT (automatic) and Channel

designation (automatic) properties remain unchanged. For the components moved and other components affected, the displayed DT and the
values in the Plug DT and Channel designation fields can change as a
result of these actions.
Expansion of special characters

In the Special characters dialog you can select frequently used special
characters and insert them at the current cursor position. In the new
version, this list has been expanded to include the following frequently
used special characters:
Square root ()
Fraction - One half ()
Fraction - One quarter ()
Fraction - Three quarters ()
To the power of three (3)
Cross-section, diameter ().
Benefit: These frequently used special characters can now be
inserted into the text more quickly.
To access these special characters when entering text or in specific
text fields, click in the relevant field and select Popup menu > Special
characters. Less frequently used special characters can be accessed
via the Windows character map.
208
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Devices
Extension to user-defined property arrangement
Changing user-defined property arrangements
If you change a user-defined property arrangement on the Display tab
of the properties dialog and wish to save it under an existing name, a
prompt is now displayed which enables you to transfer the changed
display settings to all components with this property arrangement.
Benefit: In this way, you can very quickly change the display of texts
on all components of the same type. It is also a quick and
easy way of changing and revising project documentation if
necessary. You define the basic standards, and therefore
create a clear, consistent layout for schematics.
If you confirm the Change property arrangement prompt by selecting
[Yes], the changed display settings are applied to all the components
that use this property arrangement.
If you select [No], the changed display settings are only applied to the
current component. For all other components that use this same property
arrangement, the display settings remain unchanged and their property
arrangement is changed to "User-defined".
Note:
Note that a stored, user-defined property arrangement is only available
for symbol variants of the same type.
Property arrangement for connection definition points
There are two default values for the property arrangements for connection definition points. The default arrangement for connection definition
points placed when inserting cable definition lines / shields is
"Conductor".
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
209
The default property arrangement for connection definition points which

are inserted individually is "Default setting (Connection)". If you wish to
save a user-defined property arrangement for a connection definition
point, a separate Save property arrangement dialog opens which takes
account of these two default values.
Benefit: A user-defined property arrangement can be used projectwide as the default for all "types" of connection definition
points. You define standard identifier blocks which give your
schematics a clear, consistent layout.
Instead of the Use as default check box, the dialog therefore contains
two setting options as follows:
Use as default for connections:
Select this check box if this saved arrangement is to be used as the
default for "normal" connection definition points for all additional usages
of these symbol variants. This property arrangement is also used for
connection definition points that arise during connection numbering.
Use as default for conductors:
Select this check box if this saved arrangement is to be used as the
default for conductor connection definition points which are automatically
placed while drawing cables / shields in all additional usages of these
symbol variants.
Changing the graphic of black boxes and similar components via the
properties dialog
As already introduced in Version 1.9 International SP 1 for mounting
panels and part placements, you can now edit the graphical properties
of other dynamic components (location boxes, black boxes, etc.) via the
properties dialog in the same way.
Benefit: This means that you can place black boxes, location boxes,
etc. with great precision.
210
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The additional tabs listed below are now available in the relevant properties dialogs:
Rectangle tab: for location, black, PLC and macro boxes, containers,
PCT loops, and PCT loop functions
Polygon tab: for black boxes which are drawn as polygons (symbols
DC2, DCF2, PLCC3, SC2 from symbol library SPECIAL)
Extension tab: for shields
Line tab: for cable definition lines.
Properties dialog for bundle connection points

The "normal" properties dialog is now used for bundle connection point
symbols. For example, if you place one of these connection symbols on
a page in the graphical editor using Insert > Bundle connection point >
"Connection type", instead of the previous Edit bundle connection
point data, the Properties (components): Bundle connection point
dialog now opens.
Benefit: The information about bundle connection points can be displayed individually. You can precisely define the property
display that you need for a bundle connection point. The
summarized representation of connection points combined
with the detailed definition of the property display make the
schematic even clearer and even more informative for all
downstream engineering phases.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
211
On the Bundle connection point tab you can enter the Bundle connection point designation and the Bundle connection point description, as before. This dialog now also has a Display tab where you can
specify the display settings for the relevant bundle connection point.
Instead of using the default property Bundle connection point data
<19072> (whose value is taken automatically from the description or the
designation if the description is not available), you can also select the
properties Bundle connection point designation <19070> and / or
Bundle connection point description <19071> for the property
arrangement.
Jump functions for location boxes

Location boxes can be made cross-reference-capable by using the Main
placement <20305> property. Cross-references are formed when all
location boxes have the same DT and only one of them is the main
placement.
To make it easier to navigate between the various placements, you can
also use the following functionalities in the popup menu for location
boxes:
Go to (cross-referenced)
Go to (all representation types)
Go to (counterpiece)
Insert into list of search results.
You can use the Go to (counterpiece) menu item to jump to the main
placement; Go to (all representation types) and Go to (cross-referenced) enter all location boxes with the same full DT into the Go to list
and open it.
212
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Benefit: This navigation option saves you time when searching the
project for location boxes. You can also navigate easily in
large projects with a mouse click, and you don't waste project
planning time searching for important information. Finding,
not searching is the motto.
Plug DT for device connection points

To enable you to provide black boxes with information about potential
plugs, the two properties Plug DT <20406> and Plug DT (automatic)
<20431> are now available for device connection points, in the same
way as for PLC connection points.
Benefit: The option of specifying plugs on black boxes further improves the representation of complex items without timeconsuming symbol creation.
After insertion of a device connection point, the Plug DT property is
displayed immediately in the Properties table. You enter the plug DT for
the device connection point in the relevant field in the Value column. As
is normal for DT adoption, the DT can be adopted from the left (or from
above), for instance.
Note:
The plug DT is just an information for the device connection points to
assist in identification of an individual device connection point. If a device
connection point is the target of a report, the plug DT is also included in
the report output.
If you also wish to display the Plug DT (automatic) property in the
property table, you need to select it via property selection. This property
shows you the automatically determined values for a DT adoption. For
output in the reports (e.g. in a device connection diagram), insert the
Plug DT (automatic) property as placeholder text in the relevant form.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
213
To display a plug DT at the device connection point in the graphical

editor, you may also need to change the property arrangement on the
Display tab and select the Plug DT property for display.
A new layer EPLAN433, Property placement.Plug DT is now used
as the default for the plug DT for device and PLC connection points.
Considering part placements in global editing

The Properties (global) editing mode allows you to edit the common
properties of the different representation types for a function simultaneously in a single action. Part placements are now included in global
editing in the properties dialog (and elsewhere).
If you wish to globally edit the properties of a part placement and select,
for instance, the Popup menu > Properties (global) menu item in a
navigator, the "normal" properties dialog for global editing opens if there
is a main function and / or main terminal for part placement. A change to
the part number or another common property (e.g. the function text) is
written back to the part placement and all other representation types for
the function.
The Part placement tab is only displayed in the properties dialog during
global editing if there is no main function and / or associated terminal for
part placement.
Edit sequence for global editing
In conventional part placements there are two representation types:
"Panel layout" and "Detailed panel layout". However, part placement for
the 3D mounting layout in the new "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on uses the
"3D mounting layout" representation type.
214
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The sequence for global editing is therefore as follows:

Multi-line
Overview
Pair cross-reference
Single-line
P&I diagram
Wire harness
Panel layout
Detailed panel layout
3D mounting layout.
If the common property of a function has different data in the different
representation types, this sequence is used to decide which data is
applied during global editing. EPLAN therefore first takes the properties
of the multi-line representation type.
Adopting properties of the P&I diagram functions during synchronizing

A function can be displayed more than once in the schematic as a distributed single-line, multi-line, overview, or P&I diagram function or as a
pair cross-reference. If the Properties (global) editing mode has not
been selected, you can edit the properties of the distributed functions
independently of one another. Differences between the function properties will arise as a result. You can synchronize the functions in order to
harmonize the properties of the functions that are displayed in a distributed manner.
When doing this, you now also have the option of applying the properties
of the "P&I diagram" representation type to the other representation
types. Highlight the project, page, or function that you wish to synchronize and then select the new menu item Utilities > Synchronize > P&I
diagram --> all representation types. Click [OK] to confirm the prompt
and carry out the synchronization.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
215
Assigning structure identifiers for part definition points

Part definition points behave in the same way as location boxes and on
insertion, they adopt the structure of the higher-level unit (pages, location
boxes, black boxes). A device tag may be input, but this is not necessary.
Benefit: Parts which are inserted into the project via part definition
points can be directly assigned to a structure identifier.
The Part definition point tab in the properties dialog has been expanded for this purpose with the new Displayed DT and Full DT fields
and the new Structure identifier group box. To enable you to also
change the display setting of placed properties (DT (displayed), Part
number, etc.), the new Display tab is now available for part definition
points.
You can use the property Part of a part definition <20508> in the bill of
materials navigator, for example, to filter by the parts which are specified
at part definitions. This new property is also available as a filter criterion
in the navigators for parts / devices (e.g. in the 2D panel layout navigator) and in the part-specific reports (parts list, summarized parts list).
216
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Allowing identical connection point designations for devices

Previously, EPLAN did not allow identical connection point designations
for several functions of a device. This could lead to a large number of
messages with the number 007004 (message text "Duplicate connection
point designation: <x>") being displayed in message management.
If a device includes several functions, it is now also possible for these
functions to have the same connection point designations. This can be
useful, for example, if you want to assign the same connection point
designation (e.g. PE) to several device connection points in a black box.
Benefit: Allowing identical connection point designations in EPLAN
means that devices with connection points which have been
given the same name by the manufacturer can now be
managed in full.
If you want to allow this for a device, in the properties dialogs for the
functions switch to the Symbol / function data tab and click on the
[Logic] button. In the Connection point logic dialog select the new
Allow same connection point designations check box for the connection point in question. Then identical connection point designations
are permitted for a connection point within a device.
If you specify this setting for all functions of the device with the same
connection point designation, check run 007004 no longer outputs messages for these functions.
If the check box is deselected, the corresponding connection point designations within a device must be unique.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
217
Allowing the same designations for terminals

As part of this upgrade, the property Multiple entries allowed <20811>
has been renamed.
Old name:
New name:
Multiple entries allowed
Allow same designations
You can use this property to specify that EPLAN should not display
messages if multiple terminals have the same terminal designation.
Edit in Table
Shortcut key to close edit in table
The [Ctrl] + [Q] shortcut can now be used to open and close editing in
tables. Press [Ctrl] + [Q] once to open the Edit function data dialog.
Press this shortcut again to close the dialog.
Note:
You can only use [Ctrl] + [Q] to close edit in table if your cursor is in the
Edit function data dialog. If you are making a selection in a navigator or
in the graphical editor, for instance, you must press [Ctrl] + [Q] twice to
close the dialog.
218
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Project Data Navigators

New jump functions in the connection navigator
The popup menu in the connection navigator has two new menu items,
Go to (graphic source) and Go to (graphic target).
Benefit: The new menu items enable you to determine the point in the
schematic to which the jump is made. You save time because
you immediately obtain the information you need.
As before, you use the familiar Go to (graphic) menu item to jump to the
connection definition point of a connection that has already been placed.
If this point does not exist, you jump to a target for the connection in the
graphical editor. Use Go to (graphic source) to jump to the source of a
placed connection in the graphical editor. Select Go to (graphic target)
to display the target for the placed connection in the graphical editor.
Placing macros
The former Place part macro functionality in the project data navigators
has been expanded and renamed to reflect the new version of EPLAN.
Old name:
New name:
Place part macro
Place macro
Benefit: You can now place a graphic even though no macro has
been stored for the part. This means that the work flow is not
interrupted and the parts data can be added at a later date.
EPLAN allows an iterative engineering process and supports
efficient project editing at every planning stage.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
219
If a part macro is available in the representation type selected in the submenu, it is placed (e.g. Popup menu > Place macro > Multi-line). If a
suitable representation type is not found, then the part macro with a
different representation type is suggested. If you want to place a different
macro, you can now use [Backspace] to open the Select macro dialog
and select a different macro. If a part macro does not exist, macro selection is opened directly and you can select a macro.
Placing macros with more sensible preselection
Furthermore, when you place a part macro from a navigator, the macro
variant which best fits the selection made in the navigator is now initially
displayed at the cursor. The criteria for a match are as follows:
Function definition
Number of functions.
You can still use [Tab] to "page" through the available macro variants
during placement. And you can use [Shift] + [Tab] to page through the
available representation types for a variant.
Note:
The program cannot make a sensible preselection unless the representation type selected (e.g. Place macro > Multi-line) is available in the
macro variants. Otherwise a different representation type is suggested
for the part macro.
Example:
This program behavior can be useful, for example, in channel-oriented
procedures (see the appropriate section on page 119) where the
grouped PLC connection points for a channel are stored in one macro
variant and the entire PLC card in another variant of the same macro.
If an appropriate part with a macro for a PLC box is selected and you
select a channel of this PLC box in the PLC navigator, the variant with
the channel is preset when the macro is placed.
220
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Placing all functions of a device

If you select a device in a navigator, all functions of the device are now
included when you use the menu items Place, Place macro, and
Assign.
If you select a device in a navigator and drag it to a schematic page using drag & drop, all the functions of this device are offered for placement
one after the other. You can use [Tab] to "page" through the available
symbol variants for each function.
Adjusting the column width

In all navigators for project data (device, terminal strip navigator, etc.) the
popup menu in the list view now has the Adjust column width menu
item. You can use this menu item to adjust the width of all the columns in
the list so that the heading and content of the columns are completely
visible.
Device group DT on associated devices

For devices which belong to a device group, the project data navigators
display the full DT of the device group main function in addition to the
connection point designation. This DT is now separated from the next
connection point designation by brackets.
Example:
For the NO contact Y1 belonging to a device group, with connection
point designation 1314, the device navigator no longer displays
=A1+O1-H1:1314... but instead displays the connection point
designation (=A1+O1-H1)1314....
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
221
Defined Devices
Taking account of macro variants
If both a macro and function templates are specified for a part, functions
which appear in other variants of this macro are also taken into account
when generating a new device in the navigators (via Popup menu >
New device) or when inserting a device in the graphical editor (via
Insert > Device).
Benefit: Because the device concept takes other macro variants into
account, it is quick and easy to plan devices that are distributed throughout the diagram. This provides a simple, reliable way of planning even complex devices. Appropriate
processing of device data makes project planning itself easy
and reliable, with quality included!
Macro variants are used in turn while these free function templates can
be superimposed. If the functions in the current macro variant do not
match the free function templates, the action is canceled. No further
functions are generated from the remaining macro variants.
Representation types for unplaced functions

When you delete the placement of a function in the schematic, the representation type for the unplaced function is now retained.
Benefit: Functional preplanning of a plant without drawing pages is
now possible in every representation type. You can insert the
devices directly as single-line drawings at a later date, e.g.
using drag & drop. This means you achieve the required
diagram characteristics sooner.
You choose the planning process and gain greater freedom
to implement your individual planning approach.
222
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
A placement can be deleted for functions with the following representation types:
Multi-line
Overview
Pair cross-reference
Single-line
P&I diagram.
These representation types are now also available for all unplaced functions and can be specified on the Symbol / function data tab in the
properties dialog.
For functions with the following representation types the placement can
not be deleted:
External
Graphic
Panel layout, detailed panel layout, 3D mounting layout (these are
representation types for part placements).
To delete the graphical representation of a function from the schematic,
highlight the relevant component and select the Edit > Delete placement menu items. The function is retained as an unplaced function with
the original representation type and can, for instance, be placed again
from the device navigator.
Tip:
In the graphical editor, the Delete placement menu item is now also
available in the popup menu for a selected component.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
223
Part Selection
Part selection with scheme selection
It is now possible to use different data sources in EPLAN wherever a part
can be selected.
Benefit: Different data sources can be used for part selection throughout EPLAN. You can populate the device list or the bill of
materials navigator with data from a number of data sources,
e.g. when Adding parts.
The settings for part selection now include the new Part selection with
scheme selection check box for this purpose. To open the relevant
Settings: Part selection dialog, you can use the Options > Settings >
User > Management > Part selection menu path.
224
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If you select this check box, the new Part selection: Select data source
dialog opens at each part selection. In this selection dialog you can
select a different data source (a scheme) from the Data source dropdown list and / or click [...] to view / edit the settings.
In the Always use this data source check box, which also appears in
this dialog, you can specify that a selected data source should always be
used. If this is the case, the selection dialog is not launched at the next
part selection and the Part selection with scheme selection check box
in the settings is deactivated. Click [OK] to apply the selected scheme
and start part selection.
Do not show conflict dialog

In the Settings: Part selection dialog referred to above, you now have
the option of hiding the conflict dialog during part selection. The new
Show conflict dialog check box was therefore added to the dialog. The
default is for this check box to be activated.
Benefit: You can decide whether the conflict dialog should be displayed during part selection. This means that you can prevent
the conflict dialog from opening during API part selection, for
instance.
If the check box is not selected, the Conflict dialog is not displayed
during part selection. Part selection behaves as if the conflict dialog has
been confirmed by clicking [OK].
If a part or technical properties have already been assigned to a device,
these are automatically overwritten with the data of the new part. Data
which has been assigned to the device but is not included with the new
part is retained, i.e. values are replaced or added but existing errors or
properties are not cleared.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
225
Modifications to part management during part selection

You can now set up EPLAN so that existing parts from parts management can be changed and new parts created during part selection. In the
Settings: Part selection dialog, select the new Modification allowed
during selection check box.
Benefit: Parts from parts management can be directly completed
during part selection while editing the schematic. This
reduces the workload considerably.
If this check box is selected and you open part selection via the Parts
tab in a properties dialog, the fields on the right-hand side of the Part
selection dialog are enabled so that you can edit them.
Because of this innovation, part selection was changed to reflect the
Parts management dialog. The menu items available in the tree, the list
and under [Extras] are now the same as in parts management. (The
only things that are not available are generating and switching the database.) The Part selection dialog also has an [Apply] button so that you
can change several parts without having to close part selection in
between.
226
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Symbol Editor
Reorganizing symbol libraries
The symbol editor now offers the option of reorganizing symbol libraries.
Benefit: When a symbol library is reorganized, deleted data (symbols,
symbol variants) is irretrievably removed from the library. This
makes the symbol library smaller and reduces the volume of
data to be saved.
To do this, select the Utilities > Master data > Symbol library > Reorganize menu path. The Reorganize symbol library dialog opens; select
the library to be reorganized and click [Open]. The symbol library is then
compressed and reorganized.
Displaying variants when paging in the symbol editor

When you page through the symbols of an open symbol library in the
symbol editor, only the variant of the symbol that you have previously
specified in the Symbol selection dialog is displayed. If the specified
variant of a symbol is not available, the symbol editor will show an empty
page with the text "Variant does not exist".
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
227
Form Editor
Combining overview reports
EPLAN now allows you to combine overview reports (table of contents,
parts list, etc.) for a specific property. For instance, you can combine the
data for each page type in the table of contents.
Benefit: Reports generated in this way provide a better overview and
make it easier to find your way around the project documentation. Clear documentation also means high quality and
smooth application of machine and plant documentation in
the downstream engineering phases.
In order to achieve this, the new property Combine in a line by <13111>
is now available in the form properties for the relevant forms. First select
this property in Property selection, then click [...] in the Value column.
228
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The new Properties to be combined dialog opens, where you can

define the properties for which identical data should be combined in one
(New) button to open the familiar Property selection
line. Click the
dialog where you select the properties to be combined and transfer them
to the list. More than one property may be selected.
Separator for output values
The default separator for the values output in a line is the semicolon or,
for combined values, the string "...". However, you can also specify other
separators for a form via the form properties Separator for multiple
values <13059> and Separator for combined values <13082>.
Example:
After redesigning a relevant form, the table of contents created for a
sequentially numbered project is as follows:
Page type
Page
Title page / cover sheet
Table of contents
Schematic single-line
3...5
Schematic multi-line
6...15;20...29
Overview
16...19;30...33
...
...
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
229
Combining parts in enclosure legends

When outputting enclosure legends, identical part numbers can now be
combined in one line. For this reason, the new property Combine in a
line by <13111> is also available in the form properties for enclosure
legends. To combine by part number, in Property selection select the
property Part number <20100>.
It is also possible to output the number of part placements that have
been combined in a line. The property Total amount (number of units)
<20499> is now also available as placeholder text for "Enclosure legend
(*.f18)" type forms.
Conditional areas in dynamic forms

You can now use "conditional areas" as additional dynamic areas in
dynamic forms. These areas are inserted into the reports when certain
specified conditions are met. This enables you to format your reports
because graphical elements such as lines, text, etc. can be assigned to
a conditional area.
Benefit: Conditional areas offer numerous formatting options for your
report pages, so your reports will be more individual and
tailored to your requirements.
To insert a conditional area for a dynamic form, select Insert > Dynamic
area > Conditional area in the form editor. Draw the conditional area as
a rectangle. Double-click in the rectangle and select the Conditions tab
in the properties dialog.
On this tab you can define the conditions under which specific areas are
output in your reports. The conditions you specify are as follows:
If property is changed
Click [...] in this field to move to the Conditions dialog where you can
select the property that triggers output of the area when it is changed.
230
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
When switching objects

Select this check box to specify that the conditional area should be
evaluated whenever an object is switched (see example below).
At first start of column / At every start of column / At every end of
column / At last end of column
Select this check box to specify that the graphical elements defined in
the conditional area should only be inserted at the first start of the
column or at every start of the column / at every end of the column or
only at the last end of the column. In combined reports, the first start
of column and the last end of column always refer to the object to be
reported, e.g. a terminal strip.
After every n-th line
In this field enter the value of the line after which the graphical elements defined in the conditional area should be displayed.
Example:
You have a terminal diagram in which the targets are listed for each terminal. As some terminals have more than one target, a separating line
should be drawn in front of each terminal (i.e. in front of each object) in
order to make the terminal diagram clear. To do this, add a conditional
area to the relevant terminal diagram form and select the When switching objects check box as a condition.
Then insert a line, format this graphic as required, and assign this object
to the conditional area. The master data is synchronized and the reports
are updated; you have now achieved the desired result.
If you have specified a value in the After every n-th line field, the Adjust height check box is also enabled. If this check box is selected, the
conditional area is placed on the previous data line and scaled according
to the height of this line. In this way, you can insert a background for a
data line.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
231
Example:
You have a parts list in a project and wish to use a background color on
alternate data lines. Insert a conditional area in the relevant dynamic
form. In the After every n-th line field, specify the value 2 as a condition
for the field and select the Adjust height check box. In this area, draw a
rectangle with the same width as the data area. Then select a color (e.g.
gray) on the Format tab for the rectangle and activate the Fill surface
check box. Then assign the rectangle to the conditional area. After synchronization of the master data, alternate lines on the parts list are
displayed with a gray background.
Up to ten conditional areas with different conditions can be specified in
one form.
Several conditions may also be specified simultaneously in a conditional
area. If these conditions are met in the reports (e.g. a change to a property and an object switch), only one graphical element (e.g. a separating
line) is output. On the other hand, if the conditions are distributed over
several conditional areas, the associated graphical elements for all areas
are output if the conditions are met. This latter option is sensible, for
instance, if different texts are to be placed via the conditional areas.
Suppressing blank data lines

Blank data lines may occur in the reports if the output properties are
blank. To prevent the output of blank data lines, the form properties now
include the new property Suppress blank lines <13081>. Blank data
lines are not output if this property is selected.
Benefit: Reports are shorter and clearer. This means that site work
(commissioning, servicing, and maintenance) using the
printed plans is quicker. You lay the foundation for smooth
project implementation while still in the engineering phase.
232
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Notes:
Data lines which contain only symbols or jumper graphics are not
regarded as blank and selecting the Suppress blank lines property
does not suppress them.
This property is not available in the form properties for connection diagrams (device connection diagram, cable connection diagram, etc.).
Renamed placeholder texts for the device tag list

Previously, the "device data" elements occurred twice in the Placeholder
texts - Device tag list dialog. In order to distinguish between them, the
indexed element with properties to the n-th function of the device has
been renamed "Function". The non-indexing element with properties for
the device tag has been renamed "Device tag".
Outputting function data for the device tag list and symbol overview
When generating reports, you now get the standard behavior that is
normal for other reports if you have set the two properties Horizontal
symbol distance <13042> and Number of adjacent symbols <13043>
to "0" in the form properties of "Device tag list" and "Symbol overview"
type forms, and inserted placeholder texts for the "Function" element into
the relevant forms (e.g. properties of the n-th function of the device such
as Placement, Function text, etc.). The relevant values are output as a
single-line list separated by semicolons for each device tag.
Example:
Placements of the device with the DT =EB3+ET2-K1 are no longer output
by rows but as a list, as follows:
=EB3+ET2/3.2;=EB3+ET2/1.3;=EB3+ET2/1.4;=EB3+ET2/1.4
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
233
Regenerating headers without sorting

The property Regenerate header after change <13003> is also available in the form properties. Like the form property Generate data
headers for the first x sorting properties <13060>, you can use this
property in dynamic forms to generate new headers on report pages.
Benefit: You can generate new headers in reports without sorting.
Property "<13060>" specifies that sort properties (e.g. "Higher-level
function" or "Mounting location") should be used to generate new
headers. If an appropriate sorting scheme is selected when generating
the report, a new header is generated when the sorting criterion, e.g. a
new identifier for the higher-level function, changes.
Use the form property Regenerate header after change <13003> to
specify the property / properties that will trigger generation of a new
header on the report page when a change is made. The new headers
are also generated when you output the project or parts data in the
relevant report without sorting.
In the previous version (EPLAN 1.9), selecting property "<13060>" in
an "old" form meant that the previously selected property Regenerate
header after change <13003> was deleted from the form properties.
This no longer happens.
Outputting only connected connection points in connection diagrams

You can now configure device, cable, terminal, and pin connection
diagrams in such a way that only the connected connection points are
represented at the targets in the graphic in these connection diagrams.
Benefit: Using the new form property saves space in connection
diagrams. The documentation is clearer and all project
participants can quickly and easily find the information they
need to edit their task.
234
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
In the form properties for each form you can use the new property
Connection diagram: Output only connected connection points
<13085>. First select this property in Property selection, then select
the relevant check box in the Value column.
This property only relates to targets and does not affect the devices,
cables, terminal strips, or plugs to be evaluated. Devices, cables, plugs,
and terminal strips are still listed in the connection diagrams without the
connected functions.
Example:
Property <13085> was selected for the form in a terminal connection
diagram. In the case of a motor which is the target of a terminal strip, the
connection diagram outputs only the function connection points that are
connected to the terminal strip.
Essential customization of user-defined connection diagram forms

Project editor:
new version.
A correction to the connection diagrams may mean that you now obtain
modified reports when you use your own forms. A number of properties
in the connection diagrams are then displayed with an alignment box.
The standard forms in the EPLAN master data have already been corrected where necessary. Alignment boxes are no longer displayed when
these forms are used.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
235
You must correct any forms that you have created on the basis of our
forms. To do this, open the relevant form in the form editor and edit the
placeholder text for the placed properties where unwanted alignment
boxes are displayed. In the Properties - Placeholder text dialog, switch
to the Format tab and select the "No" option for the Draw alignment
box property. Then perform a master data synchronization and update
the reports.
New placeholders for cable charts in terminal and plug diagrams

One or more cable charts can be integrated into forms for terminal and
plug diagrams. You can use the Cable charts... placeholder elements to
display cable and conductor properties in the cable charts on the relevant forms.
In order to better differentiate these placeholders from the header and
data areas of the dynamic areas, the placeholder elements Cable chart
(header)... and Cable chart (data area)... have been renamed as follows:
Old name:
New name:
Cable chart (header)...
Cable chart header...
Cable chart (data area)...
Cable chart data area...
Placeholder elements for outputting the counter target are now also
available. The counter target is the device that is connected to the
terminal strip / plug via the cable. This affects the following new placeholder elements:
Cable chart header: Counter target
Displays all connected counter targets of a cable for the header of the
cable chart.
236
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Cable chart header external: Counter target

Displays all externally connected counter targets of a cable. To be
used when the header is rotated with regard to the data area.
This is assigned to the Cable chart data area external placeholder
element with the same index value via the index. The different terminal targets are output using this index.
Cable chart header internal: Counter target
Displays all internally connected counter targets of a cable. To be
used when the header is rotated with regard to the data area.
This is assigned to the Cable chart data area internal placeholder
element with the same index value via the index. The different terminal targets are output using their index.
In most cases, all conductors of a cable are connected to the same
counter target. If several counter targets are connected to a cable, they
are listed in the cable chart, separated by semicolons.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
237
Macros
Description text for automatically generated page macros
When an automatically generated page macro is inserted, the Select
macro dialog now shows the description that you entered via the Macro:
Description <11057> page property for the macro, in the comments field
below the preview. If different descriptions are stored in a page macro,
only the description of the first page of the page macro is displayed.
Group macro boxes and associated objects

In fluid power, it is often necessary to group all the objects of a macro.
Grouping can take place, for example, when editing macro projects. To
reduce the amount of work required in a major macro project, the new
Group macro boxes and associated objects menu item is now available for macro projects.
Benefit: This considerably speeds up the grouping of the macro boxes
and thus the automatic generation of macros from macro
projects.
First select the pages on which the macro boxes are to be grouped. To
do this, select the project or the desired page(s) in the page navigator.
Select the menu items Utilities > Generate macros > Group macro
boxes and associated objects. Then, the macro box itself, the objects
in the box, and the objects assigned to the box are grouped for each
selected macro box. The macro box contents are checked when
grouping. If the contents conform to the criteria of a device group, a
device group is created for the macro box with its associated objects.
238
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Specifically assigning objects to macro boxes

When assigning individual objects to a macro box, you are now supported by a prompt. This makes the procedure similar to the process
already defined for assigning objects to a placeholder object.
Benefit: The new prompt avoids operating error when assigning
objects to macro boxes.
If, when marking, you have not selected all the associated macro box
objects for the macro box assignment and have then chosen the menu
item Assign objects to macro box in the popup menu for the macro
box, a new prompt will now be displayed. You can then use this prompt
to decide whether the objects you have not selected should be deleted
from the macro box assignment.
If you confirm the prompt with [Yes], the previous assignment will be lost
and only the currently selected objects are assigned to the macro box. If
you click [No] here, the previous assignment remains, and the additionally selected objects are added to this assignment.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
239
Placeholder Objects
Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects
The familiar properties dialog is now also used for placeholder objects.
The placeholder object symbol graphic the familiar "anchor" symbol
in the SPECIAL symbol library, has been given a new symbol called PLHO
for the purpose (see also page 427 in section "Master Data: Symbols").
Benefit: Because a standardized dialog is used, operation is now
easier. To find placeholders in macro collections and template projects more quickly, you can display properties in the
diagram itself and print them for archiving purposes. This
saves time during data maintenance.
The following changes have been made to the placeholder object dialog:
Placeholder object tab:
This tab now contains two tabs, Assignment and Values. The other
new features on these tabs are described in the two sections below.
Display tab:
Now you can use this tab to change the format properties for the special properties of the placeholder object (Placeholder object name,
Placeholder object: Last value set selected, Value set name), for
example, and set a user-defined property arrangement. The values of
the first two properties mentioned are placed in the new EPLAN551,
Property placement.Placeholder objects layer, as standard.
Symbol / function data tab:
This new tab for placeholder objects allows you to change the symbol
for the placeholder object (if you have created your own symbol for
this).
When you open projects with the "old" placeholder object symbols, you
are prompted to confirm that you want to update the master data. Once
you have confirmed the prompt with [Yes], the master data is updated
and the "old" placeholder object symbols are replaced by the new ones.
240
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New properties for placeholder objects

To automate the creation of schematics, it is necessary for all the object
properties in the EPLAN platform to be controllable by variables. This is
why the following properties are now also available to you on the placeholder objects' Assignment tab:
Function definition (Category / Group / ID) <20188>
Shows the function definition in "Category/Group/ID" format for the
associated objects of the placeholder object.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
241
Width <20221>
Indicates the width of the black boxes, location and PLC boxes.
Height <20222>
Indicates the height of the black boxes, location and PLC boxes.
Benefit: You no longer have to create your own macros for objects
that did not previously allow variables. The amount of effort
required for macro maintenance is reduced many times over.
The new properties can be made accessible externally by
using the relevant variables, and edited in the EPLAN Engineering Center (EEC), for example. This greatly simplifies
modeling in the EEC.
Function definition
To be able to toggle between the different function definitions for an object in a macro, for example, you must have created a relevant variable.
In the Values tab, you can then use Popup menu > Select function
definition to select a function definition and apply it as a value for this
variable. The category, group and ID of the function definition are
separated by a forward slash "/".
Box width and height
The new Width <20221> and Height <20222> properties for extending
boxes can also have variables assigned to them. These properties are
only available to placeholder objects and they allow the box width and
height to be specified. "Polyline" type boxes are not considered.
242
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Simplified assignment
After the data transfer from EPLAN 5, the variables entered in the properties there as values, are displayed in the Current value column of the
placeholder object.
To make it easier for you to transfer these predefined variables to the
Variable column, we have extended the Assignment tab by the new
Only display properties with value in Current value column check
box. If this check box is activated, then the table only shows the properties with an entry in the Current value column.
As part of this extension, the previous check box, Only display properties with value in Assignment column, has been renamed Only
display properties with value in Variable column. If this check box is
selected then the table only shows the properties having a value in the
Variable column.
If both check boxes are selected, this will be treated as an OR relationship. In this case, the rows where either the Current value or Variable
columns are "empty", will also be displayed.
Extended standard operation
To copy entries from the Current value column, you can now also use
the Copy menu item in the popup menu. If the entire column is to be
copied, click the column header. This will mark the entire column, and it
can then be copied and pasted with [Ctrl] + [C] / [Ctrl] + [V], for example. But this only copies the visible cells. The cells in collapsed hierarchy
levels are not copied.
Now also available to you in the Assignment tab popup menu are the
two menu items Expand and Collapse.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
243
Reports
Connection diagrams for wiring diagrams
In EPLAN it is now possible to generate "wiring diagrams" for devices.
Wiring diagrams consist of several connection diagrams and are used to
output information about connected conductors and targets. Devices can
be placed in a wiring diagram in the order in which they appear on the
mounting panel.
Benefit: Wiring diagrams are a frequently requested form of representation in Russia and China. Suitable reports can now support
you when planning these drawings. It is much simpler and
faster to create them and the result can be checked automatically.
Wiring diagrams are output in the form of embedded connection diagrams, which can be placed manually in an open project page. Device
connection diagrams are generated for wiring diagrams for general
devices, and terminal and pin connection diagrams are generated for
wiring diagrams for terminal strips and plugs.
244
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
The illustration below shows a section of a wiring diagram that has been
generated.
Normally, forms in table format are used for wiring diagrams. In the form
properties of the relevant forms select the following new properties in
Property selection:
Connection diagram: Display all targets <13084>
Connection diagram: Internal targets in table form <13086>
Connection diagram: External targets in table form <13087>.
Select these properties. All the targets are then output and the properties
of these internal and external targets are displayed in table form in the
reports. A separate row is generated for each target.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
245
Tip:
When generating the wiring diagrams, the forms for device, terminal and
pin connection diagrams specified in the project settings are used by
default. However, it is possible to specify a separate form for a device.
To do this, before generating the report, select the new property Form
for wiring diagram <20234> at the main function of the device in question and specify which form should be used.
Generating wiring diagrams
Before you can output a wiring diagram for the part placements on a
specific mounting panel, you must first insert an additional black box.
The reports generated will be placed in this black box at a later date.
Assign the device tag of the mounting panel to the black box and select
the "Overview" representation type for it.
Note:
The black box may be placed either immediately adjacent to the mounting panel on a "Panel layout" type page or on an overview page, but
never on a report page.
Then use Utilities > Reports > Generate to open the Reports - <Project name> dialog. In the dialog, click [New]. The Select report dialog
opens. Choose the "Manual placement" output format from the Output
format drop-down list. Then in the Select report type field select one of
the following reports:
"Device-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)"
"Terminal-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)" or
"Pin-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)".
Select the Manual selection check box, then close the dialog by clicking
[OK].
246
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The new Select mounting panel dialog then opens. Select the mounting
panel for which the wiring diagram is to be generated. Select the Hide
devices already reported check box if devices for which this report has
already been generated should no longer be offered.
Then in the Manual selection dialog select the devices for which you
want to generate a report. Multiple selection is possible.
Click [OK]; the report is then generated and hangs on the cursor. Place
the report on the appropriate positions in the black box. If you selected
several devices in the Manual selection dialog, you can place further
reports.
New messages for wiring diagrams
Check run 015002 has been added to the "Reports" message class in
order to check wiring diagrams.
You can use this check run to identify where part placements on the
mounting panel and the associated wiring diagrams do not match (e.g.
if a part placement has been removed or inserted retrospectively).
Note:
For this check run, and to hide devices that have already been evaluated
when generating a new report, it is essential to place the insertion points
for the generated reports inside the black box.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
247
Appending reports to the end

When generating reports from report templates, you now have the opportunity to configure EPLAN so that the output report pages are always
sorted after the last existing page.
Benefit: When generating template reports, the existing gaps for
spare pages in the page structure are retained.
To make an appropriate setting, first use Utilities > Reports > Generate
to open the Reports dialog. In the Templates tab, select an existing
template and then, next to the Start page of report block property in the
Value column, click [...]. In the subsequent dialog, in which you select
the start page for the report template, the new Append to the end check
box is now available to you.
If the check box is selected, the Page name field is cleared and grayed
out. In the report generation that follows, the report pages are sorted into
the specified structure identifiers. If there are already some report pages
in the structure identifier level, all the new report pages will be sorted
together behind the last existing page. Any gaps for spare pages that
may exist at structure identifier level are not filled and remain empty.
248
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Sorting cable overviews according to source and target

You now also have the opportunity in EPLAN to output reports of cable
overviews, cable diagrams, and connection lists, that are sorted according to source and target. The Page sorting dialog has been extended by
the Use source / target check box for this purpose.
(You open this dialog from the Settings: Output to pages dialog
(typical menu path: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name"
> Reports > Output to pages), when, for a line of a report type, (such
as a cable overview), you first click in the Page sorting column and then
on [...].)
The Use source / target check box can only be selected for cable diagrams, cable overviews, and connection lists. If the check box is selected, it is not the device tags of the cables that are used for page sorting, but those of the sources and targets. Cables with different structure
identifiers for their source and target (such as mounting locations, for
example), will be output in multiple structure identifiers.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
249
Using page structure identifiers for reports

Also new in the Page sorting dialog is the Use placement check box. If
this check box is selected, when reporting devices into different project
structures, it is not the structure identifiers of the devices that are considered, but the structure identifiers of the page on which they are placed.
Note:
The Identifiers for list output settings, which you could make in
EPLAN 5 at a device in the Part tab, are not applied during the EPLAN 5
/ fluidPLAN data import. For the devices to be sorted into the correct
reports, you have to select the Use placement check box described
above in the project settings.
Creating report templates

In the Templates tab of the Reports - <Project name> dialog, it is possible to create multiple report templates for the same report type. If a
report template (called 0001, for example) already exists, when another
template of this type is created, a prompt is now displayed, querying
whether or not the old template should be overwritten. If you select [No]
here, two templates will be generated with the same name, which you
should then change.
Benefit: It is no longer possible to overwrite an existing template
accidentally.
Copying and pasting function-related embedded reports

When copying and pasting devices and the associated function-related
embedded reports, the relationship is retained between the devices and
a function-related embedded report that has also been copied. The same
applies to creating relevant macros with function-related, embedded
reports. Pasting directly updates the embedded report. The device to
which it applies is then immediately obvious.
250
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Benefit: This allows you to use function-related embedded reports in

macros, for example.
Example:
If, in the schematic, you copy and then paste a device such as a cable
with -W5, and the associated function-related, embedded report (such as
a cable diagram), the new cable diagram you have pasted applies to the
device pasted with it (displayed DT after numbering, e.g. -W6).
Breaking up modules
Parts which belong to a module can now be broken up into the relevant
sub-parts when outputting the parts list and the summarized parts list in
the reports and in the labeling.
For this purpose, a new Break up modules check box has been added
to the corresponding settings dialogs Settings: Parts and Settings:
Labeling. If this check box is selected, the modules are broken down
into their components, i.e. their individual parts.
It is now also possible to break up modules in the PDF export settings.
The Break up modules check box has also been added to the Part
properties tab in the Settings: PDF export dialog. If this check box is
selected, the existing modules are broken up. For the exported PDF file
this means that all the individual parts of the module are listed with the
specified part properties for a device in the device tree.
Tip:
If you want to break up the parts of an assembly which have been
assigned to a module, you must select the two Break up assemblies
and Break up modules check boxes in the settings. If the assembly is
not nested into any other (sub-)assemblies, enter the value 2 in the Up
to level field. The assembly in the module is then broken up as well.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
251
Outputting part assemblies in labeling

If you use Utilities > Reports > Labeling to output labels for part assemblies, then you must bear in mind that these reports now depend on
the selection currently made (in the graphical editor or in a navigator,
for example). Part assemblies include, for example, the "Parts lists",
"Summarized parts lists", and "Manufacturer / supplier lists" report types.
This means:
If terminals are selected, terminal parts are output.
If terminal strips are selected, all the terminal and terminal strip parts
are output.
If terminal strips and individual terminals are selected, all the terminal
and terminal strip parts are output. However, terminal parts are only
evaluated once.
The same applies to cables and connections.
Note:
All parts are only output when in the Settings: Labeling dialog, the
Include parts group box has the appropriate check boxes selected
(e.g. Terminal parts, Cable conductor parts, etc.).
252
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Parts Management
Improved full-text filter
The new version now provides you with an improved, faster full-text
search in parts management.
Benefit: Now that the search text can be entered directly, full-text
search has become easier and more intuitive. The use of a
SQL server as the parts database also makes a fast, full-text
search possible.
The full-text search dialog has been removed, and instead, you enter
the text you want to find directly in the Full-text filter field. Then click
(Find). The display in the tree / in the list / in the combination is updated
and only shows the parts that contain the entered text in a field. To delete the search term and return to the display of all the parts, click
(Delete).
In this case, the text entered can also be only a part of the term to be
searched: For example if you are filtering by the text Motor, parts in
which texts such as Motors, Motor power line or Three-phase
motor occur, will also be displayed. When parts management is closed,
text-based filters are deleted.
Note:
In the improved full-text search, you can gain access not only in the
Parts management dialog, but also in the Part selection dialog and
in the navigator for part master data.
Full-text search syntax
Upper-/lower-case letters are not taken into account in the full-text
search. Do not use placeholder characters (such as * or ?), as these will
not be evaluated in the full-text search.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
253
Instead, the search logic when entering text is now similar to the common full-text syntax (+, spaces, etc.), used in Internet search engines.
Example:
Enter the following search text in the Full-text filter field:
"Isolating terminal with fuse"
In this search, the parts found will contain exactly the Isolating
terminal with fuse character string.
Terminal motor
With this OR operation, the parts found are those for which the text
terminal or motor is contained in the text boxes. There may be
different text boxes for the individual parts.
Terminal +motor or +terminal +motor
With this AND operation, a space has to be entered between the first
search term and the plus character. The parts found are those containing the text terminal and motor in the text boxes. The two texts
may both be contained within one text field, or may appear in different
fields.
Note:
This AND operation can then only be used if a SQL server is used as
the parts database. If Access databases are used, the search term
Terminal +motor would have the same effect as Terminal motor;
thus it would be treated as an OR operation.
Search index for full-text search
An index is now created in the parts database for the full-text search.
When you run this search for the first time, you first have to confirm a
message about generating the search index with [OK]. If the search
index has to be updated after a change in the parts database, for example, do this by selecting Utilities > Parts > Update search index.
254
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Full-text search and field-based filter combination

The Field-based filter and the Full-text filter can be used simultaneously. In a case like this, the effect of the filters is additive.
For example, if a full-text search should only occur over a certain "part
type" (such as "Electrical engineering - Component"), you now set the
field-based filter. In the Filter dialog of the field-based filter, you create
an appropriate filter, activate it, and then enter the search term in the
Full-text filter field.
Note:
Please note that the parts structure of the Parts management is freely
configurable. The tree configuration shown here may differ from your
configuration, which you can configure via Utilities > Parts > Management > [Extras] > Settings.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
255
Additional selection option using the "Combination" tab

In version 1.9 International SP 1, the part master data navigator had an
added Combination tab, which is now also available in the Parts management dialog. This new tab contains a combined view of the parts tree
and list.
Benefit: This tab allows you to navigate more easily and quickly in
your part master data. This means that even with extensive
part master data, you retain an overview every time and
quickly find the required parts, which you then apply to the
project data at the push of a button. Increased planning
safety and reduced planning time are the result of consistent
system optimization.
You can preselect parts in the tree view in the upper area of the Combination tab. When you select a tree structure level such as the "Cables /
connections" product group, the associated parts are displayed in the list
below. The range of the display in this tab can also be configured via
Popup menu > Configure columns.
Creating subtrades for fluid power

It is now also possible to create separate subtrades in parts management for fluid power-specific trades, and assign parts to these new
subtrades.
Benefit: This means that for the first time, you can assign your parts
to multiple trades and now subtrades as well. This has the
advantage that you can classify your parts in parts management even more precisely. There is also no longer any need
to enter subtrades manually at devices.
The General tab has been redesigned for this. The trades which contain
a part, are now no longer displayed in a group box with multiple check
boxes, but as a list in the Trade / subtrade field (e.g. "Electrical engineering, Pneumatics").
256
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
In this field, click [...], so that in the subsequent dialog, you can define
additional trades / subtrades, which should contain the part. In the subsequent Trade / subtrade dialog, select the check boxes in the Use
column to define the additional trades that are to contain the part.
For fluid power-specific trades (hydraulics, pneumatics, lubrication,
cooling), use the
(New) button to open the Create subtrade dialog
and create a new subtrade. A subtrade of this type (such as "Pneumatics
high pressure", "Machine cooling" etc.), is then fitted in below the selected trade in the Trade / subtrade column.
Translating or editing the name of a subtrade
Multilingual entries are possible when entering a name in the Create
subtrade dialog. The popup menu for this field has the corresponding
popup menu items, e.g. Translate, Multilingual input, etc.
To edit a subtrade, select the relevant subtrade in the Trade / subtrade
dialog and click the
(Edit) button, or double-click. In the dialog that
opens you can change the name of a subtrade retrospectively or translate it using the abovementioned popup menu items.
Subtrades in reports
When reports and labels are output (e.g. parts list, connection list, etc.),
there can be multi-level sorting by trade and subtrade. You already have
a predefined scheme available.
Access via EPLAN API
As subtrades are stored as "normal" properties in EPLAN, access is
possible via EPLAN API. There are new properties for this, Subtrade
'Hydraulics' <22158>, Subtrade 'Pneumatics' <22159>, Subtrade
'Lubrication' <22195>, and Subtrade 'Cooling' <22196>.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
257
Data field for the part number of an ERP system

In parts management, you can now also enter the part number of an
external ERP system.
Benefit: You can now use both the "technical" and your own "commercial" part number in EPLAN parts management. This
means that you will not have a problem synchronizing or linking to additional parts management systems (ERP systems),
even if these systems use other identifying part numbers.
The General tab has been extended by the ERP number field for this
purpose. You can enter the part number of the external ERP system into
this new data field, which is located directly below the Part number field.
Just like the part number, this number also has to be unique, and this is
checked as well, when the part or variant is saved. ERP numbers may
be up to 255 characters in length.
Entering barcodes for parts

Barcodes can be used, for example, to uniquely identify products. Different coding standards are used internationally, such as GTIN (Global
Trade Item Number). In addition to this, companies use company-specific or separate industry standards. In the new version of EPLAN parts
management, it is now also possible to enter the identification number of
this type of barcode for a part.
Benefit: Centrally specified and globally unique numbers are used as
the basis for parts systems that span companies, industries,
and countries. Universal, machine-readable numbers from
manufacturer to end user reduce response times and logistics costs. By entering this data in parts management, EPLAN
fits seamlessly into this global concept.
258
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The Prices / Other tab has been extended for this purpose by the two
Barcode number / type fields. Enter the number and type of the particular barcode in these two fields, for example, "GTIN" or "EAN-13". Click
(Delete) to remove the current barcode type from the selection list.
The content of these two fields can be included in part assemblies (parts
lists, manufacturer / supplier lists, etc.) and when exporting and importing
parts. To allow you to consider this data in the reports, two new properties, Barcode number <22208> and Barcode type <22209>, are available to you (within the parts data) as placeholder texts in the respective
forms, and as format elements in the labeling settings.
Note:
Please be aware that when you enter the barcode number, there is no
check for uniqueness. The data is output in the reports exactly as it is
entered here. This means that no barcodes with combinations of lines
and gaps are generated. The contents of the two fields are not translatable.
Clip-on height for placements on mounting rails

Items which are placed on mounting rails often have a recess to receive
the mounting rail. So that this recess can be taken into account individually when the part is placed, the Mounting data tab now has a new
Clip-on height field.
Benefit: The clip-on height is taken into account individually during
part placement. And after a change to the mechanical structure, the space requirements of the entire assembly in the
enclosure are available at any time.
The clip-on height indicates how far an item extends into a mounting rail.
The bigger the value, the smaller the distance to the underside of the
mounting rail (and therefore to the mounting surface). If the value is set
to "0", the item sits exactly on the top edge of the mounting rail.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
259
If the mounting rail on which the part is placed as an item is changed, the
clip-on height of the placed item then refers to the new mounting rail. The
position of the item is then shifted accordingly. To change the mounting
rail, in the properties dialog for the placed mounting rail switch to the
Parts tab and select a different mounting rail part.
Note:
This functionality is intended only for the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on.
Example:
1 = mounting surface; 2 = mounting rail; 3 = clip-on height.
260
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Center mismatch for placements

In order to make things clearer, the former Clip-on height / center
mismatch field has been renamed.
Old name:
New name:
Clip-on height / center mismatch
Center mismatch
If you do not want the part to be centered in the front view, enter the offset relative to the middle of the mounting rail in the Center mismatch
field. The item will then be automatically offset by this value.
Note:
Entries in the Center mismatch field will be evaluated by the "EPLAN
Pro Panel" add-on and by EPLAN Cabinet.
Entering outline drawings in parts management

EPLAN parts management now also gives you the opportunity to assign
outline drawings to a part.
Benefit: With outline drawings, you enter your own assembly profiles
in the system. These can immediately be used in the diagram, in variable lengths. The required special profiles are
then quickly available in the system.
You can enter this type of drawing, which has previously been created in
the outline editor as an outline of the "outline extrusion" type, in parts
from the "mounting rail" or "cable ducts" product groups, for example. If
a corresponding part is then inserted into a layout space in the "EPLAN
Pro Panel" add-on, the outline is extruded to a 3D object.
Outline drawings are entered on the Technical data tab in the Macro
field. Click the [...] button next to the field, and in the subsequent Select
macro dialog, select a file of the Outline extrusion (*.fc2) file
type.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
261
New "Documents" tab

Previously, it was not always possible for some parts from companies
operating internationally, to enter all the available documents into the
relevant fields of the Technical data tab. This is the reason why the
Parts management dialog has been extended by the new Documents
tab. Now you can enter and manage up to 20 external documents and /
or hyperlinks.
Benefit: Now you can store all the external documentation for a part
in parts management. You can supply all downstream processes with the required information from engineering.
Colleagues from production, assembly, commissioning,
servicing, and maintenance will thank you, if all the information that they require is also stored in the project
documentation.
The previous External document 1 - 3 fields on the Technical data tab
have been removed. External documents that have already been stored
here are moved to the first three rows of the new tab.
To enter an external document on the Documents tab, first click in the
relevant cell in the File / hyperlink column and then click [...]. In the subsequent dialog, select the document file to be linked. But here too, you
can also use Copy and Paste (in the Popup menu) to enter an Internet
or e-mail address. Then, in the Designation column, enter any textual
description for the hyperlink / external document.
262
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Assigning cables / connections to an image file

With the new version, you can now also store an image file for parts of
the "Cables / connections" Product group, as with mounting data. The
parts management Cable data tab has been extended by the Image file
field for this purpose.
Benefit: The assignment of an image makes part selection easier and
safer for the user.
To assign an image file to a cable, click [...] in this field to select the
desired image file in the subsequent file selection dialog.
Protecting data fields before updating

When importing parts data into the parts database, it is now possible to
protect individual data fields before updating. The fields to be protected
are listed in a scheme in the Field assignment dialog.
Benefit: This allows you to prevent manually entered data (such as
your own text in the Description field), being overwritten
during a parts data import with updating of the existing
records.
To create an appropriate scheme, in the Import records dialog, click the
[...] button, which is located next to the Field assignment field. Use the
new Protect fields tab to define the properties that are not to be updated
when parts data is imported. To do this, click
(New), and in the Criteria selection dialog, select the property to be ignored when importing.
New synchronization of parts

Synchronization of parts is now similar in process and appearance to
synchronization in master data. In the Utilities > Parts menu, the two
previous menu items Current project --> Parts database and Parts
database --> Current project have been replaced by the new menu
item Synchronize current project.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
263
With this menu item, you open the Synchronization of parts - <Project
name> dialog, which you can use to specifically update the data of individual parts in the project. In this dialog, you also have the opportunity to
complete the parts database. Use [Extras] > Complete current system
to transfer, for example, the parts stored in a project to a new parts database.
Benefit: This new dialog makes parts data synchronization a much
more transparent process. You know in advance whether the
status of the data is different, and can specifically synchronize individual parts, or exclude them from synchronization.
Also new to the Utilities > Parts menu are the following two menu items:
Update current project
This menu item searches the current project for obsolete parts data.
If parts data that is more up-to-date is found in system parts (that is,
in the parts database), the parts stored in the project will be updated.
Complete current project
This menu item searches the current project for missing parts; if available, they are then automatically stored.
Updating parts when opening a project

You can now set up EPLAN so that the parts stored in a project are
updated when the project is opened. The general settings for the
management of projects have been extended by the Update stored
parts at Open check box for this purpose (under Options > Settings >
Projects > "Project name" > Management > General).
Benefit: This automatically keeps the parts in the project up to date.
Because synchronization is automatic, there is no need for
manual action, and this ensures that all users are always
working with current parts data.
264
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If this check box is selected, the parts used in the project are synchronized with the parts in the parts database when the project is opened. If
the project parts are obsolete, a prompt opens. Confirm this with [Yes],
and the stored parts will be updated.
Additional menu items for the part master data navigator

To extend the insertion of devices / the selection of parts using drag &
drop from the part master data navigator, the popup menu of the Part
master data dialog has been extended by two menu items, Insert
device and Assign.
If a macro with different representation types is stored in a part, the
different submenu items (Multi-line, Single-line, etc.) of the Insert
device menu item allow you to place the part macro in the required
representation type. If a suitable representation type is not found, then
after a note, a macro in a different representation type is suggested.
With Assign, you can assign a part previously selected in the navigator
to a certain function on the schematic. When you select this option, the
part hangs on the cursor. Position the cursor on the required component
in the graphical editor, and left-click to assign the part. The part can be
assigned several times; it remains on the cursor until you cancel the
action.
Tip:
For part selection using drag & drop from the part master data navigator,
first select the required part in the Part master data dialog, press the
[Alt] key, and drag the part using drag & drop to a component in the
graphical editor.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
265
Message Management
Improved ergonomics
Preview for message management
Some of the functionalities of message management have been changed
in the current version. Now, as in all the other project data dialogs, you
can use the graphical preview. If you have opened the graphical preview
(View > Graphical preview), the page that a selected message relates
to, will be displayed there. The faulty function will be highlighted in the
preview.
Now you are also given a properties preview in the Property preview
dialog, if you have selected a message in message management.
Because the graphical preview has been extended, the Preview of
errors menu item in the message management popup menu has been
removed. The Update menu item has also been removed. Instead, you
can now use the familiar "Go to" functionalities Go to (cross-referenced), Go to (all representation types) and Go to (graphic).
Benefit: Graphically, it is instantly obvious where the cause of the
message can be found. Consistent ergonomics reduce
familiarization time and simplify operation for occasional
users.
Direct editing of properties
It is now also possible in message management to directly edit the devices underlying the messages. The popup menu has been extended by
the Edit in table, Properties, and Properties (global) menu items for
this.
266
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Benefit: With edit in table, you can now resolve multiple messages
with the same cause, in one process. This drastically reduces
the number of editing steps required and considerably
speeds up message correction. You can find and eliminate
planning errors quickly and easily. This allows you to specifically improve the quality of your project documentation.
Displaying layout space messages
To allow you to quickly identify messages created in an "EPLAN Pro
Panel" add-on layout space, the Layout space column has been added
to the Message management dialog. The name of the layout space on
which the erroneous object is located is shown here.
If you select a relevant message in the table and double-click, the erroneous object is shown in the 3D view of the opened layout space. By
means of Popup menu > Configure columns, you can hide and show
the Layout space column in message management.
New trade-specific filter settings

It is now also possible in EPLAN message management, to display only
specific messages for process engineering and / or for mechanics.
Benefit: The messages suitable for the trades give you a clear task
list and clear responsibilities for editors. This simplifies the
division of work, and the project status becomes more transparent, particularly in cross-discipline engineering projects.
For this purpose, the new Process engineering and Mechanics check
boxes have been added to the Filter: Messages dialog. If one of these
check boxes is selected and the Active check box in message management is also selected, then only the messages for the devices assigned
to the particular trade will be shown in the Message management
dialog.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
267
New "Prevent errors" check type for error checking

The new "Prevent errors" check type is now available for numerous
checks in the check-related settings for message management.
Benefit: The new "Prevent errors" check type prevents incorrect
schematics at the planning stage. Instead of correcting after
the event, errors are detected immediately and eliminated at
once. There is no need for amendment.
Choose the optimum type of check for you, subject to the
engineering phases. EPLAN gives you great freedom in
project data checking, and gives you optimum support in
creating high-quality machine and plant documentation.
If you have set this new check box type for a message number in the
Settings: Messages and checks dialog, then during project editing,
a Prevent errors note will immediately inform you as soon as the set
check criterion is violated by a change.This note lists not only the check
text, but also the page, DT, and position of the incorrect function. After
closing the note with [OK], the listed changes are undone, and you can
repeat the selected action (e.g. insert a symbol).
Example:
In a check run scheme for the message "017005" (with the message
text "Duplicate DT, too many main functions") you have set the "Prevent
errors" check type. If, in the EPLAN-Demo sample project, on page
=EB3+ET1/1, you now insert a safety fuse (symbol F1 with number 50),
and enter -F1 for this device as the displayed DT, as soon as you close
the properties dialog with [OK], the Prevent errors note is displayed.
Once you have clicked [OK] here, symbol insertion is undone. The selected symbol stays on the cursor and you can repeat the action but
this time with a correct DT.
268
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Setting option for module-specific checks

In addition to message management, there are other modules that also
run checks and output messages in the message management dialog
(e.g. when automatically generating cables). These checks are designated module-specific checks and in the Settings: Messages and
checks dialog in the Type of check column, show the "Module-specific"
entry as standard.
You now have the opportunity in settings to "switch off" these modulespecific checks. If you do not want to perform a module-specific check,
select "No" as the Type of check setting.
Benefit: Module-specific checks can now also be "switched off". You
can specifically define the extent of automatic checking and
only run a data check when required.
Separate filters for running error checking

In the check-related settings for message management, you now have
the opportunity to set a separate filter for specific error checks. This
allows you, for example, to run an error check only for the functions of a
certain trade, or only for objects with a special function definition.
Benefit: By using other filter criteria, only the messages that you need
are displayed. Project evaluation and monitoring is easier and
faster.
The new Filter column has been added to the Settings: Messages and
checks dialog for this purpose. The "All trades" filter scheme is preset as
standard in the relevant cell for most of the checks. Filtering does not
take place with this setting.
Click [...], and in the subsequent Filter dialog, select a predefined filter
scheme or create your own new scheme. For most error checking, you
can, depending on the selected message class, define not only the
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
269
Trade property, but also other function-specific properties and / or a

function definition (function group, etc.), as a filter criterion.
With error checking for which a separate filter cannot be set (such as
module-specific checks), the "No filter" entry (which cannot be modified)
is shown in the Filter column.
Note:
Please be aware that when you use a complex filter with multiple criteria,
it can take a long time to run a check, as EPLAN has to evaluate the filter
and check that it meets the criteria.
New check run for checking the online numbering format

Different actions, such as copying and pasting pages from other projects,
or the insertion of macros, can result in device tags getting into your project, that do not comply with your specified device structure. To check
the set online numbering format for the devices in the project, you can
now access the new 017008 check run in EPLAN.
If, in the Settings: Messages and checks dialog for a check run
scheme, you have set this new message appropriately, then message
management will display the devices that do not conform to your defaults
in the Numbering format dialog. When the "Online / offline" check type
is set, messages are written to message management as soon as they
occur. With the "Offline" check type, messages are only listed in message management after a check run.
You access the Numbering format dialog for online numbering, for
example, via Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Devices > Numbering (online). Then, in the Settings: Numbering
(online) dialog for the On symbol insertion group box, click next to the
Numbering format field on [...].
270
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Features in the "Revision Management" Add-on

Note:
The "Revision Management" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN
Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery
for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional and EPLAN Fluid.
Revision control, the "Revision Management" add-on, is used to automatically record and document subsequent modifications to existing
plants. To obtain information about changes in the various project states,
you can use the following operations:
Revision with change tracking
With change tracking, you generate a revision. The current project
becomes the revision project, and you then continue working in this.
All the changes in this revision project are logged.
Property comparison of projects
With this operation, you compare certain properties of the current
project with the corresponding properties of a reference project. You
can decide which properties will be checked for changes.
Renamed revision control operation

In older EPLAN versions, the property comparison is designated as a
Project comparison. So that the project comparison of the revision can
be more clearly distinguished from the project verification of project
management, some renaming has taken place in the user interface,
including:
Old name:
New name:
Project comparison
Comparison project
Reference project
In addition to this, the revision control user interface has also greatly
changed, as its menu structure has been adapted to the two operations
mentioned above (see the following section on page 272).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
271
We have also incorporated the following new features for you:

All the modified pages of a revised project can be completed with
common revision data (see page 275).
Report pages can be updated upon completion (see page 277).
The revision index for page modifications can be automatically given
consecutive numbers (see page 278).
A separate revision marker is available for new objects in the reports
(see page 281).
When comparing the properties of projects, the objects to be compared can be determined by alternative identification (see page 283).
The results of a properties comparison are shown in a new dialog
(see page 286).
New settings have been made available for comparing the properties
of projects (see page 289).
The results of a properties comparison are saved in a project-specific
database (see page 290).
The revision data from a properties comparison can now also be
deleted (see page 291).
In change tracking and during a properties comparison for projects,
the deleted objects can now also be displayed (see page 292).
Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics

In the new EPLAN version, we have divided the two revision control
operations in the user interface into two different menu items. Because of
this, below the Utilities > Revision control menu path, there are now
two new menu items, Change tracking and Property comparison of
projects.
272
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Benefit: The spatial separation of the menu items makes it easier for
you to distinguish the two different revision control
operations. Communication difficulties are thus substantially
reduced.
After the division, the Change tracking menu item shows the following
submenu items:
Generate revision
Complete pages
Deleted pages
Edit revision data
Delete revision.
And the Property comparison of projects menu item has the following
submenu items available:
Generate reference project
Compare projects
Show results of the properties comparison
Add revision markers
Delete revision.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
273
The two menu items Complete project and Remove write protection,
which are relevant to both operations, are still located directly below the
main menu item, Revision control.
Division of the settings
In the course of this interface redesign, the revision settings have also
been renamed, or split into different dialogs.
The project-specific settings under Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name" > Management > Revision have been split between
the following settings dialogs:
Settings: Revision (property comparison of projects)
This dialog is where the new settings for the property comparison of
projects can be found (see page 289).
274
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Settings: Revision (graphical representation)

In this dialog, the settings for displaying the revision markers have
been moved. Most of the settings for displaying the graphical marker
apply both to change tracking and to the property comparison of projects. For more information, see the section on page 281.
Settings: Revision (change tracking)
This dialog is where the familiar project-specific settings for change
tracking are located.
Information about the new settings, While deleting create deletion
markers and list deleted pages and Take page types specially
into consideration when completing can be found in the sections
"Displaying deleted objects" on page 292 and "Numbering the revision
index" on page 278.
The dialog with the company-specific comparison settings for revision,
has been renamed the Settings: Property comparison of projects
dialog. The menu path to this dialog is: Options > Settings > Company
> Management > Property comparison of projects.
Also available to you in the company settings is the new Settings:
Change tracking (numbering of the revision index) dialog. More
information on this is provided in the section "Numbering the revision
index" on page 278.
Project completion enhancement

Generating a revision via the Utilities > Revision control > Change
tracking > Generate revision menu path produces an edited project.
This type of project is designated a revision project. Changes to a
revision project are identified by revision markers.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
275
If you now use Utilities > Revision control > Complete project to complete a revision project, then there is no longer just a prompt, but instead
a new dialog opens. This Complete project dialog gives you the opportunity to enter common revision data (revision index, description, and
reason for change) for all the modified pages of a revision project.
Benefit: On completion of a revised project, you specify common

revision data for all the modified pages.
The dialog also has the same input options for this purpose as the
Description of page modification dialog that opens when pages are
completed. When you complete a revision project, the comment for the
revision is suggested in the Complete project dialog as the entry for the
Description field.
276
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Generating a report when completing a project and pages

In another new feature, you can now also update the reports when completing the projects / pages.
Benefit: When completing the projects, you can simultaneously bring
the reports up to date. The report pages have the same
revision index that was last specified when completing.
In the Complete project dialog, the Generate report when completing
project check box is available for this purpose. If this check box is selected, when you close the dialog with [OK], all the project report pages
are updated. Once a project has been completed in this way, all the
report pages are up to date, and the "Draft" identifier has been removed
for all the pages.
In our standard plot frame, multiple revision properties are placed as
special texts. Using this plot frame, the Revision index (change
tracking) [1] page property is displayed in the table of contents and in
the revision overview, for example. If a report is generated for a project
when completing, then afterwards, these report pages show the last
revision index to be specified.
Note:
Pages of the "Revision overview" page type are now also considered in
revision control. This means that relevant pages can, for example, be
identified as a "draft" and also completed. The special texts for the
revision index are displayed and updated on these pages.
Generating a report when completing report pages
The Description of page modification dialog when completing pages
has also been appropriately extended (menu path: Utilities > Revision
control > Change tracking > Complete pages). If the new Generate
report when completing pages check box is activated, the selected
report pages are updated.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
277
If generating a report produces a modification to a report page (for example, in the table of contents, in the revision overview, etc.), then this page
will be completed with the same revision index, and the "Draft" identifier
for this page will be removed. The selected report pages are updated
even if they are not identified as a "draft".
For other pages that are selected and which are not report pages (such
as schematic pages), the check box when completing has no effect.
Numbering the revision index

When completing pages, you now have the opportunity to set up the revision so that EPLAN automatically suggests a value for the revision index.
The revision index is determined by means of a numbering scheme, and
it is always the highest value that is suggested.
Benefit: Revision indexes for page modifications can be automatically
assigned consecutive numbers.
Numbering schemes for the revision index
To select a numbering scheme for the revision index or to create one of
your own, select Options > Settings > Company > Management >
Change tracking (numbering of the revision index). By default, a
scheme is defined in this new dialog, to be used to determine a suggestion for the revision index.
A scheme is edited, and a numbering format defined, in exactly the same
way as in the other settings dialogs for numbering. The "Counter" and
"Separator" format elements are available to you here.
278
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Display warning if revision index does not conform to the scheme:

If this check box is selected in the settings dialog, when pages are completed, a warning is shown if the entered value does not conform to the
suggested revision index. Confirm this warning with [OK], and the
entered value is applied, which interrupts the numbering of the indexes.
The numbering of the revision index will start from the beginning, with the
next completion.
Completing pages with a numbering scheme
If you have selected or created a different numbering scheme, then
when pages or a project are completed, the highest revision index is
determined for the pages to be completed. In such a case, a value is
suggested to you in the Complete project and Description of page
modification dialogs for the Revision index field. And with each subsequent completion, the suggested index is increased in accordance with
the set numbering scheme.
Taking page types specially into consideration when completing
In change tracking, you can now specify that certain page types are specially treated when completing. You can also complete pages that have
not changed, and exclude from completion pages that have changed.
Benefit: The latest revision index can now also be shown on pages
that have not been modified.
Report pages can be excluded from completion. These
pages will then not be listed in the revision overview after
updating and these overview pages remain clear.
The project-specific revision settings under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision (change tracking)
have been extended by the Take page types specially into consideration when completing group box. An illustration can be found in the
"Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics" section, starting from
page 274 onwards.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
279
Always complete:
The page types shown in this field are always considered when completing and are provided with a revision index, even if there have been no
modifications on the project page.
To allow pages with the page type selected in the Always complete field
to be considered when completing pages, you must also select these
pages in the page navigator before completing, or complete the project
straight away. If you wish the current revision index to be numbered as
well, you must select a relevant numbering scheme in the company
settings.
Example:
You have created a revision of the sample project EPLAN-DEMO, and
have made a change on schematic page =EB3+ET1/1 with the Power
supply description.
To allow the latest revision index to also be shown on the title page of
the project, in the Settings: Revision (change tracking) dialog, in the
Always complete field, select the page type Title page / cover
sheet. First of all, in the page navigator, select both the schematic page
and the title page. Once you have then completed the pages with the
index EPLAN1, this text will also be displayed in the plot frame on the title
page.
Never complete:
The page types shown in this field are never considered when completing, regardless of whether or not changes have been made on the project page.
If, for example, certain page types are listed for report pages here,
although the relevant pages will be updated when completing, they will
not be displayed in the revision overview.
280
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
You have made some changes on the schematic pages of a revision
project. Now when you complete the project and select the Generate
report when completing project check box (see page 275), the report
pages will be updated before completion. These updates are recorded as
a change and also listed in a previously output revision overview. With
extensive reports, this can quickly cause the revision overview to become confusing.
If the updated report pages are not to be listed in the revision overview,
you must previously exclude the report pages from completion. To do
this, in the Settings: Revision (change tracking) dialog, in the Never
complete field, select the relevant page types (Parts list, Device
tag list, etc.). Now when you complete the project, the report pages
are actually updated, but not listed in the revision overview.
Use the
(New) button above the two fields Always complete and
Never complete, to move to the Select page type dialog, where you
can select the required page type.
Differing graphical markers for change tracking

In change tracking, it was previously only possible to use the graphical
markers for changed objects to identify revision changes. In the new
version, the differing graphical markers for added, changed, and deleted
objects are now also shown in change tracking.
New revision marker for reports
New and moved objects on report pages (list entries, graphics, etc.),
have previously all been simply marked as "changed" in a revision
report. A new settings option now makes it possible for you to select a
separate graphical marker for new objects that have been added to the
reports.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
281
The Graphical marker group box has been extended by the New in
report tab for this purpose. This graphical marker is located in the
project-specific settings for the revision under Options > Settings >
Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision (graphical
representation).
Once a report has been updated, all the new objects (such as the new
devices of a device tag list) are marked as "New in report" by this graphical marker. Objects that have been moved by the newly added objects
will continue to be shown as "changed" objects on the report pages.
Note:
Please note that the graphical marker for the "New in report" revision
change is only used in change tracking, and does not work in master
data reports (forms documentation, plot frame documentation, etc.).
282
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Alternative properties comparison

When comparing the properties of two projects in revision control, you
now have the opportunity to run the comparison using an alternative
identification.
Benefit: When comparing properties with alternative identification, you
can also compare projects that have been automatically
generated.
A standard property comparison of projects identifies the objects by an
internal object ID. When projects are automatically generated (by the
EPLAN Engineering Center, for example), the internal object IDs are reassigned at every generation. This means that every time you generate
them, a completely new project emerges and all objects in this project
are given new object IDs. This makes it impossible to carry out a properties comparison using the identification of objects based on the object ID
anymore.
If you want to run an alternative properties comparison, in the Compare
properties of projects dialog, you must select the new Alternative
identification check box. For more information, see the following
section.
Comparing the properties of projects

Before actually comparing the properties, you must first generate a
reference project. The reference project is usually an earlier copy of the
current project. You then select the desired project in the page navigator
and select the menu items Utilities > Revision control > Property
comparison of projects > Compare projects.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
283
After selecting the reference project in the Compare properties of

projects dialog, you then specify your settings for the comparison.
Excluding structure identifiers from the properties comparison
You can use the new Structure identifier setting field to define which
structure identifiers are no longer to be seen as different during a property comparison of projects.
284
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If you have renamed the structure identifiers, they will normally be

treated in the property comparison of projects as if they have been
deleted and inserted again. If you do not wish to display such changes,
you can create a scheme that tells you which structure identifiers were
renamed. The specified structure identifiers are no longer considered in
a property comparison of projects.
You use the [...] button next to the Structure identifier setting field to
open a dialog with the same name. There you specify which structure
identifier in the reference project is to be replaced by which structure
identifier from the current project, and you can save these settings in a
separate scheme.
Note:
This setting is only useful if you have activated the alternative identification of objects using the Alternative identification check box.
Create deletion markers for deleted objects
This check box of the same name is also new in the dialog. If this is selected, the deleted objects (components, texts, etc.), on the project
pages are identified by a revision marker and a deletion marker. More
information on this is provided in the section "Displaying deleted objects"
on page 292.
Properties comparison with alternative identification
To run a properties comparison with alternative identification, select the
new Alternative identification check box. In a case like this, the objects
can be identified with the help of so-called "candidate keys". A candidate
key is a minimal quantity of properties that uniquely identifies an object.
The identifying properties are preset by EPLAN.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
285
Note:
When you compare the properties of projects that have been automatically generated (by the EPLAN Engineering Center, for example), you
should select the Alternative identification check box, as the internal
object IDs are re-assigned at each generation, making it no longer
possible to use object IDs for a properties comparison.
The comparison run starts when you click [OK]. The Results of property comparison - <Project name> dialog opens and shows an overview
of the results.
In addition to this, the changes specified by a properties comparison are
indicated in the project by graphical markers.
Displaying results of properties comparison

The results of a properties comparison are shown in the new Results
of property comparison - <Project name> dialog. This list of results is
automatically displayed after a property comparison of projects. It does
not matter whether the properties comparison has been run in the
previous way, or by using the new, alternative identification.
Benefit: EPLAN now has a new, clear list for the results of the comparison. You are quickly and easily given an overview of all
the changes.
But you can also open this dialog via Utilities > Revision control >
Property comparison of projects > Show results of the properties
comparison. Data is automatically updated after each property comparison of projects.
286
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The tabular structure of the dialog is similar to that of message management, and can be positioned in the same way by docking and undocking,
outside or inside the EPLAN main window.
The following columns are displayed in the table:
Object type: Shows the object type, for example, Function, Image
file, etc.
DT / name: Shows the complete DT of the function or the name of the
object. For connections, the source and target are displayed; for projects, the project name is shown including file path; for image files, the
file name is shown with file path; and for hyperlinks, the designation is
shown.
Page of the object: Shows the page where differences were found.
Kind of change: Shows whether the object was changed, deleted, or
newly inserted.
Property: Shows the changed property.
Previous value: Shows the value of the property in the reference
project.
New value: Shows the value of the property in the current project.
Last editor: Shows the last editor of the page.
The data shown in the results dialog is read from the MS Access database in which the results of the property comparison are saved.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
287
Number of displayed results

To allow you to quickly receive an overview of the results, not all the
entries from the MS Access database are displayed. You define the
maximum number of messages to be displayed in the results dialog with
another new project setting, Maximum number of displayed results
(see the following section on page 289).
If the number of messages produced exceeds the specified figure, result
output is canceled, and a corresponding note is displayed.
Jumping from the results dialog to the project
Available to you in the Results of property comparison dialog popup
menu, are the two "Go to" menu items Go to project (graphic) and Go
to reference project (graphic). You can use these functionalities to
jump from a modified object to the relevant points in the schematic.
For a newly added object, the only available option is Go to project
(graphic).
Both menu items are active for moved and changed objects.
Both menu items are also active for deleted objects. But with the Go
to project (graphic) menu item, you can then only jump to the project
schematic, if a deletion marker has been generated at this point. To
do this, you must activate the new project setting While deleting
create deletion markers and list deleted pages (see the section
"Displaying deleted objects" on page 292).
Tip:
For certain objects (functions, connections, potentials, PCT loops, PCT
loop functions) given a revision marker in the graphical editor, it is possible to carry out a synchronization in the Results of property comparison - <Project name> dialog. To do this, mark the required object and
then select Popup menu > Synchronize selection. The corresponding
lines in the results list will be marked.
288
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New settings for the property comparison of projects

In this new dialog, you can specify settings for the property comparison
of projects.
Place revision markers on each page at connections:

Now you can also use these settings to specify how connections across
more than one page should be marked in the event of a change.
If this check box is selected, and a change has been made to a connection that exists on more than one page, this connection will be marked on
all of those pages.
If the check box is deselected, the connection will only appear on the first
page.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
289
Maximum number of displayed results:

We have already mentioned this field, which is where you specify the
maximum number of messages to be shown in the Results of property
comparison - <Project name> dialog. This setting helps speed up the
display of the dialog and does not influence the execution of the property
comparison. Regardless of the number specified here, all objects will be
compared and all results will be written to a database (see the following
section).
Project-specific databases for the comparison results

The results of a property comparison of projects are saved in an MS
Access database, as before. This database can no longer be freely
selected or created from scratch in the settings, but is now automatically
generated for each project and saved in the project directory of the
current project. The database is automatically assigned a file name,
which includes the file name of the reference project (e.g. Reference
project.Revision.mdb).
Benefit: Because the databases for the comparison results are stored
project-specifically, this data can also be backed up with a
project / sent as an e-mail message. This also allows you to
easily integrate all the information about the changes in the
project exchange. All project participants, even those in the
larger project teams, are thus always up to date.
If you want to remove databases of this type from a project, the compression settings in the Revision control area have a new check box available, Remove revision database. You can then remove the databases
for the comparison results from the project by selecting Project >
Organize > Compress and then making the appropriate compression
settings.
290
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
In the course of these changes, the Database for the project comparison result field has been removed from the revision settings. In addition
to this, the directory setting for revision control has also been removed
from the Settings: Directories dialog.
Deleting revision data of the property comparison

Previously, you were not able to delete the data of a properties compareson in revision control. But now, in the new version, you have the
opportunity to totally remove all revision data and revision markers.
Benefit: Once all the revision information is removed from a revised
project, this type of project can be used again to create basic
projects or project templates, for example.
The previous dialog, Delete revision markers, has been extended and
renamed for the purpose, as well as being split into two menu items, in
accordance with the two revision control operations.
Old name:
New name:
Delete revision markers
Delete revision
To remove the revision data and revision markers produced by a property comparison of projects, select Utilities > Revision control >
Property comparison of projects > Delete revision.
Revision markers:
If this check box is selected, all revision markers generated after a property comparison of projects are deleted.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
291
Revision data of property comparison:

If this new check box is selected, the revision data generated after a
properties comparison is now also deleted. This includes, for example,
information about the associated reference projects.
Tip:
To remove the change tracking revision data and revision markers from
a project, select the Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking >
Delete revision menu path.
Displaying deleted objects

EPLAN revision control has been extended, to allow deleted objects to
also be displayed for revision with change tracking and for the property
comparison of projects.
Benefit: The display of deleted objects allows you to track the
changes in a project revision or in a properties comparison
more transparently.
If deleted objects are to be displayed in a project, you must make the
following settings:
For a revision with change tracking you must activate the new
While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages
project setting. The check box can be found under Options >
Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision
(change tracking).
For a property comparison of projects, in the Compare properties
of projects dialog, you must select the new Create deletion markers
for deleted objects check box.
292
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If you have made these settings in a revision project / during a properties

comparison, then the deleted objects (components, texts, etc.), on the
project pages will be identified by a revision marker and by a special
object the deletion marker. This is the case both for change tracking
and for a properties comparison. The set color for deleted objects is used
for the revision marker here.
Symbol for the deletion marker
A deletion marker gives you information about a deleted object. It is
marked by a new special symbol (DO // 300 // Deleted object)
from the SPECIAL symbol library, and is placed in the same position as
the previously existing object.
Example:
A typical deletion marker in the schematic:
Layer management has been extended by the new EPLAN576,

Graphic.Deleted objects layer for the deletion marker. You can use
a corresponding setting in layer management to set the deletion marker
to invisible / visible throughout the project.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
293
Properties dialog for deletion markers

Double-click on a deletion marker to open the Properties (components): Deletion marker dialog.
This dialog comprises the familiar Display and Symbol / function data
tabs, as well as the new Deletion marker tab, with information about
each object that is removed. The properties of the currently deleted
object are shown in this tab, such as the name and the Type of the
deleted object, the User name and the Delete date.
All the other properties are shown in the table in the Properties group
box, or can be selected by using property selection.
294
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Edit deletion markers in change tracking

If you have generated a revision of a project, the deleted objects are
now (if the setting mentioned above has been activated) identified in the
graphical editor by a revision marker and by a deletion marker. In a revision with change tracking, the following is possible for these deletion
markers:
Move deletion marker
If a deleted object is moved in the graphical editor, the deletion
marker is given a new revision marker. The color for changed objects
alerts the user to the fact that this object has been moved. In addition
to this, the marker text is recalculated and updated where necessary.
The special properties dialog for the deletion marker retains the information that this concerns a deleted object, even after the move.
Edit revision marker texts
By default, a tooltip with the automatically generated revision marker
text is also shown for a deletion marker. To modify this text, select the
deletion marker and then, as usual, choose the Edit revision marker
menu item from the popup menu.
Delete deleted objects permanently
To permanently remove the information about a deleted object from
a project page, click the deletion marker insertion point, and in the
popup menu, select the new Delete permanently menu item.
Note:
If the revision marker and the deletion marker of a deleted object are
conventionally deleted in the graphical editor (using Popup menu >
Delete, for example), then the deleted objects will be replaced by
identical, new objects.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
295
Displaying deleted pages in change tracking

If the While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages
check box is selected, then information about the deleted pages will be
saved when the pages of a revision project are deleted.
You can display a corresponding list using the new Deleted pages
dialog. This dialog can be accessed via the Utilities > Revision control
> Change tracking > Deleted pages menu items. Some of the properties displayed here are for information only and cannot be changed. You
can describe your changes in the Index, Description, and Reason for
change fields.
Deleted pages can now also be displayed in the revision overview. To do
this, you must activate the new form property Revision output with deleted pages <13088>, in the actual form for the revision overview. The
"Pages" option must also be set in the form properties for the Revision
output type <13106> property.
Tip:
You also have the opportunity to remove all the revision markers and
deletion markers in the project that were produced by change tracking.
To do this, select Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking >
Delete revision.
In a revision with change tracking, deleted pages count as data. To
delete them, in the Delete revision dialog, select the Revision data
from change tracking check box.
296
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Delete deleted objects in the properties comparison

In a project property comparison, the changes in the project are not permanently logged. The revision markers are generated once, and are initially retained in this form until the next comparison. Because of this, you
can permanently remove a deleted object from the project, by deleting
the revision marker and the deletion marker (via Popup menu > Delete,
for example).
The revision marker and the deletion marker will only be displayed again
after a new properties comparison with the unchanged reference project.
Tip:
You also have the opportunity to remove all the revision markers and
deletion markers in the project that were produced by the property comparison of projects. To do this, select Utilities > Revision control >
Property comparison of projects > Delete revision (see the section
"Deleting revision data of the property comparison" on page 291).
In a property comparison of projects, deletion markers and deleted
pages count as revision markers. To delete them, in the Delete revision
dialog, select the Revision marker check box.
Layout spaces in revision control

Change tracking
Changed layout spaces are treated as pages in revision control change
tracking. This allows them to be completed via Utilities > Revision
control > Change tracking > Complete pages, for example. Changes
in layout spaces are then also included in the revision overview.
The Page column in the Edit revision data dialog in Page / Layout
space has also been changed, and now also shows layout spaces.
Unlike a complete page name, the name of a layout space is separated
from the structure identifier not by the separator "/" but by a space and
a bracket (e.g. =EB3+ET1 (2)).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
297

The 3D objects in a layout space are also taken into account in a property comparison of projects. For example, by specifying the relevant
setting, deleted and new objects in a layout space are listed in the results
dialog.
The DT (identifying) <20005> property can be used for a property comparison of projects. But 3D object-specific properties that belong to the
"Data" category, such as Layout space name <20261>, Layout space
description, <20235> etc., can also be used for a property comparison.
298
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Features in the "Multi Language Translation" Add-on

Note:
The "Multi Language Translation" add-on is optionally available for
EPLAN Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of
delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, EPLAN Fluid, and EPLAN
PPE.
The Translation utility in the "Multi Language Translation" add-on also
has a number of new features in this version.
Distinguishing between source language and displayed language

In EPLAN, there is now a distinction between source language and
displayed language. The project-specific, general translation settings
have been extended by the Source language drop-down list for this
purpose.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
299
Benefit: This allows you to also enter texts in the project in a language
that is not set as a displayed language. In international projects, all users can use their native languages for their planning, whatever displayed language is defined. This simplifies
project planning work and protects against incorrect input,
which is perfectly possible with a foreign language.
Source language:
In this field, you specify the project source language. This is the language in which you enter your project texts. The project source language
is simultaneously the translation source language. When translating,
EPLAN searches the dictionary for suitable keywords for this language
and translates them into all the selected translation languages.
You also use the source language to specify the language in which
translatable project texts are displayed in dialogs.
Display languages:
In this field you specify the languages and sequence in which translatable project texts are displayed in the graphical editor. You can select
as the display languages either the dialog language (##_## (Dialog
language) option), or other languages that you have already set as
translation languages.
Example:
You have an appropriate dictionary with keywords in the source language en_US and the corresponding translation texts in the languages
fr_FR, zh_CN, ru_RU. You have made the following settings:
Setting
Language
Translation languages
en_US, fr_FR, zh_CN, ru_RU
Source language
en_US
Display languages
zh_CN, ru_RU
300
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
For text input and translation, this means:

Inserting texts:
You enter your project texts in English, because you have selected
en_US as the source language, and translate your project.
Translate:
All project texts are translated into the languages fr_FR, zh_CN, and
ru_RU. They already exist in en_US.
For text display, this means:
Graphical editor:
Here the project texts are only displayed in the languages zh_CN and
ru_RU.
Dialogs:
Here the translatable project texts, such as page descriptions in the
page navigator, are displayed in the source language of the project,
en_US.
Note:
The source language can be selected as the displayed language, but
does not have to be. If you have not selected the source language as the
displayed language, you will receive an appropriate message. The set
source language will also be displayed in the status bar, as soon as you
can enter a text in the project in EPLAN.
Upper-/lower-case letters for the source language

If you have previously inserted a word as text (for example, Antrieb for
the source language de_DE) and for the project-specific, general setting
Upper-/lower-case letters, have selected the option All upper-case
letters, for example, this only affects the output translation text during
the translation (for the translation language en_US, e.g. DRIVE). The
source text then had upper-/lower-case letters, as applied for the corresponding keyword in the dictionary. Now the Upper-/lower-case letters
setting also has an effect on the texts in the source language.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
301
You use this setting not only to define the style to be used to output the
translation texts, but also to decide how the entered project texts will be
displayed in the graphical editor.
Example:
For the Upper-/lower-case letters setting, you have selected the All
upper-case letters option. Then, in the Properties - Text dialog, enter
the word Motor. Once you have closed the dialog with [OK], the text
MOTOR will be displayed in the graphical editor.
Notes:
Please be aware that when automatically translating with Utilities >
Translation > Translate, the Match case setting can also affect the
translation. If this check box is selected, then EPLAN finds the matching keyword only if the upper- and lower-case writing of the text
exactly matches the upper- and lower-case writing of the keyword
in the dictionary.
If the translation texts are to be output in a specific style during a
translation run (All upper-case letters, All lower-case letters, or
Capitalize first letter options), you must deselect the Match case
check box. This setting does not take effect for a manual translation in
the properties dialog.
Text-based line breaks in translations

A new check box, Line breaks: Text-based is now available in the
translation settings, to influence the translation line breaks in a word-byword translation.
302
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
You can make this new setting separately, both for project texts and for
project-independent texts, for example, in the Settings: Translation
dialog on the Project and Project-independent tabs. However, the
relevant check box is only available once you have selected the "Word"
setting in the Segment field. If the check box is selected, then the positions of the line breaks in the translations are subject to the position in
the original text.
The check box is not selected by default. In this case, EPLAN considers
the word length of the source text and puts the line break at an appropriate point in the translated text. Separators in the translation of a
particular keyword are considered for a possible line break position. A
space, a hyphen, or a separator suggestion in the dictionary count as
separators here.
Example:
You have set en_US as the source and as the display language for a
project. French (fr_FR) is specified as the translation language and as
the second display language. The project texts input as examples here,
clearly show how these texts are displayed in the schematic, subject to
the selected setting after translation:
Text entry
Schematic
Setting
Line breaks:
Placeholder Text-based
Displayed text
Schematic
Placeholder
Schma des
connexions Code de rservation
Schematic
Line breaks:
Placeholder Text-based
Schematic
Placeholder
Schma des connexions
Code de rservation
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
303
For the text entry in the example, it is irrelevant whether it is produced

in a multilingual text box in the properties dialog of a component, or for
a graphical text. The line break character () only has an illustrative
function here. When text is entered in the Properties - Text dialog, an
inserted line break is not displayed.
Changed translation behavior on input

If you let your texts be translated on input, the entered texts now remain
language-independent, if a translation text cannot be found for this text in
the dictionary. An online translation now only takes place if there is also
a translation text available in the dictionary. In this case the text is always
displayed in the source language in which it was entered, regardless of
the specified dialog language.
Texts, page properties, project properties, and device properties are
already automatically translated as they are entered, if the Translate on
input check box is selected in the project-specific translation settings.
Correction option for existing projects
A correction option is also available for existing projects, in which nontranslated texts have been marked as translated. The Extent tab in the
translation settings has the [Correction] button available for this
purpose.
Use this button to convert texts that are excluded from the translation,
but for which a translation text is nevertheless entered, into languageindependent texts. Once you have clicked the button, a prompt is
displayed. The following options are available:
[Yes]: All texts excluded from translation are converted to languageindependent texts. Already existing translation texts are removed.
304
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
[No]: Only texts for which an empty translation text has been entered
are converted into language-independent texts. (Empty translation
texts can occur, for example, in projects created with older EPLAN
versions (before Version 2.0), if the Translate on input option was
enabled and no translation text was found in the dictionary.)
[Cancel]: No texts are converted.
Exporting the missing-word list based on the dictionary

In the new version, you now have the opportunity to export a missingword list based on the dictionary, independently of the project. Available
for this in the Dictionary dialog on the Management tab under [Extras],
is the new menu item Export missing-word list.
Benefit: An automated export of words with a missing translation
simplifies dictionary upkeep. The missing-word list makes it
easy to incorporate translation service providers. Project
editors no longer have to deal with translation tasks, and can
concentrate 100% on engineering tasks.
Selecting this menu item opens a dialog, in which you can specify the file
name and file type for the missing-word list to be exported. As when
exporting the dictionary, files in XML format *.etd, in tab-separated
Unicode format *.txt, in EPLAN 5 CSV format *.tf, or in EPLAN 21
tab-separated Unicode format *.txt are possible. You select the
relevant languages in a further subsequent dialog.
The missing dictionary texts can then be subsequently translated outside
EPLAN, and imported back with [Extras] > Import. Before starting the
import, you still have to select the source language. This is important for
correctly assigning the imported texts.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
305
Notes:
With this Export, the language used as the source language (that is,
the language in which you make entries in the dictionary), is the language set on the Project-independent tab in the translation settings
as the Source language. One possible menu path to the translation
settings is: Utilities > Translation > Settings.
To make sure that when importing texts, the new keywords are accepted into the dictionary, the Append new translations setting is
activated by default. This check box is located, for example, under
Options > Settings > User > Translation > Dictionary.
New messages for the translation

The following two messages are now available for the "008 Foreign
languages" message class in the check-related settings for message
management:
Message 008004 "Text entry '%1!s!' does not exist in the dictionary."
Message 008005 "Text is not translated in the project '%1!s!'."
Benefit: Using this functionality, you can jump directly to the texts in
the diagram that are not translated. This makes specific
revision faster and easier. There are no missing translations
and a high quality of project documentation is assured.
If you perform an offline check run using message 008005, "Text in project not translated '%1!s!'.", all texts (simple "graphical" texts, property
texts, path function texts, etc.) that do not have a translation for one or
more of the set translation languages, will be listed in message management.
306
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Features in the "User Rights Management" Add-on

Note:
The "User Rights Management" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN
Electric P8 Select, EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, and for EPLAN
Fluid.
With the "User Rights Management" add-on, an administrator can configure both the user rights and the user interface (dialogs, menu structure,
etc.), of the EPLAN platform.
Administrator:
As an administrator, you must read the following section before you work
with the new version.
Assigning new rights

Numerous rights for rights management have been added in the new
EPLAN version. To allow the new rights to be assigned to the different
user groups, you must update your rights management.
Tip:
We recommend that you create a new group, before updating. No rights
are assigned to this group initially. When you update, the new rights are
assigned to all the groups. Because of this, only the new rights are
activated for the sample group, to make the new rights easier for you to
recognize.
To update, in the Rights management dialog, click the [Update] button.
After updating, the System messages dialog is automatically opened.
Here you can see which rights have been added or removed.
The new rights are then available for the existing user groups. By default,
they are activated for all groups, including "Guests".
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
307
New Features in the "Mounting Panel" Add-on

Note:
The "Mounting Panel" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric
P8 Compact and EPLAN Fluid Compact. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Select, EPLAN Electric P8
Professional, and for EPLAN Fluid.
The "Mounting Panel" add-on allows planning of enclosures and mounting panels.
To make a clearer distinction between the navigator of this add-on and
other navigators, this project data dialog has been renamed "2D panel
layout navigator". The user-specific settings for graphical editing have
also been appropriately renamed.
Old name:
New name:
Panel layout navigator
2D panel layout navigator
Settings: Panel layout
Settings: 2D panel layout
A clearer view in the navigator

Previously in the 2D panel layout navigator, all parts without device tags
were listed one after the other at the uppermost position. Many of these
entries originated from the connections that were assigned to a part.
To give a clearer arrangement to the 2D panel layout navigator, all parts
from connections are now automatically and permanently filtered out.
These parts are not required for panel layout.
In the identifier-based view, all devices without a DT are sorted into the
Without DT tree structure level. This behavior is similar to the display of
devices without DT in other navigator dialogs.
Benefit: The clearer view makes it easier for you to use the 2D panel
layout navigator.
308
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If a device has multiple parts, in the identifier-based view these parts are
no longer sorted into alphabetical order in the tree under the relevant
device tag, but are arranged in the order in which they occur in the properties dialog on the Parts tab. Terminals and strip accessories, on the
other hand, are displayed in the type of order in which they appear in the
Edit terminal strip dialog.
Note:
The same behavior as that described here applies for the 3D mounting
layout navigator of the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on.
Placing terminal strips on the mounting panel

It is now possible in EPLAN to place terminal strips on a mounting panel
and then represent them in the enclosure legend.
The placement of items on a mounting panel occurs in the 2D panel
layout navigator, for example, via Popup menu > Place on mounting
panel. In a case like this, if you place the unplaced parts of a terminal
strip, then provided a part has yet to be placed for this terminal strip, a
new prompt will now be displayed. Use this prompt to decide whether the
complete terminal strip should be placed.
Answer [Yes] to this prompt, and you can then place the complete
terminal strip. All the terminals of the terminal strip will be marked as
placed in the 2D panel layout navigator tree by a green check mark. The
terminal widths stored in the parts management module are added to
determine the dimensions of the terminal strip on the mounting panel.
The maximum height stored for the terminal parts is used as the height
of the new part placement.
If you click [No] in the prompt, you can then place the terminals individually, as before.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
309
The part placement properties dialog for a terminal strip differs from the
properties dialogs of placed terminals. To identify that this part placement represents the entire terminal strip, no part number is entered on
the Part placement tab in the Part field. All the terminals of the terminal
strip are then regarded internally as placed. This properties dialog also
has the appropriate function definition ("Part placement, terminal strip").
When an enclosure legend is subsequently generated (or updated), the
placed terminal strips are also listed in the relevant legend.
Displaying the handles of part placements

Since EPLAN Version 1.9 International SP 1, the position of the part
placement handle has been evaluated instead of the insertion point,
when numbering the legend items of mounting panels.
Should the handles of part placements be displayed, select the View >
Insertion points menu items. If the position of a handle differs from the
insertion point, the handle is now also displayed for the part placement
(circle with a diagonal cross ). The position of the handle when placing
the part can be influenced using the Settings: 2D panel layout dialog.
Note:
If you place items on a DIN rail, you should always use the "Middle left"
setting for the handle position, so that the legend items are numbered
continuously.
310
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Same legend item for identical devices

When editing legend items, you now have the opportunity to assign the
same legend item to identical devices, for which the same part number
has been entered.
To do this, in the 2D panel layout navigator, for example, select the
Popup menu > Edit legend item menu item for a marked mounting
panel and then click [Number]. In the Number dialog, you now have the
new Same number for identical devices check box available. Select
this check box, if identical devices are to be given the same legend item.
This is particularly important for the GOST standard.
Settings
New action for importing settings
The new "Import settings" action (action name XSettingsImport) is
now available to you in EPLAN. You can use this action to automatically
import the settings that have previously been exported as an XML file.
Benefit: These settings allow you to greatly influence the behavior of
the EPLAN platform. It is now an automated process to exchange these settings. Manual input is no longer required,
which saves you time when standardizing projects or workstations. A common and consistent standard ensures highquality planning and makes it easier to implement the
documentation requirements of the machinery directive.
For automated execution, you have to use the Customize dialog to
store the action as a button in a user-defined toolbar, or enter it using
a different command line call (such as the Windows Run dialog). With
command line input, the following command line parameters can be
specified:
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
311
/XMLFile:
directory and name of the file to be imported (necessary).
/node:
"node" of the setting to be imported (optional).
/Project:
name of the target project (optional). If a project is specified, only the
project settings are imported.
Importing all user, workstation, and company settings
If only the XMLFile command line parameter is listed, all the existing
user, workstation, and company settings will be imported from the
specified file (e.g. XSettingsImport /XMLFile: C:\file.xml).
Importing all project settings
If in addition to XMLFile, the Project parameter is also listed in the
command line, only the existing project settings will be imported from the
specified file (e.g. XSettingsImport /XMLFile:C:\projectsettings.xml /Project:C:\...\EPLAN-DEMO.elk).
Importing settings for a dialog
If you only want to import the settings for a quite specific dialog, you
must use the node parameter to specify the "node" under which the
settings are to be imported. This can be both a dialog from the project
settings and a dialog from the other settings areas.
To find out the name of the node, you can open the previously exported
xml file in Internet Explorer, for example, and transfer the name of the
node from the <MOD name="..."> entry.
312
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
You want to import the settings of the Settings: Print dialog from
another user. By default, the name of the exported xml file is Workstation+Graphical Editing+Print.xml. From this file, under the
<CAT name="STATION"> category, you take the name of the node
<MOD name="Print">.
A possible entry in the command line of the Set button dialog for transferring settings could then look like this:
XSettingsImport /XMLFile:C:TMP\Workstation+Graphical
Editing+Print.xml /node:Print
Preceding sign for interruption point names

For interruption points, you can now also specify whether a preceding
sign is automatically set in the interruption point name when interruption
points are used.
The new Interruption points check box has been added to the Settings: DT dialog in the Set preceding sign group box for this purpose.
This check box is deselected by default (under Options > Settings >
Projects > "Project name" > Devices > DT). In this case, the interruption point name is not given a preceding sign when the interruption point
is used.
Note:
The settings for Set preceding sign were previously under Options >
Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > General. For
reasons of space, these settings and the Conversion to uppercase and
Hide brackets in DT check boxes were moved to the new Settings: DT
dialog.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
313
New settings for displayed units of measure

A new dialog for displayed units of measure is available to you in the
user-specific settings. As well as the familiar Displayed unit of length,
you now also have the opportunity here to specify the Displayed unit of
weight. Use the Options > Settings > User > Display > Displayed
units of measure menu path to access these settings in the program.
Benefit: You can use this functionality to specify the weight of a part
either in kilograms or in pounds.
The two options mm and Inch of the Displayed unit of length group
box were previously in the Settings: User interface dialog, and have
been moved here for the sake of clarity.
314
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
You use the options in the new Displayed unit of weight group box to
decide whether the weight of a part is evaluated in "kg" or "lb" (pound) in
parts management. This means that an existing weight will be converted
in accordance with the displayed unit of measure.
Tip:
If, when weight values are output in reports, the set unit of measure is to
be output with them (in a parts list, for example), this can be done using
the new Weight in displayed unit <22059> property.
Renamed settings for graphical editing

In the user-specific settings for graphical editing (under Options >
Settings > User > Graphical editing) you make the settings for cursor
display, for scroll behavior or color settings, for example. The settings
dialog has been renamed, to more clearly differentiate these settings
from the similar settings for the 3D view of the "EPLAN Pro Panel" addon.
Old name:
New name:
Settings: General
Settings: 2D
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
315
Properties
User-defined property configurations
Wherever properties are listed in a table for an object (project, page,
device properties, etc.), you now have the opportunity to create separate
property categories. Properties from different groups can be combined in
this way and saved in a user-defined property configuration.
Benefit: By individually customizing the user interface, you can
access the input fields that are important to you more quickly.
You can save a selection of properties that you have compiled as a configuration, and make it available to other projects or other users.
To create a user-defined property configuration, you must select the
"User-defined" entry for the Category field in the relevant properties
dialog. Then select Popup menu > Configure.
The Property configuration dialog that then opens has been extended
by the familiar Scheme and Description fields for the user-defined property configuration. You can use the scheme toolbar that is now also in
the dialog to create a new scheme, for example, or to export / import the
scheme of a property configuration. Properties from all categories are
available to you in the property selection for user-defined property configurations.
The name of a saved, user-defined property configuration is then displayed in the Category field.
316
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Renamed project property

As the term "drawing number" applies to a page, the project property
Drawing number <10013> has been renamed Job number <10013>.
The page property Drawing number <11030> is unchanged.
Old name:
New name:
Drawing number <10013>
Job number <10013>
New properties for device tags

Now available in EPLAN are several new properties for device tags,
where the preceding sign is also included in the specification. This
affects the following properties:
DT (superior, without project structures, with preceding sign)
<20211>
DT (subordinate, without project structures, with preceding sign)
<20212>
DT (full, without project structures, with preceding sign)
<20213>
DT (identifying, without project structures, with preceding sign)
<20215>.
Example:
You have inserted the DT (subordinate, without project structures,
with preceding sign) property in a form as a placeholder text. For the
device tag =A+O-U1-K1, in a case like this, -K1 is output when
generating a relevant report.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
317
Other New Features in Utilities

Extensions for automated editing
Exporting and importing scripts
In the new version, you now also have the opportunity to export and / or
import scripts for automated processing of project actions.
Benefit: This allows you to transfer scripts for automated processing
from one project to another. Once defined, the scripts can
be exchanged within a planning group, as well as between
different companies. Define a common standard, and use
automated processing to optimize the planning of all those
participating in the project.
Available to you for this purpose in the Settings: Automated processing dialog, in the toolbar next to the Script name drop-down list, are the
two familiar buttons:
(Export) and
(Import). One possible menu
path to this dialog is: Utilities > Automated processing > Settings.
Automated PDF export
Another new feature is that now, with automated processing, you can
also automatically output projects as a PDF. The new "Export PDF"
action is available to you in the Settings: Automated processing dialog
for this purpose. If you use the
button to move this action for a script
to the Selected actions list, the familiar PDF export dialog opens (see
page 192). You can use this dialog to make the settings for automated
PDF file output.
318
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Improved registration for add-ons

The registration of add-ons, such as the EPLAN Data Portal, has
been simplified for the EPLAN platform. The Add-ons dialog, which is
accessed via the Utilities > Add-ons menu path, has been redesigned.
In addition to this, when you uninstall an add-on, registration is now automatically deleted.
Benefit: Install.xml no longer has to be found when re-registering
a module. When you uninstall an add-on, the removal sequence is now no longer an issue.
When you start the program, all the possible add-ons that can be
registered are listed in the Add-ons dialog:
For add-ons that match the product variant (down to the version
number) and which have automated registration available, the new
Registered check box is selected. This means that the functionalities
of these modules are available to you in EPLAN.
Add-ons that match the product variant, but which are not automatically registered, are also listed. For these modules, the Registered
check box is not selected. If these modules are also to be registered,
select the corresponding check boxes. Registration then takes place
when you exit the dialog with [OK].
Note:
Please note that all add-ons are installed with absolute paths. For that
reason it is not possible to install an add-on in a net.
Unregister
To unregister an add-on, deselect the Registered check box and close
the Add-ons dialog with [OK].
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
319
However, the module will still be listed in the dialog. If you want to use
the add-on again, you have to re-open the dialog and select the check
box.
Finding other add-ons
In the Add-ons dialog, you now have the
button available for finding
other add-ons (manually created modules or modules that match older
main versions). In the next dialog, select the associated Install.xml,
and click [Open]. The corresponding add-on (such as the "PPEAddon"
of Version 1.9.10), will then be listed in the dialog, and can be registered
by using the check box mentioned above.
These new add-ons can also be removed. To do this, you first have to
deselect the Registered check box for this module. Then, to remove the
module from the Add-ons dialog, click .
Automated unregistering when uninstalling
If you have uninstalled an add-on, its registration in the EPLAN platform
is automatically deleted the next time you start the program. The relevant
information is given to you in the system messages. The mandatory
uninstall sequence for add-ons, of first unregistering and then uninstalling the module, no longer applies.
Improved display of system messages

The system messages dialog (under Utilities > System messages) now
has an additional text field available, that cannot be edited. If you select
a message, the full description text is displayed in this field, below the list
with the system messages. If you have selected a message that has
other, subordinate messages, the display also includes the descriptions
of these associated, subordinate messages.
Benefit: It is no longer necessary to change the size of the columns
or maximize the system messages dialog, as the description
text is fully legible immediately.
320
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Licensing
Extensions to EPLAN License Manager
With the release of the new platform version, EPLAN has also made
available a new version of the EPLAN License Manager (ELM). This program allows you to manage EPLAN product licenses within a network.
Various new functionalities make network license administration easier
for you.
An overview of the main new features of the EPLAN License Manager:
Usage of "variable bundles":
When combining licenses in bundles, the licenses can now also be
defined as "variable bundles". License bundles of this type allow you
to create templates for specific license combinations in any number,
regardless of the actual number of available licenses.
The license elements contained in this combination are only assigned
in the EPLAN License Manager when a "variable bundle" is selected
on program start.
Event log for network licenses:
The "License Manager Monitor" now gives you the opportunity to
create a report about the license status of an EPLAN License
Manager. You use a configuration file to specify everything that is to
be logged. The log itself is created as an XML file.
This shows who has been using or borrowing which license, and
when. This allows you to see how the licenses are utilized, for
example.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
321
Borrowing licenses using command line parameters:

It is now possible to use command line parameters to borrow network
licenses. The settings for borrowing are transferred as a configuration
file (borrow.cfg). The EPLAN platform start could look like this, for
example:
W3u.EXE /license: \borrow.cfg
Borrowing network licenses offline:

It is now also possible to borrow a network license when the user's
computer is not connected to the internal network. To do this, the
user uses the Select license dialog to create a request file with their
computer data, which is then sent to the EPLAN License Manager
administrator by e-mail, for example. The administrator runs the borrowing process with the data that has been sent, creates a response
file, and returns the borrowed license bundle to the user, who can
then use it to start EPLAN.
Rights management:
Rights management has now been added to the EPLAN License
Manager configuration program. This makes it possible to define who
can use or borrow the licenses contained in each bundle. Rights
management can now be used to specify user rights for individual
users and user groups.
Cross-domain usage:
By default, a license client can access the EPLAN License Manager
using the rights of the logged-on user. When the cross-domain usage
function is activated, a separate user account can be specified, for
access to the license manager.
This procedure not only allows access to the EPLAN License
Manager in networks with several independent domains, it also makes
operation easier in environments that do not have Windows domains
(working groups, Novell).
322
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Failure protection:
To improve failure protection (failover), it is now also possible to install
two license managers. One of these is the active EPLAN License
Manager (Primary License Manager). This is where the licenses are
validated, and the software protection (dongle) is also connected
here.
Should the first license manager fail, a second, and previously inactive EPLAN License Manager (Standby License Manager) takes on its
function for a maximum of seven days, and makes the licenses available. As soon as the first license manager is available again, the other
one goes back to being inactive. You do not have to exit the EPLAN
application to switch between the two license managers.
Note:
Please note that the Event log, Rights management, Cross-domain
usage, and Failure protection functionalities must be licensed separately for the EPLAN License Manager.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
323
Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8

Terminals / Plugs
Terminal / pin and connection point descriptions
Plugs and terminals now feature an additional new property, namely Terminal / pin description <20225>. This new property is made available
wherever the Terminal / pin designation property can be selected
(filters, reports, etc.).
For this purpose you are offered the new Description field on the Terminal and Pin tabs in the properties dialog. In addition, the Connection
point description field has been added to the properties dialog for terminals and pins.
Benefit: In addition to the connection point designations, you can now
also specify the connection point descriptions for plugs. This
considerably improves the legibility of the plan for the engineer and saves needing to search other sources for the
information.
Example:
RJ45 plug assignment according to the EIA/TIA-568B standard for
Ethernet 1000:
Connection point designation
Connection point description
D1+
D1-
D2+
D3+
D3-
D2-
324
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Connection point designation
Connection point description
D4+
D4-
Extension of the function templates

To also take account of the Connection point description and Terminal / pin description properties during device selection and when
overlaying, the function templates in Parts management have likewise
been extended.
On the Function templates tab, the Device selection (function templates) table now has the additional column Connection point description for most product groups ("Component (general)", "Component
(relays, contactors)", "Component (PLC)", etc.).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
325
For the "Component (terminals)" and "Component (plugs)" product

groups, the additional Terminal description and Pin description
columns appear in the device selection table.
You will also be offered these properties as selection criteria in device
selection and in the device selection settings.
Displaying saddle jumpers for "Interconnect devices"

Since EPLAN version 1.9, the terminals in a terminal strip are sometimes
displayed more than once in the Interconnect devices dialog. The reason for this is that the logic model for the "Terminal, general" function
definition (and similar function definitions) has been extended from two to
four connection points. Two of these connection points are designed for
saddle jumpers. The menu path to this dialog is: Project data > Devices
> Interconnect devices.
In the new version an Include saddle jumpers check box has been
added to the Interconnect devices dialog. This enables you to control
whether or not connection points of connection point type "Saddle
jumper" should be displayed.
If the check box is selected, then connection points of connection point
type "Saddle jumper" will be shown in the table. Connection points for
automatically generated saddle jumpers will also be shown; these may
have any connection point type. In order to detect the connection point
type, in this case you should also display the property Connection point
logic: Connection point type in the table (via Popup menu > Configure columns).
The check box is deselected by default. In this case both connection
points of connection point type "Saddle jumper" and connection points
for automatically generated saddle jumpers are hidden.
326
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Displaying connection point properties

The Interconnect devices dialog has been optimized in respect to the
extensions for defining multi-line connection points (see page 98). You
can now also have the Connection point logic: External property displayed in the tables on the left and right side of the dialog for connection
points. First, the columns must be configured accordingly.
The Internal / External option fields have also been converted into a
drop-down list of the same name. In this way you can specify for the
device source and/or the device target whether only the internal, only the
external, or both types of connection points ("Internal and external") are
displayed in the respective table.
The Add insulation popup menu option is also new. Details can be
found in the section "Inserting insulated wire terminations" on page 334.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
327
New Features in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on

Note:
The "PLC & Bus Extension" is an optional add-on for EPLAN Electric P8
The "PLC & Bus Extension" add-on helps you to manage PLC controllers
and bus systems.
Configurable PLC connection points

To display PLC cards with programmable connection points in EPLAN
you can now use the new "PLC connection point, multifunction" function
definition.
Connection points with this function definition are configurable: For these
connection points the Type of signal property in the connection point
logic determines what type of connection point it is. The default setting
is "Digital input". If a signal type is selected that does not define any I/O
connection point (i.e. not "Digital input", "Digital output", "Analog input",
or "Analog output"), then the connection point is treated as a power
supply. Thus the configurable PLC connection points are not only defined by the function definition, but the signal type is also taken into
account.
If you want to use configurable PLC connection points in your project,
start by adding any PLC I/O connections to the schematic and then, on
the Symbol / function data tab in the properties dialog, select the "PLC
connection point, multifunction" function definition for these connection
points.
328
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Note:
Please note that exported PLC connection points with the "PLC connection point, multifunction" function definition are not displayed in the
Synchronize / import PLC data dialog if they are re-imported. The
PLC configuration systems assign specific connection points to these
"variable" PLC connection points, and for that reason they are not recognized as multi-function PLC connection points when re-imported.
Channels with several I/O connection points

In EPLAN a PLC channel can now contain more than one I/O connection
point. However, only one of these I/O connection points on a channel
can be active. To mark all the other I/O connection points within the
channel as disabled, you can assign them the new Deactivated I/O
connection point <20438> property.
Benefit: This means that the same macro and the same part can be
used for different wiring configurations. If you can restrict your
macro data to the bare minimum, this will reduce the overhead of macro maintenance without costing you any flexibility
in project planning.
Example:
A macro contains an analog channel with two I/O connection points to
which the Deactivated I/O connection point property is assigned. You
can use this macro with different wirings for measuring current or voltage. Once the macro has been added, activate the I/O connection point
that matches the wiring by deactivating the Deactivated I/O connection
point property there.
Deactivated connection points are treated as power supplies. For example, when addressing a filled address, the address from the channel is
overwritten.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
329
Blockwise use of existing PLC connection points and PLC boxes

In the Use existing PLC connection points blockwise dialog, the PLC
boxes can now be seen and can be selected for use.
If you have highlighted PLC connection points in the project that are in a
PLC box, these will be assigned the selected connection points when
using the existing DT. This does not change the DT of the PLC box and,
as a result, the assignment of the PLC connection points to the PLC box
is lost. If you want to retain the assignment of the PLC connection points
to the PLC box, you should again use the existing PLC box.
In the new Status column on the right-hand side, icons show you
whether the existing PLC box or connection point selected for use can
be assigned to the PLC box or connection point available in the project
in the left-hand table. The icons have the following meaning:
Icon
Meaning
Function category and PLC function group match. It can be
used.
Warning: The function category of the PLC functions
matches, but the group does not match (e.g. in the case
of a PLC connection point with digital input and a PLC
connection point for a bus cable). It can be used, but this
could lead to incorrect results.
Error: The function category of the PLC functions does not
match (e.g. in the case of a PLC box and a PLC connection
point). It cannot be used.
Interface for PLC data exchange with Rockwell

The new version introduces a new interface for PLC data exchange. This
interface allows the exchange of PLC data between EPLAN Electric P8
and the "RSLogix Architect" PLC configuration software from Rockwell
Automation.
330
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
For this purpose, both data exchange dialogs, Export PLC data and
Import PLC data, have been upgraded to include the "RSLogix Architect
3.6" format.
Simplified data display when importing PLC data

Previously, when importing PLC data all properties were displayed in the
Synchronize / import PLC data dialog. In the new version, the number
of properties displayed in the synchronization dialog has now been
significantly reduced.
Benefit: It is easier for the user to see which properties can be applied. The transparent display makes importing PLC project
planning data easier and also facilitates cross-discipline
engineering in line with PLC software development.
After you have selected a PLC object in the Master / slave or Rack /
module fields, only the relevant properties are displayed in the table on
the right-hand side, depending on the selected import file format. The
properties that are not displayed remain unchanged on import.
Example:
In import files for the "Siemens SIMATIC STEP 7 version 5.3 / 5.4"
format, the Subslot property is displayed for the PLC communication
units. In a Schneider bus configuration file this property does not occur.
Extended part allocation when exporting and importing bus

configurations
For the "PLC standard exchange format", a parts list is now exported and
imported in addition to the PLC type designation for each PLC device. If
several parts have been entered for a PLC box (at the main function),
these are exported and reassigned when the PLC box is imported.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
331
Cables
Highlighting cable connections
Cable connections can now be highlighted in EPLAN, by a special color,
for example. For this purpose, the EPLAN550, Symbol graphic.Connection symbols.Autoconnecting.Cables layer has been added to
layer management.
Benefit: Using color highlighting means that cable connections can be
traced easily and reliably through the project. Greater transparency in documentation avoids planning errors, increasing
quality without any additional input in terms of time and effort.
As the properties of this layer defined in layer management are used for
the cable connection autoconnecting lines, a special setting must be
specified. To do so, select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project
name" > Devices > Cables (conductors) in the menu, go to the
General tab and in the Representation of the autoconnecting line
group box select the Cable-based option.
Note:
If you select cable-based representation of the autoconnecting line, the
highlighted setting for the cable connections in layer management always takes precedence over a setting to the connection graphic via a
potential definition point. If a setting is specified on a connection via a
connection definition point, this setting takes precedence over the Cablebased option.
332
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Ignoring subordinate DTs for nested targets

In the project-specific cable settings in Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name" > Devices > Cables, the new Ignore subordinate DTs
for nested targets setting can now be seen.
This setting affects both the cable numbering and the automatic generation of cables as well as the output of cables in reports.
Benefit: This option allows you to change the operation mode of
EPLAN to the main or subordinate device depending on your
requirements. Reports and automatic functions are also available that immediately show the view that you are used to
working with.
If the check box is activated, the subordinate device tags are not output
as cable targets in the case of nested devices. In this case the superior
devices (for example the black boxes) are the targets. The representation of the conductor targets is not changed. The subordinate device tags
are always output as targets here.
If the check box is deselected, the subordinate device tags are output as
cable targets.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
333
Inserting insulated wire terminations

In EPLAN, you now have the opportunity to use a special symbol for
insulated wire terminations, such as the conductors of a cable connected
on one side.
Symbols for wire terminations
To insert a corresponding symbol in the graphical editor, in the Symbol
selection dialog, choose a symbol for insulated wire terminations (either
NCI // 100 // Wire termination, insulated or NC // 101 //
Wire termination, not connected). These symbols belong to the
SPECIAL symbol library. They can be found under General special
functions in the new Insulated wire termination function
category.
For this purpose, the new Insulated wire termination function
category has been added to the function definitions under General //
General special functions. Functions with a function definition only
have one connection point and this connection is terminated by the
corresponding function.
Properties dialog for wire terminations
When you have placed the symbol in the required variant, the properties
dialog opens. On the new Insulated wire termination tab, enter the
displayed DT of the device at which the connection terminates. For this
component too, use the [...] button to open the DT selection dialog
where the required DT can be imported.
334
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
If the device to which the insulated wire termination is assigned is renamed, the device tag on the wire termination is automatically updated
accordingly.
Displaying wire terminations in the navigators
Insulated wire terminations are shown in the navigator trees (e.g. in the
device navigator) as part of the device to which they are assigned, and
are indicated by the special icon
The Popup menu > New menu in the device navigator allows you to
create unplaced wire terminations (icon:
) and to place these in the
schematic later on or to connect them to interconnect devices as unplaced.
Example:
The figure below shows an insulated wire termination in the device
navigator:
Adding insulation for "Interconnect devices"

When generating unplaced connections between device connection
points in the Interconnect devices dialog / tab, you also have the option
to generate unplaced insulated wire terminations. To do so, use the new
Add insulation menu item in the popup menu in this dialog / tab.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
335
Then select one or more connection points in the Device source /

Device target table and choose Popup menu > Add insulation. The
Function definitions dialog then opens, in which a suitable function
definition is automatically suggested as the selected source for the
insulated wire terminations.
The Properties (components): General device dialog then opens. In
this dialog, you can edit the properties of the insulated wire termination.
The displayed DT of the insulation cannot be changed here: this was
defined when the device source was selected. When you close the properties dialog, the insulated wire termination is generated as an unplaced
function and shown in the Interconnect devices dialog as an additional
row in the table.
Other aspects of insulated wire terminations
Please also bear the following in mind in relation to insulated wire terminations:
Insulated wire terminations are not taken into account when selecting
devices and when overwriting function templates.
Device-oriented reports
In device-oriented reports (e.g. connection diagrams), the insulated
wire termination for the device to which it is assigned is not output as
a connection point. For example, if insulation is assigned to a terminal
strip, the insulated wire termination will not be listed as an additional
terminal for the terminal strip in the terminal diagram.
Connection-based reports
In connection-based reports (connection lists, cable diagrams, etc.),
insulated wire terminations are output as the target of a connection or
a cable conductor.
336
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Devices
Inserting cable parts as devices
If you now insert a cable part as a device in the graphical editor (e.g.
using Insert > Device), the individual objects will be made available for
placement in the sequence defined in parts management.
Benefit: It takes fewer steps to enter cables in the diagram as devices. This reduces the time spent on editing and the user
can concentrate on plant planning.
In the process the symbol for the cable definition line or the shield is
displayed at the cursor. At the conductors, the Color / number of the
conductors is displayed.
Note:
Shields should not be defined as separate function templates with the
"Shield, cable definition" function definition in parts management; this
should be defined implicitly via the cable conductors. If the part has a
function template with the function definition "Conductor / wire" and the
potential type "SH", a shield is generated automatically when Insert
device is used before this cable conductor is inserted.
A connection definition point is generated when a conductor is placed. If
a non-empty connection definition point already exists for the connection,
a prompt is displayed that allows you to choose to retain or replace the
connection definition point. When replaced, the old connection definition
point is deleted and a new one placed with the data from parts management.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
337
Example:
The following function templates are defined for a cable part:
Row Function definition
Color / no. ...
Potential type
Cable definition
Conductor / wire
Undefined
Conductor / wire
SH
SH
In row 3 a shielded conductor with the potential type "SH" is defined

at the same time as the shield. The shield name is taken from the Color
/ number field of this conductor.
When the device is inserted into the graphical editor, the following
objects are made available in sequence:
Object
Display at the cursor Properties
1. Cable definition
2. Conductor
3 Shield
4 Conductor
338
Color / number: 1,
Potential type: Undefined
Name of shield: SH
SH
Color / number: SH,

Potential type: SH
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Device Selection
Device selection for wires
It is now also possible to run a device selection on wire parts at a connection definition point with the suitable "Conductor / wire" function
definition. During this type of device selection, the data of the particular
wire (Color / number, Cross-section / diameter, etc.), are transferred
from parts management to the connection.
Benefit: When wires are selected from the parts database, the data is
applied directly to the diagram. This reduces the amount of
manual input and results in standardization of the wires used.
Notes:
Connection definition points placed on an autoconnecting line via
Insert > Connection definition point, show the "Connection,
general" function definition by default. To select a different function
definition for a connection definition point, in the properties dialog, on
the Connection definition point tab, click the [...] button located next
to the Function definition field. Then, in the subsequent dialog, select the "Conductor / wire" function definition.
When connection definition points have the Cable connection property activated, it is not possible to make a device selection. This is the
case, for example, with connection definition points placed on the
respective connection lines when drawing a cable definition line.
Extensions to parts management
Previous versions of EPLAN's parts management have already allowed
you to create parts belonging to the "Wires" product group. But for a
device selection to be based on these parts, the data for the wires had to
be extended.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
339
This is why the Function templates tab is now also available to the wire
parts. The following column headers are available for the "Component
(wires)" product group in the Device selection (function templates)
table:
Row
Function definition
Color / no.
Cross-section / diameter
Potential type
Intrinsically safe.
For device selection to be successful, it is essential to specify a function
template for each wire. To do this, click in the relevant cell of the
Function definition column and then click [...], to go to the Function
definitions dialog. Use General // General special functions //
Connection // Connection definition to select the "Conductor /
wire" function definition.
The Wire data tab has also been redesigned as part of these extensions. As the conductor cross-section and the color are now entered in
the function template, the fields of the same name have been removed.
To allow even more, specific data to be entered for the wires, the Conductor type, Voltage, Min. bending radius, Copper weight, Cable
weight (kg/km), and Short-circuit proof fields / check boxes have been
added.
340
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Extensions to device selection

The Wire tab has been added to the Settings: Device selection dialog,
so that selection criteria for existing function data can also be defined for
wires. The following properties can be used as the criteria for wire parts:
Color / number
Cross-section / diameter
Potential type
Intrinsically safe.
Filtering by potential type works in exactly the same way as for cables. If
the Potential type check box is selected as the selection criterion, then
device selection does not check the potential type at the connection
definition point, but at the associated connection.
If the conductors / wires have potential type "PE" or "SH", only parts with
the matching potential type (that is, "PE" or "SH") are offered. If a conductor / wire has a different potential type (such as "N"), the device
selection Main parts list will also include parts with other potential types
(such as "L", "N", etc.).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
341
Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel

The following sections contain further information about the functions of
the new "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on. Here is an overview of the topics:
Navigators for the 3D mounting layout (see page 342)
Creating and opening layout spaces (see page 348)
Placing mounting panels and enclosures in the layout space (see
page 349)
Placing components on mounting surfaces (see page 354)
Changing the 3D view of a layout space (see page 359)
Editing objects in the layout space (see page 363)
Macros for the 3D mounting layout (see page 370)
Editing the device logic of 3D objects (see page 374)
Inserting and updating model views (see page 378)
Creating and editing outlines for extrusions (see page 381)
Device structure for mechanical devices (see page 384)
Online numbering for mechanical devices (see page 385).
Navigators for the 3D Mounting Layout

Logical structure in the layout space navigator
The layout space navigator maps the logical structure of the placed part.
There are hierarchical dependencies between all the items. If a superior
item (such as a mounting rail) is moved or deleted, the devices that are
placed on it will be moved or deleted as well. This logical structure can
also be included in reports.
342
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The layout space

As well as the logical structure display, there is also a graphical 3D display area that shows the placed device. This display is independent of
any project page. The 3D model is displayed in a layout space that
allows the 3D objects and their editing to be viewed.
It is therefore a basic requirement for working with 3D components that a
layout space be first created in the layout space navigator. This is the
environment / workspace for the 3D data and the functional logic that
connects it.
The layout space shows a 3D view of the 3D model with shading (body
surfaces filled with color and shaded differently according to the angle).
Devices displayed in the layout space navigator

The layout space navigator displays all devices that exist in the layout
spaces of the opened project.
The new Layout space menu option is provided on the menu bar for
calling the navigator and creating layout spaces. Simply select Layout
space > Navigator to open the layout space navigator.
Tree view
The layout spaces form the top hierarchical level in the tree. Beneath a
layout space, the devices it contains are arranged in hierarchical order:
Starting from the mounting panel or the superior enclosure, all devices
are displayed beneath the item on which they are placed.
You can modify the way the tree is displayed by selecting Popup menu
> View and selecting one or more configurations from the menu that appears. The default setting is Item designation in which the item designation is displayed with the grouping sign. The grouping sign is always
displayed first, regardless of which view is selected.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
343
If you have placed a mounting panel in the layout space, for example,
the grouping sign "MP<mounting panel number>" is inherited by all the
items arranged beneath it and is prefixed before their designation text.
This ensures that it is always clear which part placement belongs to
which mounting panel or enclosure in the navigator tree.
Example:
The illustration below shows an open project with multiple layout spaces
in the layout space navigator tree (left) and an open layout space in the
3D view (right).
In the layout space navigator's tree view, different icons illustrate the
types of component and their status:
Icon
Icon
Meaning
Layout space
Shown
Hidden
Enclosure
Frame profile
344
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Icon
Icon
Meaning
Wall panel
Door
Mounting panel
Mounting rail
Wire duct
Part placement
Restricted placing area
Not selected
Selected directly
Mounting surface
List view
This display shows all devices that exist in the layout spaces of the
opened project. The view and sorting of the devices depends on the
selected column configuration.
Popup menu
The popup menu for the layout space navigator contains menu options
that are used specially to create and display layout spaces (e.g., New
layout space, Open layout space, etc.). It also contains other functions
for editing in the 3D area, such as Update main elements, Update part
dimensions, etc.
Project structure in the 3D mounting layout navigator

The 3D mounting layout navigator is used to list the devices available in
the project so that they can be placed in a layout space.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
345
To open this new dialog, follow the menu path Project data > Parts /
Devices > 3D mounting layout navigator. This has the following
options:
All devices to which a part is assigned are listed.
The view in the 3D mounting layout navigator is always identifierbased.
Parts without a device tag are grouped on a separate tree structure
level.
Devices that have already been placed are identified by an additional
icon.
Multiple entries may be selected in both the tree view and the list view.
These selected devices can then be placed on the mounting panel at the
same time. It is also possible to select a node in the tree view. All devices that are affected by this selection are placed together.
Filters in the navigators

As is normally the case in the other navigators, in the layout space or 3D
mounting layout navigator you have the option of limiting the quantity of
data displayed by using a filter.
To filter by unplaced parts in the 3D mounting layout navigator, the
criteria selection dialog includes the new Number of units / quantity
(unplaced, 3D) <20509> property. In the criteria selection dialog for this
navigator you can otherwise select project properties and / or grouping
elements as filter criteria for function definitions (function definition,
function group, etc.).
Quick input filtering
These navigators also have a new field Value: <Property> beneath the
filter. You can use quick input in this field to quickly modify the value of a
filter criterion for a defined and selected filter.
346
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
To do this, a new Quick input column has been added to the Filter
dialog, which you can open by clicking the [...] button and use to define
the filter criteria. The Quick input check box can only be selected for
one filter criterion. This then activates the Value: <Property> field for the
relevant navigator. For a value entered in the Value: <Property> field to
be taken into account, the filter must be activated by selecting the Active
check box.
Value: <Property>:
To enter a new value in this field, click in the field, type in the value, and
press [Enter]. The display in the navigator changes accordingly. The
value entered here is then accepted as the value of the filter criterion in
the filter scheme.
Depending on which property you selected as the criterion (e.g., structure identifier), you can click [...] in the Value: <Property> field and
select a different value for the filter criterion from the dialog that opens.
To enter multiple values in the field, add a semicolon as a separator
between the values. This is evaluated as an OR operation.
If quick input is not selected for any filter criterion in the Filter dialog,
quick input cannot be used in that navigator. The Value: <Property>
field is grayed out.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
347
Creating and Opening a Layout Space

Creating a layout space
Select Layout space > New to create a layout space in an open project.
The Properties (components): Layout space dialog opens.
If necessary, change the layout space name suggested in the Name

field. Click [...] to open the Structure identifier of layout space dialog
for editing the structure identifier. Enter a descriptive text in the Description field; this is also displayed in the 3D mounting layout navigator tree
view. Click [OK] to close the properties dialog and open the new layout
space in the graphical editor.
348
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Delete layout space

You can delete a layout space selected in the layout space navigator by
selecting Popup menu > Delete in the navigator dialog.
Opening a layout space
Select the layout space in the layout space navigator, then select Layout
space > Open. The selected layout space is opened for further editing
and is displayed in the isometric 3D view to southeast by default. If a
layout space was already selected, it is closed and no longer displayed.
To open a layout space in another, separate 3D view window, select the
Open layout space in new window menu option from the popup menu.
Close layout space
To close the 3D view of an open layout space, select the associated
layout space description in the layout space navigator, then select
Layout space > Close.
Otherwise the 3D view behaves just like another window in the graphical
editor and can be closed by pressing the shortcut key [Ctrl] + [F4].
Placing Mounting Panels and Enclosures

Placing mounting panels
To place a mounting panel in an open layout space, select the Insert >
Mounting panel menu option. The "Mounting panels" product subgroup
is displayed directly in the "Mechanics" generic product group in the Part
selection dialog that opens. Select a mounting panel part and click
[OK].
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
349
Tip:
You can also use the Pro Panel toolbar to place mounting panels, enclosures, mounting rails, and wire ducts. Click the
(Mounting panel)
button, for example, to switch to part selection, where you can select a
mounting panel part.
The mounting panel hangs on the cursor as a transparent preview. The
size is as defined for the part. The four possible handles are marked by
gray squares. The current handle is displayed in red at the bottom left.
Click the [A] button to change the handle clockwise from the "Bottom
left" position to "Top left", "Top right", "Bottom right".
Select Popup menu > Placement options to call up the Placement
options dialog. This dialog allows you to set the options for the placement of parts in the 3D mounting layout.
Left-click to place the mounting panel at the required position. The
selected part remains at the cursor and can be placed again.
If you want to place the mounting panel in an enclosure or on a second
mounting panel, move the mounting panel to the vicinity of a corner point
of the second mounting panel or an enclosure profile. A red 3D snap
point symbol then appears at the corner point. The mounting panel to be
placed snaps in at this point. Click to place it directly at this position.
350
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
In this example, a mounting panel is connected to a mounting panel that
is already placed. The red rectangle illustrates the snap point.
Placing free mounting panels

For quick and easy design and configuration, it is possible to place an
individual mounting panel in the layout space without surrounding enclosure profiles and without selecting from parts management. The free
mounting panel has the same properties and editing options as the
mounting panel associated with a specific part. The device selection
allows the mounting panel to be retrospectively assigned a part.
When you select the Insert > Free mounting panel menu option, the
Properties (components): Mounting panel dialog opens.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
351
On the Mounting panel tab, enter values for the width, height, and depth
of the free mounting panel, or accept the suggested values. The dimensions must not be left blank, otherwise the free mounting panel cannot
be placed. Enter a designation text in the Designation field, or accept
the suggested "Mounting panel".
Click [OK] to close the properties dialog. The free mounting panel then
hangs on the cursor in the defined size as a transparent preview and you
can place it in the 3D view. In all other respects this placement operation
is the same as for placing enclosures and mounting panels from parts
management.
Placing enclosures with mounting panels

The EPLAN parts management contains various predefined series of
enclosures; you can select enclosures from them to be placed. Some of
these enclosures (e.g., from the TS 8 series) already have a predefined
mounting panel and one or two doors.
Mechanical components (mounting rails, wire ducts, etc.) and devices
may be placed on the mounting panels and on the doors.
When Insert > Enclosure is used to place enclosures, the part selection
dialog is again opened with a filter set automatically. This ensures that
you only see parts from the "Enclosure" product group.
When you have selected the required enclosure part, the enclosure
hangs on the cursor as a detailed preview with the height, width, and
depth defined for the part. The currently selected handle is displayed in
red, and is also identified by a red square as a snap point. Click [A] to
change the handle. Every time you click the [A] button, the handle
changes clockwise from the "Back left" position to "Back right", "Front
right", "Front left".
352
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
The illustration below shows how to change the handle for an enclosure.
Select Popup menu > Placement options to call up the Placement

options dialog. Here you can define an offset between the handle and
the cursor position, and enter spacings for arranging multiple enclosures
in series.
Left-click to place the enclosure at the required position. When you insert
it, the enclosure in the layout space navigator automatically receives its
grouping sign "S<Enclosure number>", and this identifier is inherited by
all individual components of the enclosure and all components placed in
it.
All enclosure add-on parts placed with the enclosure are grouped logically. When you move an enclosure or an enclosure add-on part, all the
components placed on it are moved as well. The selected part can be
placed multiple times; it remains on the cursor until you cancel the
action.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
353
Tip:
You can also use the Options > Placement options menu option or the
(Placement options) button from the Pro Panel options toolbar to
open the Placement options dialog.
Placing Components on Mounting Panels or Mounting

Surfaces
Once you have added mounting panels or enclosures to your layout
space, you can insert various mechanical components, such as mounting rails, wire ducts, etc. These components are normally placed on
mounting panels or on the mounting surfaces of enclosure profiles.
To place devices correctly on mounting panels, mounting rails, doors,
walls, etc., the required mounting surface or item must be identified for
placement. The Layout space - <Project name> navigator dialog
contains the following options for this:
Activate mounting surfaces automatically
Suitable for all surfaces and items that are not covered by other
components.
Activate mounting surfaces directly
Suitable for accessing the mounting surfaces of covered components
or components that are at the back. This is not possible in the graphical display without hiding the components that are covering other
components. The viewpoint is toggled to the front view. All components that are not involved are hidden.
354
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Activating mounting surfaces / items automatically

If you want to activate an item or mounting panel automatically, first
select the required component in the layout space navigator's tree view.
Select Popup menu > Go to (graphic). The selected item and the components arranged on it are then displayed.
Now select a device or a mechanical component for placement (e.g.,
Insert > Mounting rail). When you have selected the required part,
move the cursor over the surface to be activated or over an item placed
on it. The surface or item beneath the cursor is highlighted in color.
Once you have found the surface or item onto which you want to place
the component, hold the cursor still for around 1 second without clicking
or keyboard input. The surface or item beneath the cursor changes color.
The surface or item has been activated. It is now only possible to move
the cursor on the activated surface.
Move the cursor to the required position, and left-click once to place a
device. When you insert a mechanical component, left-click twice to
define the start and end points of this component on the mounting
surface.
To activate another surface or item, select Popup menu > Go to
(graphic) again in the navigator and repeat the operation described
above.
Activating mounting surfaces directly

For direct activation, first select the required mounting surface in the layout space navigator tree, then select Popup menu > Activate directly.
The selected mounting surface and the components arranged on it are
then displayed in the front view. All other components contained in the
layout space are hidden. A grid is displayed on the mounting surface.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
355
The hidden components and activated mounting surfaces are identified

by special icons in the layout space navigator (e.g. hidden mounting
panel: ; activated mounting surface: ).
Now select a device or a mechanical component for placement (e.g.,
Insert > Mounting rail). It is now only possible to move on the activated
surface. Then place the required device or mechanical component.
To activate another mounting surface, select Popup menu > Activate
directly again in the navigator.
Cancel direct activation
To release the directly activated mounting surface once more, select the
Popup menu > Cancel direct activation menu option in the navigator.
You can now work with automatic activation once more.
Placing mounting rails and wire ducts

Mounting rails and wire ducts are normally placed on mounting panels or
on the mounting surfaces of enclosure profiles.
To place them, select a suitable option from the Insert menu (such as
Insert > Mounting rail). The correct tree structure level will then appear
directly in the opened part selection. When you have selected the part,
you will once again be able to change the handle on the component in
the preview by pressing [A]. You can also access the placement options
from the popup menu when placing these mechanical components.
Mounting rails and wire ducts can be inserted in two different ways that
differ in terms of the method used to specify the length:
Length variable for placement
This is done by entering the start and end points; the length is defined
by the distance between the two points. The points / length can be
defined by left-clicking or by entering the data in the input box.
356
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Placement with accepted length

This is done by accepting the length of an item that has already been
placed. To do this, select the part, then select the Adopt length
option from the popup menu, and then click another mechanical
component that has already been placed. The new component to be
placed adopts the length of the component you clicked and hangs on
the cursor. It should only move with the cursor in parallel to the item
you clicked, and can then be placed by left-clicking, for example.
With this method, the component can also be automatically positioned
centered between two items that have already been placed. Once you
have adopted the length, select Popup menu > Place centered and
then left-click a second wire duct or mounting rail.
Inserting devices as defined devices

As in the EPLAN platform, devices can be inserted as defined devices in
the normal way. This can be done as follows in an open layout space:
via the Insert > Device menu path
via the Popup menu > New device or Popup menu > Place menu
paths in the 3D mounting layout navigator
using drag & drop from the device list
using drag & drop from the navigators (such as the device or part
master data navigator).
Note:
Mechanical devices (enclosures, mounting rails, etc.) are not displayed
in the device navigator. For this reason, it is also not possible to create
such a device as a defined device via Popup menu > New device in the
device navigator.
A defined device can only be inserted if either the device-specific dimensions (width, height, depth) or a macro is stored for the selected part. If
this is not the case, then an appropriate message is displayed.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
357
In parts management, the Mounting data tab contains the Width,

Height, and Depth fields and the Technical data tab contains the
Macro field for updating this data.
If the conditions are fulfilled, the defined device hangs on the cursor as a
preview, and you can place it on mounting surfaces or mechanical components in the 3D view. The automatic activation or direct activation
options help with accurate placement. The defined device's handle can
be switched using the [A] key before placement. If the device concerned
has already been placed in a layout space within the project, a prompt
will appear to this effect. Click [Yes] to place the device again.
Defining locked areas

Mounting surfaces can be locked for positioning so that no part placement can occur on these areas. This may be necessary if holes are to be
subsequently drilled at these points or if the space is needed for devices
that are mounted from other sides. This applies to cooling attachments
that protrude from above into the enclosure, for example, or to monitors
and controls on a door with a larger mounting depth. Locked areas are
independent 3D objects drawn as rectangles.
Select Insert > Area locked for placing to define a locked area in an
open layout space. Move the cursor onto the area to be locked to automatically activate it, or activate a mounting surface directly in the layout
space navigator. The automatically or directly activated mounting surface
is identified in color. Input is now only possible on this area. Draw the
rectangle representing the area locked for placing. Click again to define
the locked area.
358
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Changing the 3D View of the Layout Space

EPLAN provides the following ways to change the view of an open layout
space:
Change zoom section
This is done using the View > Window menu or by using the mouse
wheel. These familiar functions allow you to enlarge or reduce the layout space displayed in the 3D view or another component displayed
separately (mounting panel, mounting rail, etc.).
Change viewpoint or viewing angle
To do this, the View menu contains the 3D viewpoint and Rotate
viewing angle menu options.
The 3D viewpoint menu option allows you to set various orthogonal
(top, bottom, left, right, front, back) or isometric views (southwest,
southeast, northeast, northwest) for your layout space. The content
of the layout space display is refreshed according to which view is
selected.
When you select the Rotate viewing angle menu option, you can
change the viewing angle of the graphic by moving the mouse. The
content of the layout space is displayed with the selected viewing
angle until you select a different viewpoint.
Tip:
These functions can also be selected using buttons on the 3D viewpoint
toolbar. The toolbar is hidden by default.
Highlight selection
When you click a component in 3D view, this component is identified
by a red border. If you move the cursor over a component in 3D view,
this component is highlighted by a light border. This also applies when
you select a device in the layout space navigator. This makes it easier
to identify a component in 3D view.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
359
Show / hide components

Components can be shown or hidden either using the respective
options from the popup menu in the layout space navigator, or in the
3D view by using the popup menu to specifically hide individually
selected components. For more information, see the following
sections.
Simplify object display
To reduce the level of detail displayed on screen for certain placed
objects, you can use the Simplified representation option from the
layout space navigator's popup menu. For more information, see the
section with the same name on page 361.
Set colors and / or transparency
The colors and transparency level of the mechanical components and
devices can as is normally the case in EPLAN be defined once for
the entire project using the layer management settings, and then be
defined individually using the respective properties dialog. You can
also set the colors for the 3D view (e.g., for background colors) in the
user-specific settings. For more information, see the section with the
same name on page 362.
Showing / hiding components from the layout space navigator

If you have a layout space open in the layout space navigator, you can
select Popup menu > Hide to hide the selected layout space (mounting
panel or enclosure) or the components selected in the navigator. Select
Popup menu > Show > Selection to show the hidden structure once
more.
The hidden components are identified by special icons in the navigator to
help to distinguish between them (see the section "Devices displayed in
the layout space navigator" on page 343).
360
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The various submenu options on the Show popup menu option allow
you to determine which components contained in the layout space
should be displayed: Selection (all items below the selected tree structure level), All, Only mounting panels, or Only doors.
Showing / hiding individual components in the 3D view

To specifically hide individual components, first select them in the
graphic and then select the Hide option from the popup menu. This
menu option is not available if you select multiple components.
If you want to show the entire 3D model once more, left-click the mounting panel / enclosure in the 3D view and select Popup menu > Show
all.
Simplifying the object display

The Simplified representation function allows you to increase the level
of detail of the graphic in the layout space for terminal strips and / or 3D
macros.
You can define which items are to be simplified in the display using the
Apply simplified representation to group box in the Settings: 3D
dialog. To access the settings dialog, select Options > Settings > User
> Graphical editing > 3D. These settings apply to all items already
placed and to all subsequently placed items.
To simplify the way the placed parts are represented, select Popup
menu > Simplified representation in the layout space navigator.
3D macros are then represented by rectangular bodies with the same
dimensions as the previously-used items. Terminal strips are combined
into a block; the individual terminals are no longer displayed. The labeling for the individual terminals is retained.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
361
Setting colors and / or transparency

Layer management allows you to set colors and / or the transparency
of mechanical components and devices for the entire project. The "3D
graphic" hierarchical level has been added to the tree in the Layer
management dialog for this purpose.
The drop-down list in the Transparency column allows you to set a different transparency level for the various mechanical components. The
transparency can be set in 10% increments.
To set the transparency individually for a component, select this component in the layout space navigator or 3D view and select Popup menu >
Properties. Then switch to the Format tab in the properties dialog and
select a different transparency level from the drop-down list in the
Transparency field.
Changing the background colors for the 3D view
The default colors for the background to the 3D view can be set individually. To set the colors, go to the Settings: 3D dialog (under Options >
Settings > User > Graphical editing > 3D).
Shading - Background 1 / Shading - Background 2:
The fields of the Color settings group box are used to define the background colors. Click [...] to open the familiar dialog for selecting a color.
If you have selected two different colors, the background will be drawn
with a color gradient. The first color determines the starting color in the
top of the window, while the second color represents the end color in the
bottom of the window. If you have selected two identical colors, the background will be drawn with one single color.
Active mounting surface:
When activated, an individual mounting surface of a body is identified by
a color that is different to the body color. This field allows you to define
the color for the active mounting surface.
362
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Editing Objects in the Layout Space

Rotating objects about an axis
The Rotate around axis function allows you to rotate one or more
objects in the layout space around one of the preselected axes through
the centre of the body. It does not matter which viewpoint is selected for
the rotation; the object is always rotated centered around the absolute
axes. It is not possible to use an edge as an axis of rotation with this
function.
To rotate one or more objects, select the Edit > Graphic > Rotate
around axis > X-axis / Y-axis / Z-axis menu option. The shape of the
. Select the
cursor then indicates which rotation function is active
required objects by opening a frame around them with the mouse, for
example.
Then enter the angle in the input box. The input box opens, for example,
if you enter a number on the keyboard (see section "Input Box for
Editors" on page 33). The possible values for the angle may be positive
or negative.
Press [Enter] to confirm the angle you entered. The selected objects are
then rotated. The objects are deselected, but the rotation function remains active and you can select other objects to be rotated. You can use
Undo to reverse any individual rotation.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
363
Example:
90 rotation of an object about an axis, and result:
Axis
Rotation
Result
Changing the length of objects in the layout space

For mounting rails and wire ducts, the length is defined when they are
placed in the layout space. You can also change the length retrospectively in the layout space. You can lengthen or shorten these objects; it is
not possible to select multiple objects.
To change the length of placed mounting rails and wire ducts, select the
Edit > Graphic > Change length menu option. Click the object to be
changed on the end at which the change is to take place.
A red snap point then appears at the cursor at the selected end. The side
of the object that you clicked can be moved in both directions with the
cursor. The 3D snap points on the mounting panel are displayed in blue;
the snap points of other components appear when the cursor touches
them.
364
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
You can use the following input methods to determine the new length:
Change length by mouse click
To do this, move the cursor to the point at which you want to lengthen
or shorten the object. Click again to set the new end point for the
object.
Change length by snapping a projection point
Move the cursor towards one of the 3D snap points displayed or onto
the edge of a mounting panel. The cursor snaps onto the snap point it
finds or onto an edge. The red cursor snap point is surrounded by a
red square. The object representation is projected as far as the found
point, and extended or shortened until it reaches it. Click to align the
object at the projection point and display it in the new length.
Change length via the input box
Depending on the setting, the input box appears immediately when
you click the object to be extended or when you enter a number on
the keyboard.
Enter the value by which the object is to be extended or shortened in
the input box. Unsigned values or values with a "+" before them
extend the box, while values with a "-" shorten it. Press [Enter] to
display the object with the new length.
The Change length function remains active until you select Popup
menu > Cancel action.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
365
Example:
Changing the length by snapping a projection point, and the result:
After selection of the mounting rail
If you have selected a
mounting rail as the element
to be extended, the snap
point on the cursor is displayed as a red square.
Snapping a projection point

Move the cursor in the vicinity of a found snap point.
The cursor snaps onto the
snap point, and the
mounting rail display is
projected as far as the
found projection object.
366
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Result
Click to extend the mounting
rail to the found projection
point.
Measuring distances in the layout space

The Measuring function is provided to allow you to check the components mounted on mounting panels and enclosures in the layout space.
The distance from points and edges can be measured, and the measurement result is displayed in a dialog.
To measure a distance in an open layout space, first select the Layout
space > Measuring menu option. Then select the first point required or
the first edge of an object by clicking it. When the cursor touches a
measurable edge, it is highlighted. If the cursor touches a measurable
point, it is displayed as a highlighted square.
When you have selected the required second point or second edge by
clicking again, the Measuring result dialog opens. The measured points
and the end points of measured edges are displayed in the layout space.
A connecting line is drawn between the measured points.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
367
The Measuring result dialog displays the measured coordinates and

length values. The following options are available:
Elements are on the same mounting surface
If the two measured elements are placed on a single mounting surface, the coordinates and distances thus determined are related to the
zero point of this mounting surface. Distances in the Y direction (dy)
are ignored and set to "0".
If the Parallel to mounting surface check box is deselected, the Y
distances are also displayed.
Elements are not on the same mounting surface
If the two elements do not have a common mounting surface, this
option is not available for selection. The Parallel to mounting
surface check box is grayed out and deselected. In this case, the
coordinates and distances thus determined are output in relation to
the zero point of the layout space.
If you click the [Re-measure] button, the measuring results are discarded and you can start another measurement.
Example:
Measuring points and edges:
Selection
Result
Measure point (1) /

edge (2)
368
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Displaying mounting clearances

Parts management can be used to define a mounting clearance in terms
of width, height, and depth on the Mounting data tab in the part properties. This mounting clearance ensures that the permitted thermal stress
on parts placed beside or on top of one another is not exceeded.
During placement, the defined mounting clearances of parts already
placed can be shown for checking purposes. To do this, select the View
> Mounting clearances menu option. A transparent body is displayed
around the part placements that have a defined mounting clearance.
When you insert devices, you can also relate the handle of the part
underneath to the defined mounting clearance. The With regard to
mounting clearance check box is included in the placement options for
this purpose.
Example:
Mounting clearances for multiple part placements are displayed in a
section of a mounting panel.
Selection
Result
The Mounting clearances menu
option is activated
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
369
Macros for the 3D Mounting Layout

The macro technology in the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on is largely
oriented towards the normal way of working in the EPLAN platform.
The following applies to 3D macros:
3D macros are managed in a macro project.
3D macros can be created and used as window (*.ema) and / or
symbol macros (*.ems).
3D macros are always created with the "3D mounting layout" representation type. Both creating and inserting with this representation
type is only possible in a layout space.
The 3D macros can be assigned to the parts in parts management. As
a result, the part is displayed in detail and very realistically. If there is
no graphic macro for the part, the graphic is implemented as a cuboid
by entering the height, width, and depth.
If a 3D macro is assigned to an enclosure, then the graphic of the enclosure is not generated automatically during placement; in this case
the content of the graphic macro defines the graphic.
Importing a 3D graphic
You can import 3D graphic data from external CAD systems to create
your own items and 3D macros. The graphic data must be provided in
the common international STEP format (STandard for the Exchange of
Product Model Data).
To do this, open the project into which the data is to be imported and
select Layout space > Import 3D graphic. In the selection dialog that
opens, switch to the directory containing the STEP files (*.stp, *.step,
*.ste). Select the required STEP file and click [Open].
The 3D graphic data is then imported into a new layout space. The name
of the STEP file is used as the layout space description.
370
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
After being imported, the graphic data can be edited (Rotate around
axis and Unite functions) and assigned functional logic. The imported
data can then be used as enclosure items, devices, or 3D macros.
Uniting objects in the layout space

An imported 3D graphic or an open 3D macro (thus a layout space in a
macro project) may contain multiple individual bodies. The Unite function
is provided to allow you to unite all the components of the layout space
such that, when it is used, a 3D macro is handled in the same way as a
single item.
To unite individual 3D objects in an open layout space, select the Edit >
Graphic > Unite menu option. Use the mouse to drag the frame around
the desired objects. All the objects within this frame are selected. Move
the cursor over the selected objects and click the snap point intended to
represent the insertion point of the united item.
The selected insertion point is stored in a new object. If you generate a
3D macro from this object and subsequently insert this macro, then this
is the point to which the cursor is moved during insertion.
Note:
United components can only be undone immediately after the action.
United items cannot be separated again later (e.g. after insertion as a
macro).
Managing 3D macros in the macro project

You should create a separate layout space for every macro in order to
manage 3D macros in a macro project. No macro boxes are used for
this. You should therefore define the data for a macro to be generated
using the following layout space properties:
Macro: Name <11018>: Enter the file name and file type (*.ema or
*.ems) of the macro.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
371
Macro: Description <11019>: The text entered here becomes the

description text of the generated macro and is displayed in a comments field when the macro is inserted.
Macro: Version <11025>: This property is used for version control of
your macros.
Macro source / reference <11026>: Here you should enter the
source from which the macro originates.
Macro: Variant <36019>: Use the drop-down list to define the variant
for the macro to be generated.
These properties are available for a layout space in the "Macro" Category in the Properties table. If the properties are not displayed, you will
have to select them first from property selection.
When 3D macros are generated automatically from the macro project,
this data is used to generate a macro from every selected layout space.
If you would like to view each 3D macro on a page to improve the organization and clarity of your macro projects, you can place a model view on
the required page. Popup menu > Open 3D view allows you to jump
from the view into the respective layout space.
Creating 3D macros
3D macros are always created with the "3D mounting layout" representation type. You have the following options for creating 3D macros:
Manually by saving selected objects
To save specific objects in a layout space as a macro, use the Edit >
Create window macro and Edit > Create symbol macro menu
options as you would normally do in the EPLAN platform.
If the selected objects are imported 3D graphics from STEP files, it
may be necessary to prepare these graphics further (unite, create
device logic, etc.) before you can save them as 3D macros.
372
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Automatically from a macro project

Select Utilities > Generate macros > Automatically from macro
project. A 3D macro is generated from the layout spaces of a macro
project, according to the selection you made.
Automatically from imported STEP files
Utilities > Generate macros now contains a new From 3D files
menu option for this purpose. 3D window macros (STEP) are generated directly from individual or multiple *.ema files.
Inserting 3D macros
The 3D macros are inserted using the Insert > Window macro and
Insert > Symbol macro menu options as you would normally do in the
EPLAN platform. You can only place these macros in an open layout
space with the "3D mounting layout" representation type.
When you insert a 3D macro, the currently selected handle is identified
as a snap point by a red square. Press [A] to change the handle.
Move the 3D macro towards a mounting panel or another object. As
when you place devices, the mounting surface or mounting rail beneath
the cursor is automatically activated. 3D snap points are also displayed.
Click at the required position to place the 3D macro.
Changing the rotation angle when inserting 3D macros

When you insert a 3D macro, you can rotate the angle of the macro in
90 increments at the handle. Up to 40 different mounting positions can
be implemented with a single 3D macro by changing the handles. These
options also apply to devices whose parts have been assigned a 3D
macro.
To change the angle during insertion, press the [Ctrl] + [Shift] + [R] keyboard shortcut. The position of the 3D macro is rotated by 90 counterclockwise. Every time this keyboard shortcut is used, the macro is
rotated by a further 90.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
373
Tip:
You can also use the Options > Change rotation angle menu option
or the
(Change rotation angle) button from the Pro Panel options
toolbar to change the angle.
Editing the Device Logic

3D objects that are to be used as mechanical or electromechanical devices in the 3D mounting layout must have a range of properties that
allow them to be used in the mounting layout:
The objects can be placed in the layout space and on other objects.
Other objects can be placed on the 3D objects.
The placed objects fit in with the logical structure of the items.
All these properties in their entirety are known as the device logic. There
are various functions for creating and editing the device logic (see
section "Defining the device logic" on page 375).
Interactive points, lines, and areas in the device logic

The functions for defining the device logic work with interactive points,
lines, and areas. If necessary you can attach additional user-defined
points to 3D objects that were imported as STEP files. These interactive
points allow you to modify the placing options for components or influence the levels of freedom associated with rotation and alignment of the
components with respect to one another.
Interactive points always consist of two corresponding parts:
Handles:
Interactive points of this type look for associated mounting points.
They define points or areas which can only be moved and placed on
the corresponding mounting points.
374
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Mounting points:
These interactive points only allow the associated handle to be
snapped onto them, to be moved, and to be placed. Mounting points
may be points, lines, or areas.
You can display defined interactive points when you are editing 3D macros in a macro project. There the points are identified with the following
colors:
Interactive points
Display
Handle (user-defined)
Orange cuboid
Handle (default)
Red cuboid
Mounting point (user-defined)
Green cuboid
Mounting point (default)
Blue cuboid
You can define mounting points when you edit the device logic. This involves defining points, lines, or areas on 3D objects as mounting points.
These are the objects on which other components can be placed.
Mounting points can have a direction and a rotation, which means that
placement of the 3D objects can be controlled using a set of rules:
The direction determines the direction in which the object to be placed
on the mounting point should be aligned.
The rotation also allows the object to be placed to be moved around
the selected direction axis.
Defining the device logic

Once you have imported a logic-free 3D graphic, you may want to edit it
further. This is when you use the various functions for editing the device
logic.
To ensure correct placement it is necessary as a minimum to define a
placement area; the other logic functions are optional.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
375
The Edit > Device logic menu path offers the following options for
defining the device logic.
Mounting surface
Defines individual areas of bodies imported as 3D data as mounting
surfaces. These are areas on the item on which other components
can be placed.
When you click the required area, this area is defined as a mounting
surface. A mounting surface entry is generated beneath the object
concerned (e.g., logic item) in the layout space navigator. You can
continue to select areas as mounting surfaces until you press [Esc] to
cancel the action. You can delete mounting surfaces in the navigator
using Popup menu > Delete.
Handle
Defines a handle for placing a 3D macro. There is always only one
handle in the macro.
Click the required point. The handle is identified by an orange cuboid.
To change the position of the handle, simply insert it again.
Define mounting point
Defines points, lines, or areas on 3D objects as mounting points.
Other components may be placed on these interactive points.
To do this, click a highlighted point / edge / area on the 3D object. For
mounting points of the type "Point" and "Line", then select the direction in which you would prefer the mounting point to act by moving a
blue direction arrow in the required direction.
Click again to open the Properties: Mounting point dialog. Here
you can enter the Name and Description and set the Direction and
Rotation for mounting points of the type "Point" and "Line". Once you
have selected a mounting point, you can remove it using Edit >
Delete, for example.
376
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Placement area > Define

Defines an area in the 3D object that is used to place the object correctly on other 3D objects. The position of the placement area also
determines the mounting depth to which the 3D object is positioned
on a mounting surface. Nine handles are then automatically generated on the placement surface. You can use these for positioning.
When you have found the required area, simply click it. Any area that
projects beyond the limits of the selected area will appear transparent.
Handles are generated at the corners and centers of the outer edges.
Example:
The illustration shows a 3D macro with a placement area beneath the
base plate. The handles are at the corners and centers of the edges.
Placement area > Turn around / Move / Rotate

You can use these menu options to further correct the position of
the placement area. If the placement area is incorrectly aligned, for
example, you can turn it around using Turn around. To move or
rotate the placement area, enter the relevant values directly in the
input box.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
377
Model Views for the 3D Mounting Layout

The model views allow you to place standardized, three-dimensional
displays of a layout space or important components thereof on a project
page. Model views are used to create documentation and production
documents. Additional information for the 3D mounting layout can be
drawn on the model views using standard functions such as dimensioning, texts, graphics, etc.
A model view can be inserted in any page type. Multiple model views are
also possible on each page. Updating allows the content of the model
views to be adapted to modifications in the layout space (see page 380).
Example:
The illustration below shows the model view of a mounting panel that
was placed on the title page of a project.
378
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
So that you do not have to reset the model views in every new project,
you have the option of saving the items to be displayed in a selection
scheme. In this way you can use a scheme to specify that all mounting
panels should always be displayed in the model views, for example. The
item labeling in a model view can also be summarized using a scheme.
Inserting a model view

To place a model view on an open project page, select the Insert >
Graphic > Model view (Pro Panel) menu option. Then place the corners
of the model view by outlining an area. The Model view dialog opens.
Create the data specific to the model view on the View tab of this dialog.
For example, enter a unique name for the model view in the View name
field. You cannot have multiple views with the same name. A model view
can always be created for only one layout space. Select the layout space
for which you want to create the model view from the Layout space
drop-down list.
Define what is to be displayed in the model view in the Basic items field.
You can also further restrict the content of the layout space that is displayed. Click [...] to open the 3D object selection dialog and select the
objects to be displayed in the model view.
Determine how the model view is to be displayed from the Style dropdown list. The following styles are available for selection:
Wire frame model: The selected items are displayed in the model
view without calculation of the hidden lines. It is thus possible to view
even the hidden items in the enclosure.
Hidden lines: The selected items are displayed in the model view
after calculation of the hidden lines.
Shading: With this style, a bitmap of the required items is generated
in the set view.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
379
You can also use other settings (Selection scheme, Viewpoint, etc.) to
determine what and how it can be seen in the model view. Click [OK] to
confirm the settings you made on this and other tabs (Display, Rectangle, Format). The model view is then generated.
Updating the model view

If the content of the layout space referenced by the model view is
changed, the Model view not up to date message appears over the top
of the model view when the page is opened. The model view must be
updated to match the contents of the layout space and model view.
To do this, select Utilities > Reports > Model view. A tree view of all
the model views that exist in the project is displayed on the left-hand side
of the Model views - <Project name> dialog that opens. Your selection
from the tree will determine whether all the model views in the project, all
the model views in a specific layout space, or only specific model views
are updated. Click [Update] to run the update. The display in the selected model views is matched to the current status in the layout space.
Tip:
You can also update a model view by selecting the associated page in
the page navigator and selecting Utilities > Reports > Update. This
menu option will update the pages selected in the page navigator that
have model views and / or reports. Similarly Utilities > Reports >
Generate project reports will update all the model views and reports
for a project.
380
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Modifying the contents of the model view

Two other functions allow you to modify the position of the graphic of a
model view in the graphical editor. The Move contents function, which is
available in the popup menu for an inserted model view, allows you to
move the graphic of the model view to a new position.
If you want the graphic to be displayed in the center of the model view
once more, then mark it in the graphical editor and select Popup menu >
Center contents.
A graphic that is no longer centered may occur because the display in
the model view was changed by changing the frame size or using the
Update function.
Outline Editor for Extrusions

The "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on provides another editor that you can use
to draw and edit geometrical outlines or contour lines for bodies. The
"outline editor for extrusions" is used to manage 2D outlines that can
later be used to model a 3D object by extrusion. The outline drawings
created for customized mounting rails etc., can include multiple outlines
that do not intersect.
The outline editor is opened via Utilities > Master data > Outline
(extrusion), in the same way as plot frames and forms. The functions
and submenu options (New, Open, Close, and Copy) of the outline
editor are also the same as those of the plot frame and form editors.
The outlines are managed in a special directory. A new Outlines field
has been added to the Settings: Directories dialog (under Options >
Settings > User > Management > Directories). Here you can define
the default directory for storing the outlines in EPLAN.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
381
Creating outlines
To create a new outline for extrusions, select Utilities > Master data >
Outline (extrusion) > New. In the Create outline dialog that opens,
define the file name and directory for the new outline. The "outline
extrusion" outline type is saved with the file extension *.fc2.
Click [Save] and the Outline properties - <Outline name> dialog
opens. In this dialog you specify the most important properties of an
outline. Click [OK]. The new outline is saved according to your input and
is displayed in the outline editor. The origin of the coordinate system is
highlighted by a red circle. This can be moved.
In the page navigator tree view, an open outline is identified by the
icon.
The properties of an open outline can be edited retrospectively by selecting the outline in the page navigator and selecting Popup menu >
Properties.
Editing outlines
When you create a new outline, the first editing step is to draw the 2D
geometry.
To do this, select from the graphical elements listed under Insert >
Graphic and the editing functions listed under the Edit menu option.
The following conditions apply:
Draw on a 1:1 scale.
Use the line, polyline, rectangle, circle, and arc graphical elements.
Make sure that the elements making up the outline are closed at all
the transition points.
382
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Opening outlines
It is also possible to apply the editing steps listed above to existing
outlines. To open an outline, select Utilities > Master data > Outline
(extrusion) > Open.
The master data for the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on includes a number of
outlines of the "outline extrusion" type. You can use this master data as
templates for your own outlines.
To be able to use a finished outline in the 3D mounting layout, save
it with a suitable part in the parts management dialog (e.g., from the
"Mounting rail" product subgroup). This is done in the Macro field on the
Technical data tab.
Importing and cleaning up outlines

The outline editor for extrusions also allows you to import outlines that
were created with other programs. The DXF and DWG file formats are
supported.
Before importing, first create a new, empty outline with the required
outline properties. Then import using Insert > Graphic > DXF / DWG.
Select a DXF / DWG file and make any settings needed for the import in
the next dialogs, then use the mouse to position the graphic on the
current outline.
After importing, you will have to "clean up" the outline manually. This
action removes all unwanted elements from the outline. These include
ellipses, splines, and 3D elements. Blocks are automatically broken up.
To do this, select Utilities > Clean up. Elements reported as "unacceptable" are removed and the blocks are broken up. Finally, confirm the
prompt in the Clean up dialog by clicking [OK].
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
383
Checking outlines
The Utilities menu contains the Check outline option for checking an
outline at any time during editing. This carries out the following geometry
checks:
Use of illegal elements
Existence of at least one closed outline
All existing outlines are closed and do not contain any duplicate
elements
No nested inner outlines.
When the outline check is complete, a message appears to tell you
whether the check was successful or not. When you have finished editing an outline, the outline check is carried out automatically when you
close the dialog. If the outline check is unsuccessful, you cannot use the
associated outline for extrusions in the 3D mounting layout. If this is the
case, you should correct the outline.
Device Structure for Mechanical Devices

The project structure of the EPLAN platform has been extended to allow
you to define your own identification structure for the mechanical devices
in your projects.
Benefit: You can assign a separate identification structure for
mechanical devices.
To do this, use the new Mechanical devices drop-down list on the
Structure tab in the Project properties dialog. This drop-down list
shows all user-defined and pre-defined identifier schemes for mechanical
devices. Click [...] to open the Device structure dialog, where you can
create, edit, and manage schemes.
If there is a change of standard, the Structure tab now also has a
Mechanical devices drop-down list.
384
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Online Numbering for Mechanical Devices

The mechanical devices are included in the online numbering, just like
other devices. When you insert mechanical devices into a project,
EPLAN can number them automatically and assign a suitable device tag.
The numbering formats for online numbering have been extended accordingly to allow unique identification / numbering of the mechanical
devices.
To this end, the Numbering formats dialog now contains a new
General mechanical devices field on the DT tab. There is already a
default DT format in this field. If the check box beside the field is deselected, the mechanical devices are not automatically numbered on
insertion.
You can also specify for mechanical devices that the preceding sign
should be automatically set in the visible DT on insertion. A new General
mechanical devices check box has been added to the Set preceding
sign group box in the Settings: DT dialog for this purpose. If this check
box is selected (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name"
> Devices > DT), the displayed DT will be displayed with the preceding
sign for mechanical devices, e.g., -U1.
The identifiers stored in the master data are used for online numbering
in relation to the current identifier set (see section "Master Data:
Identifiers" on page 437).
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
385
Special Topics EPLAN PPE

Compressing and Reorganizing Projects
The EPLAN platform functionality is now used for compressing and reorganizing EPLAN PPE projects.
For this purpose, the Clean up project menu item in the PPE submenu
has been removed and replaced by the EPLAN platform compression
function. A possible menu path here is: Project > Organize > Compress.
The [Compress project] button that you used to reorganize your
EPLAN PPE projects in the past has also been removed. If you want to
reorganize a PPE project in the new version, one way to do so is by
selecting Project > Organize > Reorganize.
Redesigned Import of Loops and Consumers

In EPLAN PPE, the functionality for the import of loops and consumers
has been extensively enhanced, and the import user interface has been
adjusted to suit the EPLAN platform. You can now import PCT loop
functions, hook-ups, and references to macros into your PPE project
from an external data source.
Benefit: The redesign makes importing from other data sources easier
and more intuitive. The import of large amounts of project
data (e.g. from the preplanning stage) to other engineering
systems allows for seamless transition to EPLAN PPE.
386
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The import function has been made more user-friendly as a whole. This
function can be accessed via Project > PPE > Import > Loops or
Consumers.
Type of data source:
After you have selected the type of data source in this field, it is no
longer necessary to set up an ODBC source (e.g. for frequently used
applications, such as Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel) using the
ODBC administrator. The option to select an ODBC data source is still
available for the "ODBC" type.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
387
Data source:
For the Data source field, click [...] and select the data source in the
dialog that opens. The dialog that opens depends on the data source
type selected.
To output the column names from a data table (e.g. Excel table) to the
External field column of the assignment table, select the Column
names in the header row check box. This check box is not available for
all types of data source.
When you have selected the data source, the data source table fields are
read in and displayed in the External field column.
Scheme:
All import settings (field assignments and object assignments) can now
be saved in a scheme in the usual way in EPLAN.
Assignment tab
On this tab, the external fields and the EPLAN properties are assigned to
each other.
To assign a property, click in the EPLAN property column and then on
[...], and select a property from the dialog that opens.
Define which are identifying properties during assignment by selecting
the relevant check box in the Identifying column. Filters are now defined
on the Assignment tab via the Filter column. If only one value is
entered here, it is filtered for uniformity. You could also enter "> 100".
Tip:
If the external field designations and the EPLAN property designations
are identical, field assignment can be carried out automatically using the
[Automatic assignment] button.
388
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Assignment tab
On this tab, you can specify other import settings.
At the time of the previous import, the Order and PI code drop-down
lists and the Override errors, Overwrite, Test import, and No new
loops / consumers check boxes were part of the Import settings dialog
that followed.
Including Parts from EPLAN PPE for Bills of Materials

Parts that have been scheduled via specifications / hook-ups in EPLAN
PPE can now be included in the EPLAN platform "Parts list" and
"Summarized parts list" reports as well as in the bill of materials export.
Benefit: This allows you to create a complete bill of materials for a
project. Parts from the preliminary and basic planning stages
can be added to the bill of materials in EPLAN PPE, giving
you an overview of the required items and project
components even in the early stages of a project. This allows
you to monitor components with longer delivery times or
technically demanding specifications, and continuously
manage all project data throughout the term of the project.
For this purpose, the two EPLAN platform settings dialogs Settings:
Parts and Settings: Labeling were extended in the Include parts group
box by the Specifications (EPLAN PPE) and Hook-ups (EPLAN PPE)
check boxes. When these check boxes are selected, the parts from
EPLAN PPE are attached to the lists to be output. For these parts, the
device tags are empty.
If the check boxes are deselected, the part from EPLAN PPE is not
included.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
389
Note:
Objects whose parts have already been included using engineering in
the EPLAN platform are ignored in EPLAN PPE to prevent parts from
being output more than once.
New Identifier for Measurands without Supplementary

Letters
EPLAN PPE projects now have the new identifier "m". This identifier
stands for the measurand of the PCT loop without supplementary letters.
This is used to display and report the measurand without supplementary
letters for the power station identifier system (KKS).
Labeling and Scripts for EPLAN PPE P&ID

The two utilities Labeling and Scripts are now available with the relevant functions for EPLAN PPE P&ID.
Benefit: Using the Labeling utility, you can now export item data for
labeling based on the plant overviews created with the
EPLAN PPE P&ID add-on and transfer information easily and
quickly to downstream engineering processes. You can automate recurrent tasks by creating scripts. Time-consuming,
manual work processes are avoided.
390
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Special Topics EPLAN View
Special Topics EPLAN View

User Settings for Multi-user Operation
The settings for User code / address are now also available in EPLAN
View. This dialog, which is accessed via Options > Settings > User >
Display > User code / address, is used to save user data for multi-user
operation.
Benefit: If an EPLAN View user has opened a project and this results
in a conflict in multi-user operation, the other users in the net
will now immediately see who has locked the project.
Note:
As rights management is not used in EPLAN View, the Logon name
field in the Settings: User code / address dialog remains empty.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
391
New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on

Note:
The "API Extension" add-on is available as an option for EPLAN Electric
P8 Professional, for EPLAN Fluid, and for EPLAN PPE.
A unified, and especially high-performance, programming interface (API,
Application Programming Interface) is available for EPLAN platform
products. This add-on the EPLAN API allows you to develop your
own customized solutions in collaboration with EPLAN or other partners.
The sections below describe the new features in the EPLAN API:
Direct access to parts management data
Access to function templates (see page 394)
All revision control functions are available (see page 395)
Other new features in the EPLAN API (see page 396).
Direct Access to Parts Management Data

The latest version of the EPLAN API provides direct access to EPLAN
parts management data. For this purpose, the EPLAN API has been
extensively enhanced.
Benefit: Direct access to parts management data in the EPLAN API
allows for communication with external ERP systems. Parts
can be created, edited, or deleted in the ERP system and
synchronized with a central EPLAN parts database to which
all users have access. This allows you to seamlessly integrate EPLAN into your individual system landscape and open
up all potentials for efficiency improvements throughout the
engineering process.
392
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Depending on the add-on, there is a new API DLL

(Eplan.EplApi.MasterData.dll) and a new namespace with the
same designation. Numerous new classes have been created in this
namespace that usually start with MD (for MasterData). The new
classes enable use of the following and other functions:
Generate new database
To generate a new database for parts management, use the
CreateDatabase method from the MDPartsManagement class.
Read all parts from the parts database
All parts that are in a parts database can be read using the Parts
property from the MDPartsDatabase class. The part is then sorted by
its part number.
In the EPLAN API, each part variant displays its own object. For
example, if a part occurs in three variants, then it will have three
objects of the class MDPart in the EPLAN API.
Read filtered parts from the parts database
To read filtered parts use the GetsParts(filter) method in the
MDPartsDatabase class. This filtering option corresponds to the fieldbased filter in parts management.
Define any part property
The Properties property from the MDPart class is used to define
parts management properties. There is a common properties list
MDPartsDatabaseItemPropertyList for the different data from
parts management (part, construction, connection points, customer or
manufacturer / supplier).
Create and remove parts
The AddPart and RemovePart methods in the MDPartsDatabase
class are available to you for this purpose. Analog methods
(AddCustomer, RemoveCustomer, etc.) are available to create and
remove customers, manufacturers / suppliers, etc.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
393
Copy and paste parts

The Duplicate method from the MDPart class is used to copy parts.
There is the option to create a new part as a variant or as a new part
with its own part number.
Querying selected parts
The SelectedPartDatabaseItems property from the
MDPartsManagement class can be used to determine the part that a
user has selected in parts management or in the part master data
navigator.
Note:
An object from the MDPart class stands for a part from the parts database. An EPLAN API object from this class is not related in any way to
parts stored in the project (API object: Article). Only the property
names are for common use.
The enhanced functionality means that the following data can now be
processed in the EPLAN CPM program variant via the EPLAN API:
Function templates
Data on customers and manufacturers
Construction and connection point data.
Access to Function Templates

The new version of the EPLAN API now allows you to access function
templates.
Benefit: If you create a device using the EPLAN API, you can now
also place auxiliary functions or edit them as unplaced
functions.
394
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The PlaceAt method from the Function class can be used to place
function templates and functions on schematic pages in a particular
representation type. The new FunctionTemplates property from the
same class allows you to query the function templates of a main function.
The PlaceAsConnectionDefinitionPoint method from the
Connection class now allows you to place function templates for
connections as a connection definition point in the schematic.
All Revision Control Functions are Available

In the new version, all revision control functions can now be accessed
via the EPLAN API.
Benefit: You can now control the entire revision process using the
EPLAN API. You are using the enormous rationalization
potential of the EPLAN API by standardizing and consistently
automating your engineering processes.
For this purpose, the following methods have been added to the
Revision class:
CompletePages: Saves the revision modifications of the selected
pages in the current revision project.
CompleteProject: Saves the revision modifications in a project.
CreateRevision: Generates a new revision of the source project.
GetUncompletedPages: Provides a list of unchanged and
uncompleted pages in the current revision project.
RemoveWriteProtection: Removes the write protection from a
revision project.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
395
Other New Features in the EPLAN API

New methods for placeholder objects
It is no longer the case that only a graphical character is used for placeholder objects; now an appropriate symbol is also used (see section
"Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects" on page
240). Because of this new feature, the new SymbolVariant property has
been added to the Eplan.EplApi.DataModel.Graphics.PlaceHolder
object which means that the symbol can be changed.
Transferring objects to an action
Using the two new GetContextParameter and SetContextParameter
methods from the ActionCallingContext class, you can now transfer
any object to an action.
Opening part selection
The new ShowPartSelectionDialog method can now be found in the
EplApplication class. This method is used to open the Part selection
dialog. To preselect a part, the part number (parameter: strPartNr) and
the variant number (parameter: strVariant) are transferred.
Creating a progress bar for your own offline program
Users of the EPLAN API can now create a progress bar for their own
offline programs. A new IEplProgress interface is available for this
purpose.
Launching the API offline program
There is a new launch dll in the EPLAN API that is used to search for
and load all EPLAN API DLLs. The EPLAN version must be specified
before calling the Eplan.EplApi.Starter.dll. All API dlls from the
BIN directory are then loaded using the AssemblyResolver class.
Converting components into graphic
The new Group SymbolReference.ConvertToGroup method allows
you to convert components into objects in the EPLAN API.
396
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Adding user-defined property arrangements

The EPLAN API allows you to save or add user-specific property arrangements for symbols under a specific name. The new Add method
has been added to the
SymbolReference::PropertyPlacementsSchemasConfiguration
class for this purpose.

Switching project options to transparent
In the EPLAN API, you can now set deactivated project options to
transparent. The new IsTransparent property has been added to the
Option class for this purpose.
Moving elements into the foreground / background
The new BringToFront and SendToBack methods are now available in
the Placement class of the EPLAN API. These are used to move placed
elements into the foreground / background.
Developing new interactions using the EPLAN API
You can now use the EPLAN API to develop your own graphical
interactions for the graphical editor. These interactions can be used to
draw new graphical elements. For this purpose, the new Interaction
class has been added to the Eplan.EplApi.EServices.Ged
namespace.
Specifically locking individual objects
You can now use the EPLAN API not only to lock objects for the entire
project, but also to lock individual objects for multi-user operation. The
following methods are available for this:
LockDevice: This method from the Function class locks all objects
associated with a device.
LockObject: This method from the StorableObjekt class locks the
current object.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
397
SmartLock: This method from the StorableObjekt class (and

classes derived from it) locks the current object and the associated
objects (for a placed object the entire page may be locked, for
example).
Deleting all message management messages
The new Clear method in the PrjMessagesCollection class allows
you to delete all message management messages.
Updating parts database
The new UpgradePartsDb method in the PartsService class can now
be used to update parts databases of an older EPLAN version to the
latest version using the EPLAN API.
Note:
If you work with several EPLAN versions then we recommend using the
latest EPLAN version when editing and managing the parts database.
Determining window macro variants
The EPLAN API now allows you to determine all variants of a specific
representation type for a window macro. The new GetVariants method
in the WindowMacro class is available for this.
Enabling / disabling actions
The new IEplActionEnable interface is used to enable or disable
actions. If this interface is not used, then the relevant action is enabled
by default. If you implement this interface for an action class, you can
then disable the respective action. If you implement the action for a
menu item or a symbol button, this interface element will accordingly be
disabled (and grayed out).
Retrieving information on project-specific settings
The ProjectSettingNode class in the EPLAN API can now be used to
retrieve information on project setting nodes.
398
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Retrieving a trade function definition

The MainGroup property has been added to the FunctionDefinition
class in the EPLAN API. This property allows you to retrieve the name of
the trade (e.g. Electrical engineering) in which a function definition has
been classified.
Retrieving window macro insertion points
The new Location property in the WindowMacro class allows you to
retrieve the position of the window macro insertion point.
Tracking potentials and signals
The new TrackPotential method can now be found in the
ConnectionService class. This method allows you to use the
EPLAN API to determine all connections that belong to the same
potential. Accordingly, you can use the new TrackSignal method to
determine all connections that transmit the same signal.
Name of menu item as multilingual string
The AddMenuItem method in the EPLAN API Menu class has been
enhanced. This allows you to add the name of a menu item as a
multilingual string. The menu item will then be displayed in the specified
dialog language.
Deleting all pages in a project
The new RemoveAllPages method in the Project class allows you to
delete all pages in a project in one go.
Retrieving all page macro placeholder objects
You can now use the PlaceHolders property in the PageMacro class to
retrieve all page macro placeholder objects.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
399
Multilingual project properties

The type of the PROJ_TYPE (Project: Type <10031>),
PROJ_PARTFEATURES (Part features <10033>) and PROJ_REGULATION
(Regulation <10036>) project properties has been changed. These
properties can now be created as multilingual character strings.
Retrieving file names when exporting image files
There is now the option in the EPLAN API to retrieve the names of the
created files when exporting the entire project or individual pages in
image file format. Two new methods GraphicProjectEx and
GraphicPageEx in the Export class are provided for this.
Retrieving filtered project data
In the EPLAN API DMObjectsFinder class, there are now several new
methods (Get<ProjectData>WithFilterScheme) available for the
retrieval of filtered project data. These methods, such as
GetFunctionsWithFilterScheme, return the filtered objects that are
left over when using a filter scheme for the respective navigator (device
navigator for the method described above).
Exporting filtered bill of materials
The new ExportPartsListWithFilterScheme method in the
PartsService class allows you to export all filtered project parts data for
the bill of materials navigator.
400
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
New Features in the Master Data

Enhanced Information in the Master Data Editor
For the new version, the information displayed when editing master data
has been enhanced and the structure improved.
When you create, open, or copy a master data type (symbol library, plot
frame, outline, or form), the following properties for a selected file are
listed in the info area in the right-hand side of the dialog:
for symbol libraries:
Symbol library description, creation date, created by, company code,
last editor, modification date, number of symbols.
for plot frames:
Description, company code, created by, creation date, last editor,
modification date.
for outlines:
Description, outline type, company code, created by, creation date,
last editor, modification date.
for forms:
Description, company code, created by, creation date, last editor,
modification date, form handling.
The designation of the property is shown first and this is then separated
from the value by a colon (e.g. Created by: ROE). If the text for a property is too long, an automatic line break is inserted in the info area.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
401
Example:
In the Open form dialog, you have selected the F01_001.f01 form for
the "Parts list" form type. The text that appears in the info area looks like
this Description: Parts list ..., Created by: mka, Creation
date: 25.10.2001, etc.
Master Data: Symbols

Note:
The following pages show numerous illustrations of new symbols from
different symbol libraries. The illustrations show variant "A" of the respective symbols in multi-line representation (except the symbols from the
SPECIAL symbol library).
The name and number of the symbol are shown underneath the symbol.
IEC, GOST, and GB standards
The following new symbols have been added to the IEC_symbol,
IEC_single_symbol, GOST_symbol, GOST_single_symbol,
GB_symbol, and GB_single_symbol symbol libraries
(the respective symbols are shown in multi-line representation):
402
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
// 330
_LEFT // 331
_LEFT_PLUG // 332
_PLUG // 333
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
_LEFT_PLUG_1
_PLUG_1
_LEFT_PLUG_M
_LEFT_PLUG_FEM
// 334
// 335
// 336
// 337
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
QL3_7
K_3
_PLUG_M // 338
_PLUG_FEM // 339
// 1198
// 1251
K_4 // 1252
KS3 // 1253
KS4 // 1254
KST3 // 1255
KST4 // 1256
S_EL // 1261
O_EL // 1262
XU2 // 1265
XU2S // 1266
F_SNH_1P // 1281
F_SNH_3P // 1282
F_AB_1P // 1284
QLIM11_1 // 1286
QL3_8 // 1290
W3_SWR_2 // 1291
W3_SWL_2 // 1292
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
403
W3_SWB_2 // 1293
W3_VES_2 // 1294
W3_NES_2 // 1295
W2_OU_1 // 1328
BW3P // 1372
BW3SW // 1373
BW3D // 1374
X1_NB // 1410
X1_B // 1411
X2_NB // 1413
X2_B // 1414
X2_B_2 // 1415
X3_NB // 1417
X3_B // 1418
X3_B_2 // 1419
X4_NB // 1421
X4_B // 1422
X4_NB_1 // 1424
X4_B_1 // 1425
X4_B_2 // 1426
X6_NB // 1428
X6_B // 1429
X6_NB_1 // 1430
X6_B_1 // 1431
404
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
X6_B_2 // 1432
X8_NB // 1434
X8_B // 1435
X8_NB_1 // 1436
X8_B_1 // 1437
X8_B_2 // 1438
SSNS1_ST // 1440
SONS1_ST // 1441
SLS_ST // 1442
SLSAC_ST // 1443
SLSDC_ST // 1444
SLEDC_ST // 1445
SLEAC_ST // 1446
SSUS_ST // 1447
SOUS_ST // 1448
NFPA standard
The following new symbols have been added to the NFPA_symbol and
NFPA_single_symbol symbol libraries (the respective symbols are
shown in multi-line representation):
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
// 330
_LEFT // 331
_LEFT_PLUG // 332
_PLUG // 333
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
405
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
_LEFT_PLUG_1
_PLUG_1
_LEFT_PLUG_M
_LEFT_PLUG_FEM
// 334
// 335
// 336
// 337
PLC_S_CBOX
PLC_S_CBOX
QL3_7
K_3
_PLUG_M // 338
_PLUG_FEM // 339
// 1198
// 1251
K_4 // 1252
KS3 // 1253
KS4 // 1254
KST3 // 1255
KST4 // 1256
S_EL // 1261
O_EL // 1262
XU2 // 1265
XU2S // 1266
F_SNH_1P // 1281
F_SNH_3P // 1282
F_AB_1P // 1284
406
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
QLIM11_1 // 1286
QL3_8 // 1290
W3_SWR_2 // 1291
W3_SWL_2 // 1292
W3_SWB_2 // 1293
W3_VES_2 // 1294
W3_NES_2 // 1295
W2_OU_1 // 1328
BW3P // 1372
BW3SW // 1373
BW3D // 1374
X1_NB // 1410
X1_B // 1411
X2_NB // 1413
X2_B // 1414
X2_B_2 // 1415
X3_NB // 1417
X3_B // 1418
X3_B_2 // 1419
X4_NB // 1421
X4_B // 1422
X4_NB_1 // 1424
X4_B_1 // 1425
X4_B_2 // 1426
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
407
X6_NB // 1428
X6_B // 1429
X6_NB_1 // 1430
X6_B_1 // 1431
X6_B_2 // 1432
X8_NB // 1434
X8_B // 1435
X8_NB_1 // 1436
X8_B_1 // 1437
X8_B_2 // 1438
SSNS1_ST // 1440
SONS1_ST // 1441
SLS_ST // 1442
SLSAC_ST // 1443
SLSDC_ST // 1444
SLEDC_ST // 1445
SLEAC_ST // 1446
SSUS_ST // 1447
SOUS_ST // 1448
408
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Fluid power and process engineering

A new symbol library for the "Lubrication" trade has been created:
LUB1ESS.
F15.5_14 // 238
F15.3.1 // 254
F15.3.1_01 // 255
AG10.1.1_03 // 307
AG10.1.1_02 // 308
AG10.5_02 // 326
V_BT_058 // 845
V_BT_059 // 846
V_BT_060 // 847
V_BT_061 // 848
AG10.1.2_04 // 856
V_BT_057 // 857
V_BT_053 // 861
V_BT_054 // 862
V_BT_055 // 863
V_S_011 // 871
V_S_012 // 872
V_S_013 // 873
V_S_014 // 874
Z_ZUB_16 // 1060
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
409
Z_ZUB_15 // 1061
V_ZUB_03 // 1063
V11.3.1_01 // 1068
PM13.3.4_01 // 1069
F15.5_31 // 1070
GS_EA_06 // 1071
V_BT_077 // 1077
V_BT_078 // 1078
Z14.1.2_17 // 1079
Z_ZUB_31 // 1080
VERB_11 // 1101
VERB_12 // 1102
VERB_13 // 1103
VERB_14 // 1104
VERB_15 // 1105
CON_04 // 1106
VERB_16 // 1107
V11.1.2_15 // 1108
V11.5.3_09 // 1109
ANZ_12 // 1110
ANZ_12_01 // 1111
ANZ_12_02 // 1112
ANZ_12_03 // 1113
ANZ_12_04 // 1114
410
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
GSEA_8.7.14
RV_01
AG10.5_03
ANZ_ZUB_03
// 1115
// 1117
// 1118
// 1120
ANZ_ZUB_04
F15.5_26
F15.5_27
V11.5.2.14_02
// 1121
// 1122
// 1123
// 1124
ANZ_ZUB_09
ANZ_ZUB_16
STG_01
STG_02
// 1126
// 1135
// 1137
// 1138
STG_03 // 1139
STG_04 // 1140
V_RV_09 // 1143
V_RV_10 // 1144
F_13 // 1149
ST_01 // 1152
PM_17 // 1153
GS_SCH_01 // 1154
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
411
GS_SCH_02 // 1155
PM_ZUB_14 // 1157
PM_ZUB_16 // 1158
PM_ZUB_17 // 1159
SCHG_1 // 1162
SCHG_2 // 1163
SCHG_3 // 1164
SS_03 // 1165
SS_04 // 1166
SS_05 // 1167
BS_01 // 1168
PM_ZUB_15 // 1170
SI_01 // 1171
SI_02 // 1172
SI_03 // 1173
SI_04 // 1174
DS_04 // 1177
P_04 // 1180
SV_06 // 1182
SV_01 // 1183
412
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
SV_05 // 1184
SV_07 // 1185
V11.5.3_08 // 1186
GS_MIX_01 // 1187
GS_MIX_02 // 1188
GS6.1.7_04 // 1192
GS6.1.8_04 // 1193
GS6.1.8_02 // 1194
GS6.1.8_03 // 1195
GS6.1.7_02 // 1196
GS6.1.7_03 // 1197
PM_EL_05 // 1198
VERT_VZU_01
VERT_VZU_02
VERT_VZU_03
VERT_DOS_02
// 1201
// 1202
// 1203
// 1207
VERT_VKB_01T
VERT_VKB_01
VERT_VKB_02
VERT_VKB_02.1
// 1210
// 1212
// 1213
// 1214
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
413
VERT_VKB_03
VERT_VKB_03.1
VERT_VKB_04
VERT_VKB_04.1
// 1215
// 1216
// 1217
// 1218
VERT_VKB_05
VERT_VKB_05.1
VERT_VPB_03
VERT_VPB_04
// 1219
// 1220
// 1221
// 1222
VERT_VPB_05
VERT_VPB_06
VERT_VPB_07
VERT_VPB_08
// 1223
// 1224
// 1225
// 1226
VERT_VPB_09
VERT_VPB_10
VERT_VPK_001
VERT_VPK_002
// 1227
// 1228
// 1231
// 1232
VERT_VPK_003
AG_02
VERT_VDR
VERT_VDR_02
// 1233
// 1235
// 1239
// 1240
414
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
VERT_VDR_03
VERT_VDR_04
VERT_VDR_05
VERT_VDR_06
// 1241
// 1242
// 1243
// 1244
VERT_VDR_10
VERT_VDR_12
VERT_VDR_14
VERT_VDR_ZUB_01
// 1245
// 1246
// 1247
// 1248
VERT_VDR_ZUB_02
VERT_VDR_ZUB_03
VE_DE_01
VE_DE_02
// 1249
// 1250
// 1251
// 1252
VE_DE_03
VE_DE_04
VERT_LEIST_2
VERT_LEIST_3
// 1253
// 1254
// 1261
// 1262
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
415
VERT_LEIST_4
VERT_LEIST_5
VERT_LEIST_6
VERT_LEIST_8
// 1263
// 1264
// 1265
// 1266
VERT_LEIST_10
VERT_VKB_06
VERT_VKB_06.1
VERT_VKB_07
// 1267
// 1271
// 1272
// 1273
VERT_VKB_07.1
VERT_VKB_08
VERT_VKB_08.1
VERT_VKB_09
// 1274
// 1275
// 1276
// 1277
VERT_VKB_09.1
VERT_VKB_10
VERT_VKB_10.1
// 1278
// 1279
// 1280
The following new symbols have been added to the HYD1ESS and
HYD2ESS symbol libraries:
GS7.1.7_04 // 212
416
V11.5.4_12 // 213
GS7.5.1_02 // 214
GS7.1.8_02 // 217
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
F15.1_07 // 219
AG10.1.1_03 // 307
AG10.1.1_02 // 308
AG10.5_02 // 326
Z14.1.2_17
Z14.1.3_17
V11.5.4.6_01
GSVA8.2xx_17
// 371
// 372
// 664
// 665
Z_ZUB_36 // 673
Z_ZUB_37 // 674
Z_ZUB_38 // 675
Z_ZUB_39 // 676
Z_ZUB_40 // 677
Z_ZUB_41 // 678
SV_006 // 681
SV_007 // 682
SV_008 // 683
SV_009 // 684
SV_010 // 685
SV_011 // 686
SV_012 // 687
SV_013 // 688
SV_014 // 689
SV_015 // 690
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
417
SV_016 // 691
SV_017 // 692
V7.1.5.3_03 // 695
V_BT_062 // 849
V_BT_063 // 850
V_BT_064 // 851
V_BT_065 // 852
AG10.1.2_04 // 856
V_BT_057 // 857
V_BT_056 // 859
V11.5.3_07 // 860
V_BT_069 // 869
V_BT_070 // 870
V_BT_049 // 890
V_BT_050 // 891
V_BT_051 // 892
V_BT_052 // 893
Z14.1.2_08_1 // 897
Z14.1.2_09_1 // 898
Z14.1.3_08_1 // 899
Z14.1.3_09_1 // 900
V7.1.2.43_51 // 939
SPIST_01 // 1090
SRLT_01 // 1091
418
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
SRLT_02 // 1092
SRLT_03 // 1093
SRLT_04 // 1094
SRLT_05 // 1095
SRLT_06 // 1096
SRLT_07 // 1097
SRLT_08 // 1098
SRLT_09 // 1099
SRLT_10
VERT_VKB_07.1
VERT_VKB_08
EA_BT_44
// 1100
// 1274
// 1275
// 1309
EA_BT_42 // 1310
EA_18 // 1311
EA_19 // 1312
EA_20 // 1313
EA_BT_43 // 1314
EA9.1.4_02 // 1321
EA9.1.4_03 // 1322
EA9.1.4_04 // 1323
EA_21
EA_DS_P_ANA
EA_DS_P_DIGIT
EA_DS_P_EL
// 1324
_3x3M // 1331
_3x3M // 1332
_3x3M // 1333
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
419
EA_DS_G_ANA
EA_DS_G_DIGIT
EA_DS_G_EL
EA_DS_F_ANA
_3x3M // 1334
_3x3M // 1335
_3x3M // 1336
_3x3M // 1337
EA_DS_F_DIGIT
EA_DS_F_EL
EA_DS_L_ANA
EA_DS_L_DIGIT
_3x3M // 1338
_3x3M // 1339
_3x3M // 1340
_3x3M // 1341
EA_DS_L_EL
EA_DS_S_ANA
EA_DS_S_DIGIT
EA_DS_S_EL
_3x3M // 1342
_3x3M // 1343
_3x3M // 1344
_3x3M // 1345
EA_DS_T_ANA
EA_DS_T_DIGIT
EA_DS_T_EL
EA_DS_W_ANA
_3x3M // 1346
_3x3M // 1347
_3x3M // 1348
_3x3M // 1349
EA_DS_W_DIGIT
EA_DS_W_EL
EA_Z_G_ANA
EA_Z_G_DIGIT
_3x3M // 1350
_3x3M // 1351
_3x3M // 1364
_3x3M // 1365
420
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
EA_Z_G_EL_3x3M
EA_Z_T_ANA_3x3M
EA_Z_T_DIGIT_3x3M
EA_Z_T_EL_3x3M
// 1366
// 1376
// 1377
// 1378
EA_G_ANA_3x3M
EA_G_DIGIT_3x3M
EA_G_EL_3x3M
EA_T_ANA_3x3M
// 1394
// 1395
// 1396
// 1406
EA_T_DIGIT_3x3M
EA_T_EL_3x3M
// 1407
// 1408
The following new symbols have been added to the PNE1ESS symbol
library:
GS7.1.7_04 // 212
V11.5.4_12 // 213
GS7.5.1_02 // 214
F15.3.1_03 // 215
F15.3.1_04 // 216
GS7.1.8_02 // 217
F15.1_06 // 218
PM13.5.24 // 261
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
421
AG10.1.1_03 // 307
AG10.1.1_02 // 308
AG10.5_02 // 326
Z14.1.2_17 // 371
Z14.1.3_17 // 372
V_BT_026 // 461
V_BT_019_X2 // 575
V_BT_046_X // 576
V_BT_047_X // 577
V7.1.2_33_08 // 657
Z_ZUB_36 // 673
Z_ZUB_37 // 674
Z_ZUB_38 // 675
Z_ZUB_39 // 676
Z_ZUB_40 // 677
Z_ZUB_41 // 678
SV_006 // 681
SV_007 // 682
SV_008 // 683
SV_009 // 684
SV_010 // 685
SV_011 // 686
SV_012 // 687
SV_013 // 688
422
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
SV_014 // 689
SV_015 // 690
SV_016 // 691
SV_017 // 692
V_BT_062 // 849
V_BT_063 // 850
V_BT_069 // 869
V_BT_070 // 870
SPIST_01 // 1090
SRLT_01 // 1091
SRLT_02 // 1092
SRLT_03 // 1093
SRLT_04 // 1094
SRLT_05 // 1095
SRLT_06 // 1096
SRLT_07 // 1097
SRLT_08
SRLT_09
SRLT_10
VERT_VKB_07.1
// 1098
// 1099
// 1100
// 1274
VERT_VKB_08
EA_BT_44
EA_BT_42
EA_18
// 1275
// 1309
// 1310
// 1311
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
423
EA_19 // 1312
EA_20 // 1313
EA_BT_43 // 1314
EA9.1.4_02 // 1321
EA9.1.4_03
EA9.1.4_04
EA_21
EA_DS_P_ANA_3x3M
// 1322
// 1323
// 1324
// 1331
EA_DS_P_DIGIT
EA_DS_P_EL
EA_DS_G_ANA
EA_DS_G_DIGIT
_3x3M // 1332
_3x3M // 1333
_3x3M // 1334
_3x3M // 1335
EA_DS_G_EL
EA_DS_F_ANA
EA_DS_F_DIGIT
EA_DS_F_EL
_3x3M // 1336
_3x3M // 1337
_3x3M // 1338
_3x3M // 1339
EA_DS_L_ANA
EA_DS_L_DIGIT
EA_DS_L_EL
EA_DS_S_ANA
_3x3M // 1340
_3x3M // 1341
_3x3M // 1342
_3x3M // 1343
424
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
EA_DS_S_DIGIT
EA_DS_S_EL
EA_DS_T_ANA
EA_DS_T_DIGIT
_3x3M // 1344
_3x3M // 1345
_3x3M // 1346
_3x3M // 1347
EA_DS_T_EL
EA_DS_W_ANA
EA_DS_W_DIGIT
EA_DS_W_EL
_3x3M // 1348
_3x3M // 1349
_3x3M // 1350
_3x3M // 1351
EA_Z_G_ANA
EA_Z_G_DIGIT
EA_Z_G_EL_3x3M
EA_Z_T_ANA_3x3M
_3x3M // 1364
_3x3M // 1365
// 1366
// 1376
EA_Z_T_DIGIT_3x3
EA_Z_T_EL_3x3M //
EA_G_ANA_3x3M //
EA_G_DIGIT_3x3M
M // 1377
1378
1394
// 1395
EA_G_EL_3x3M
EA_T_ANA_3x3M
EA_T_DIGIT_3x3M
EA_T_EL_3x3M
// 1396
// 1406
// 1407
// 1408
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
425
In the PPE_SYM symbol library, the function definition for the symbol
B73 // 73 ("Symbol name" // "Symbol number") has been changed
from "Analog temperature sensor, 2 connection points" to "Analog
sensor, general, 2 connection points".
Special symbol library
A new symbol for net definition points has been created in the
SPECIAL symbol library:
NDP // 312 // Net definition point (triangle)
NDP
A new symbol for potential definition points has been created in the
PDP2 // 313 // Potential definition point (triangle)
PDP2
426
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
A new symbol has been created for placeholder objects in the

PLHO // 323 // Placeholder object
PLHO
A new symbol for insulated wire terminations has been created in the
NCI // 100 // Wire termination, insulated
NCI
A new symbol for wire terminations that are not connected has been
created in the SPECIAL symbol library:
NC // 101 // Wire termination, not connected
NC
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
427
A new symbol for deleted objects has been created in the SPECIAL
symbol library:
DO // 300 // Deleted object
DO
A new symbol for outline definition points of outlines of type

"Extrusion" has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:
ODP // 290 // Outline definition points for outlines
of type extrusion
ODP
A new symbol for connection definition points of type "Coiled pipe"

has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:
CDPST // 472 // VDP, Coiled pipe
CDPST
428
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
The following new device connection points are available in the

DCFP2OL2 // 59
DCPP3 // 408
DCPPJIC // 409
DCPPOJIC // 410
DCPPO // 411
In addition, the following symbols for complex devices have been

added to the SPECIAL symbol library:
D2DCP // 412
D3DCP // 413
D4DCP // 414
D2DCPFEM // 415
D3DCPFEM
D4DCPFEM
D2DCPJICFEM
D3DCPJICFEM
// 416
// 417
// 418
// 419
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
429
D4DCPJICFEM // 420
D2DCPM // 421
D3DCPM // 422
D4DCPM // 423
D2DCPJICM // 424
D3DCPJICM // 425
D4DCPJICM // 426
D2DCPNG // 427
D3DCPNG // 428
D4DCPNG // 429
D2DCPP3 // 430
D3DCPP3 // 431
D4DCPP3 // 432
D2DCPPJIC // 433
D3DCPPJIC // 434
D4DCPPJIC // 435
D2DCPPO // 436
D3DCPPO // 437
D4DCPPO // 438
D2DCPPOJIC // 439
430
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
D3DCPPOJIC // 440
D4DCPPOJIC // 441
S2DCP // 442
S3DCP // 443
S4DCP // 444
S2DCPFEM // 445
S3DCPFEM // 446
S4DCPFEM // 447
S2DCPJICFEM
S3DCPJICFEM
S4DCPJICFEM
S2DCPM
// 448
// 449
// 450
// 451
S3DCPM // 452
S4DCPM // 453
S2DCPJICM // 454
S3DCPJICM // 455
S4DCPJICM // 456
S2DCPNG // 457
S3DCPNG // 458
S4DCPNG // 459
S2DCPP3 // 460
S3DCPP3 // 461
S4DCPP3 // 462
S2DCPPJIC // 463
S3DCPPJIC // 464
S4DCPPJIC // 465
S2DCPPO // 466
S3DCPPO // 467
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
431
S4DCPPO // 468
S2DCPPOJIC // 469
S3DCPPOJIC // 470
S4DCPPOJIC // 471
In the SPECIAL symbol library, the width of several symbols for PCT
loops and PCT loop functions has been reduced to 10 mm. This
relates to the following symbols:
PID6 // 346 // PCT loop Process computer On-site
PID7 // 347 // PCT loop Process computer Measuring
station
PID8 // 348 // PCT
room
PID15 // 355 // PCT
On-site
PID16 // 356 // PCT
Measuring station
PID17 // 357 // PCT
Control room.
loop Process computer Control

loop function - Process computer loop function - Process computer loop function - Process computer -
General
In the IEC_symbol, NFPA_symbol, GOST_symbol, and GB_symbol
symbol libraries, the appearance of contactor contact image symbol
variants has been changed in several symbols (change-over contacts
and contacts with delay). This relates to symbols with the number 3,
4, 5, 6, 270, 1011, 1012, 1013, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062,
1063, 1106, 1107, 1126, 1127, 1128, 1129, 1130, 1131, 1132, and
1133.
432
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Master Data: Function Definition Library

Numerous new function definitions have been added to the function definition library. For further information on the properties, the basic symbol,
etc. of the function definitions listed below in the Function definitions
dialog, navigate to the location indicated in the Selection field.
Trade: General
The following new function definitions have been added under
General // General special functions // Connection //
Connection definitions:
Internal jumper.
Trade: Electrical engineering

Electrical engineering // Electrical engineering
special function // Device connection point to the groups
listed below:
"Device connection point" group:
N device connection point
SH device connection point.
"Device connection point, 2 connection points" group:

N device connection point, 2 connection points
PE device connection point, 2 connection points
SH device connection point, 2 connection points.

Electrical engineering // Terminals and plugs //
Terminal to the groups listed below:
"Terminal, variable" group:

Terminal, variable
N terminal, variable
PE terminal, variable
SH terminal, variable.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
433
"Terminals with saddle jumper, 1 connection point" group:

General terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point
Terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point
N terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point
PE terminal with rail contact, 1 connection point
SH terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point.
"Terminals with saddle jumper, 2 connection points" group:

General terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points
Terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points
N terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points
PE terminal with rail contact, 2 connection points
SH terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points.



434
EPLAN NEWS 2.0

"Terminals, 1 connection point" group:

General terminal, 1 connection point
Terminal, 1 connection point
N terminal, 1 connection point
PE terminal, 1 connection point
SH terminal, 1 connection point.
"Terminals, 2 connection points" group:

General terminal, 2 connection points
Terminal, 2 connection points
N terminal, 2 connection points
PE terminal, 2 connection points
SH terminal, 2 connection points.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0
435



Electrical engineering // PLC / bus // PLC connection
point // PLC connection point, I / O, 1 connection
point:
PLC connection point, multifunction.

Electrical engineering // Coils, Contacts and protective circuits // Coil // Coil, 2 Connection points:
Coil, auxiliary relay.
The "Coil" function definition was renamed "Coil, power circuit

breaker".
Master Data: Plot Frames

GOST standard
The following new plot frames have been created:
GOST_first_page_scheme_A2_sl.fn1
GOST_next_page_scheme_A2_sl.fn1.
436
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Master Data: Settings for Messages and Check Runs

Enhanced program functionality means that two check run messages
in the "Cable" message class are now redundant. For this reason, the
following message numbers have been removed:
Number: Message text:
003016
Identical shield symbols affect identical and differing

connections.
003017
Identical shield symbols affect differing connections.
Master Data: Identifiers

Utilities > Master data > Identifier
In the Suggested identifiers dialog, you can now sort the tables
shown alphabetically by either the Trade, Category, Group, or Function definition column, in ascending or descending order. To do so,
double-click on the column.
In addition, you can assign identifiers for mechanics items in this
dialog. For this purpose, additional lines with function definitions from
the "Mechanics" trade have been added to the Suggested identifiers
dialog. Identifiers can be saved for these function definitions in the
IEC 61346 and NFPA columns as well as for user-defined identifier
sets.
Note:
After each change, the changed identifier sets must be exported. To
do this, select the columns with the changed identifier sets and select
Popup menu > Export. If you receive a new function definition library in
an update, you need to import your exported identifier sets into the new
program version and add the new function definitions.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
437
Master Data: Projects and Templates

A new "Higher-level function number" page structure has been added
to sample projects and templates.
In the Num_bas001.zw9 and Num_tpl001.ept templates, the Numbering format setting when inserting symbols has changed from
"Identifier + page (three-digit) + column" to "Identifier + counter and
device connection points".
Master Data: Workspace

View > Workspace
In the Workspace dialog, the "EPLAN PPE" scheme has been
revised. The Documentation dialog has now been replaced by
Graphical preview.
Master Data: Schemes

Two new filter schemes have been created for the terminal strips
navigator:
Main terminals
Auxiliary terminals.
A new filter scheme has been made available in the PLC navigator:
Address-oriented.
The new "UnityPro - Txt" scheme, with PLC-specific formats for

Schneider Electric's "Unity Pro" software, is now available for the
PLC-specific settings field in the Settings: PLCdialog.
The following filter scheme has been created for the field-based filter
of parts management:
Accessories.
438
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Other New Features and Information

Customer Queries and Messages
Note:
Please note that the following EPLAN service is not possible in all
countries.
A large number of your queries and wishes have contributed to the new
version of the EPLAN platform. Please note that not all queries can be
listed within the scope of this document. You can, however, query the
status of your message ("issue") with us at any time.
Login to EPLAN Support on the Internet (software service customers
only) and, within our support area, click the Login Call-Tracking hyperlink
under Call tracking. The "EPLAN Support Call Tracking" page will now
open in your browser.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
439
You need the following information to log on here:

User name (= your last name)
The first five digits of your Software service number.
After filling out the form, confirm this information by clicking [Login].
In the Issue No. field on the next page, enter the issue number that you
were given by support and click [Search].
440
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
You will be redirected to your message. This will show you an overview
of your support query.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
441
Validation Code
To use this new version of EPLAN, you need a new validation code. This
is provided on the delivery note sent with your storage medium. In addition, you can now have the option of retrieving the validation code via the
internet (see the following section).
Retrieving the validation code online

EPLAN now enables you to carry out the final installation step quickly
and easily by allowing you to retrieve the validation code required for
licensing via the internet. After the required data have been transmitted,
the validation code is automatically copied into the license dialog.
Benefit: Retrieving the validation code via the internet, makes entering the validation code quicker and easier and you are less
likely to make mistakes.
Note:
Please note that you must be connected to the internet to download
the validation code. You cannot retrieve a validation code for network
licenses or licenses without a dongle.
The Enter validation code dialog has been enhanced to allow you the
option of retrieving the validation code online.
442
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
This dialog opens when you start the application for the first time after
installation. Click the new [Retrieve online] button.
The Company name and Serial number are automatically entered into
the open Set validation code online dialog. This data is needed to retrieve the validation code successfully.
Up-to-date information
If you would like to receive information in the future (such as our eNewsletter), please select the I would like to receive further information
check box. EPLAN will then save your personal details (Name, Phone,
E-mail address, etc.).
Internet settings
The settings for the existing internet connection are adopted by default.
You can also use a proxy server as a network component via the
[Settings] button and the dialog that then opens. In this case, enter the
relevant data in the Address, Port fields, etc. Contact your administrator
for the relevant settings.
Returning the validation code
Click [Send] to send the encoded data to EPLAN. If your details are
already held by EPLAN and are valid, a validation code is created and
sent to the license dialog. Then start the application by clicking [OK].
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
443
Installation and Subsequent Operation Steps

Administrator:
As the administrator, you must read the sections below on installation,
software and hardware requirements before working with the new
version.
Warning:
Data of previous versions generated with the EPLAN platform can still be
used in the latest version. However, data edited in the current version
may not always be compatible with previous versions due to extended
functionalities and parameters. We expressly advise you not to work with
mixed data originating from different versions.
In the installation wizard directory settings, in place of the previous
Database directory field, you will now find two new input fields, EPLAN
original master data and System master data. In addition to this
change, the installation behavior has also changed.
444
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Benefit: Because the original master data is not overwritten when

installing an update, the system can be completely reset to
the factory settings. The original master data can be copied
to the relevant company directories selectively and at any
time.
Original EPLAN master data
For original EPLAN master data (reference master data and examples),
the installation wizard creates version-dependent directories (e.g. for
forms <Directory for Original EPLAN Master Data>\<Version
Number>\Forms\EPLAN).
System master data
The directories for system master data are version-independent. When
installing for the first time or installing EPLAN 2.0 as another EPLAN
version, this means the following:
Initial installation
When installing for the first time, the directories for the system master
data are created when the program is started for the first time. A
directory with the company code specified in the installation (e.g.
<Directory for System Master Data>\Forms\<Company Code>)
is then created for each master data type (e.g. forms) below the
relevant master data directory. The master data from the directories
for the original EPLAN master data is copied into this directory.
Installation of another EPLAN version
If the directory for the system master data and the company code are
unchanged during the installation, the previous system master data
remains unchanged. The new master data will for now only be installed in the new version-dependent directory for the original EPLAN
master data.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
445
Notes:
To update your company-specific master data in this case, perform a
synchronization of the system master data (see page 449).
If you install EPLAN 2.0 as another version of EPLAN, a dialog opens
when you start the program for the first time in which you can opt to
use the settings of the previous version. For more information on this,
see section "Automatically importing the settings of the previous
version" on page 448.
Directory structure after installation

The precise appearance of the directory structure for the installed data
depends on the operating system used and the setting you have specified for the application in the installation wizard. If you selected the
Anyone who uses this computer option, the system master data is
stored in a public folder. If you select the Only for me option, then this
data is stored in the user-specific area of the user currently logged on.
Note:
Please note that this setting cannot be subsequently changed.
Windows XP
Under the Windows XP operating system, the original and the system
master data are stored in the following directory by default:
Anyone who uses this computer:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\EPLAN\<Program Variants>
Only for me:
C:\Documents and Settings\<Your User Name>\Application
Data\EPLAN\<Program Variants>
446
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Example:
Following the installation of EPLAN Electric P8 with the default settings,
the directory structure for the forms described above would look something like this:
Directory for original EPLAN master data:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
EPLAN\EPLAN Electric P8\2.0.5\Forms\EPLAN
Directory for system master data:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
EPLAN\EPLAN Electric P8\Forms\MyCompanyCode
Note:
Please note that to see the application data under Windows XP, you
must make the following settings in Windows Explorer: Select Tools >
Folder options. Open the View tab and in the Advanced settings field
look for the Hidden files and folders folder. Select the Show hidden
files and folders option here. The Application Data folder will now be
visible.
Windows Vista and Windows 7
Under the Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems, the original
EPLAN master data is stored in the following directory by default:
C:\ProgramData\EPLAN\<Program Variants>\<Version
Number>
Only for me:

C:\ProgramData\<Your User Name>\EPLAN\<Program
Variants>\<Version Number>
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
447
Under the Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems, the system
master data is stored in the following directory by default:
C:\Users\Public\EPLAN
Only for me:

C:\Users\<Your user name>\EPLAN
Note:
To see the protected program directory ProgramData, you must enter
%ProgramData% in the Windows Explorer address bar.
Automatically importing the settings of the previous version

If you are installing the current EPLAN version in addition to an existing
version, you now have the opportunity to automatically apply the settings
of the previous version. The first time you start the program, the Import
settings dialog is displayed for this purpose.
Benefit: It is no longer necessary to manually import and export the
various setting ranges. After installation, you can immediately
continue working with your familiar user settings.
In this dialog the check boxes of the User, Workstation, and Company
settings areas are selected by default. [OK] imports the settings of these
areas to the current version, and generates the corresponding settings
databases. In addition to this, the settings for Property arrangement,
Dialog memory, Column configuration, and External programs are
also applied.
Note:
If the new EPLAN version is started via the W3u.EXE file using the
/Quiet parameter, the Import settings dialog is suppressed. In a case
like this, the settings are not applied.
448
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Synchronization with original EPLAN master data

When installing another EPLAN version with unchanged directory settings, the new master data is for the moment only installed in the original
EPLAN master data directories. For example, the original forms are copied to a directory with the designation EPLAN that can be found below
the new version-dependent directory for the original EPLAN master data
(e.g. <Directory for Original EPLAN Master Data>\<Version
Number>\Forms\EPLAN).
To use the new master data, you must first synchronize the system
master data. To do so, copy the original EPLAN master data into your
company-specific directory (e.g. <Directory for System Master
Data>\Forms\<Company Code>). Create the company-specific directories, which will be used by default, in the Company code field during
installation.
Benefit: The option of updating master data means you are less likely
to make mistakes when transferring data. Errors that previously arose when copying data are avoided and data can be
synchronized more quickly.
Synchronizing system master data
Synchronization of the system master data starts in the following situations:
When the program is first started and if you have installed a new
EPLAN version in addition to an existing version.
When the program is first started and if you later install an add-on with
master data.
When you open the dialog for synchronizing system master data via
the Utilities > Master data > Synchronize system master data
menu path.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
449
In the first two cases, the program displays a prompt asking you whether
synchronization should take place immediately. You have the following
options in this dialog:
If you select [User-defined], the master data is loaded, and the
Master data synchronization - system master data dialog opens.
You can then use this dialog to transfer specific EPLAN original
master data to specific targets.
If you select [Yes], the system master data will be synchronized
automatically. Old system master data will be overwritten and nonexistent system master data added.
If you select [No], you can resume your work without synchronizing.
Recommended data backup
A security warning is displayed at the same time as the Master data
synchronization - system master data dialog opens. This warning
reminds you that changes due to synchronization cannot be undone and
recommends that you back up your data beforehand.
Click [No] to exit master data synchronization and switch to data backup.
Click [Yes] to keep the dialog for master data synchronization open and
synchronize data without backing up your data beforehand.
Dialog for synchronizing system master data
Specify which master data is to be updated in your company-specific
directories in the Master data synchronization - system master data
dialog.
450
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Directories:
You can select various directories for master data synchronization from
this drop-down list.
To be able to do this, you must first have saved these directory settings
as a scheme. This may be useful if you are using different master data
directories for different companies / customers. Click [...] to open the
Settings: Directories dialog and create a new scheme for the directories.
Source:
Select the source for the synchronization from this drop-down list. The
list contains all the installed program variants and add-ons, such as
"EPLAN Electric P8", "EPLAN Fluid Addon", and "EPLAN PPE add-on".
System master data / EPLAN master data:
The master data in the company-specific directories are displayed in the
table on the left. The original EPLAN master data is listed in the table on
the right. Click on the Status, Name, Type, or Modification date column
to sort the entries in the tables.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
451
Filter:
Use this drop-down list to set the dialog for synchronizing the master
data so that only specific data is displayed. The following options are
available:
Show differences: When you select this filter, only master data that
exists both in the EPLAN master data for the selected source and in
the system master data in the specified directories and that has the
status "Older" or "Newer" is displayed.
System master data (older): When you select this filter, only master
data that is older than the corresponding EPLAN master data is
displayed in the System master data list.
EPLAN master data (older): When you select this filter, only master
data that is older than the corresponding system master data is
displayed in the EPLAN master data list.
Extensions: When you select this filter, only master data that does
not yet exist in the system master data ("Only in EPLAN master data"
status) is displayed in the EPLAN master data list.
System master data (older) and extensions: Select this filter to
display both system master data that is older than the corresponding
EPLAN master data, and the EPLAN master data that does not yet
exist in the system master data ("Only in EPLAN master data" status).
Select the Active check box to use the selected filter.
Synchronizing data
To transfer specific original EPLAN master data to a specific target, select the data in the EPLAN master data table on the right and click
(Move to the left).
A warning prompt is displayed to ensure you do not accidentally replace
a newer version of a list entry in your system master data with an older
one and you still have the option of canceling the update.
452
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
To update the system master data globally, use the menu items available
below the [Update] button:
System master data (older):
Replaces all outdated system master data with the latest EPLAN
master data.
Extensions:
Adds data that was previously only available in the EPLAN master
data to the system master data.
System master data (older) and extensions:
Replaces all outdated system master data with newer EPLAN master
data and adds data that are not yet available in the system master
data.
Synchronizing project master data
To be able to use the updated system master data in a specific project,
you must then synchronize the project master data for this project with
the system master data.
When the Synchronize project master data when opening project setting is enabled, the Project master data prompt is displayed whenever
you open an "outdated" project. This dialog now has the [User-defined]
button as well which is similar to the prompt for synchronizing system
master data. Use this button to open the dialog for synchronizing project
master data and to transfer specific master data to specific targets. Click
[Yes] to update the project master data automatically as previously.
If you wish to synchronize the project master data later, click [No]. The
menu items for this can be found under Utilities > Master data.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
453
Software Requirements and Approvals

General requirements
The Microsoft .NET framework 3.5 SP1 is required to operate the EPLAN
platform. Further information and the latest version of .NET framework
are available for download from the Microsoft website.
EPLAN recommends that a 64 bit Windows operating system is used.
The EPLAN platform is approved for the following operating systems and
applications:
Client operating systems

Windows XP Professional SP3 (32 bit)
Windows Vista SP2 Enterprise (32 or 64 bit)
Windows Vista SP2 Business N (32 or 64 bit)
Windows Vista SP2 Ultimate (32 or 64 bit)
Windows 7 Professional (32 or 64 bit)
Windows 7 Enterprise (32 or 64 bit)
Windows 7 Ultimate (32 or 64 bit).
Note:
Further information on these operating systems is available on the
Microsoft website.
Server operating systems

Windows Server 2003 SP2 (with all hotfixes and updates)
Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32 or 64 bit)
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit).
454
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Notes:
Please note that the EPLAN platform may not be installed on servers
that run Back Office products from Microsoft (e.g. proxy servers, SQL,
Exchange, Active Directory) or other suppliers (e.g. Lotus Notes,
Linux servers, Novell servers).
Please also bear in mind that the EPLAN License Manager is not
approved for use with virtual operating systems.
EPLAN Mechatronic Integration

EPLAN EMI is approved for the following Inventor products:
AutoCAD Inventor Professional Suite 2010
AutoCAD Inventor Routed Systems Suite 2010
AutoCAD Inventor Professional Suite 2011
AutoCAD Inventor Routed Systems Suite 2011.
Note:
Please also note the relevant hardware requirements when installing
these Inventor products.
Database systems for parts management / selection

Microsoft SQL Server 2005 SP2 Express / Workgroup / Standard or
Enterprise Edition
Microsoft SQL-Server 2008.
The EPLAN platform supports these Microsoft SQL servers for all client
and server operating systems approved by us.
Note:
Other database systems from other manufacturers are not currently
supported.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
455
Microsoft Office Excel versions

Microsoft Office Excel 2003 SP2 and SP3
Microsoft Office Excel 2007 and Excel 2007 SP1.
Internet browsers for the EPLAN Data Portal

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.
Unsupported operating systems

Windows 2000 Professional
The EPLAN platform no longer supports the Windows 2000 Professional
operating system that is no longer supported by Microsoft.
Windows 2000 Server
The EPLAN platform no longer supports the Windows 2000 Server
operating system that is no longer supported by Microsoft. Microsoft has
ceased official support for this operating system.
Note:
Further information on the life cycle of operating systems is available on
the Microsoft website.
EPLAN software no longer supported

Remote Dongle Server 4.3
We are offering a new version of our EPLAN License Manager for the
management of network licenses alongside the new EPLAN platform.
For this reason, Remote Dongle Server 4.3 is no longer supported.
456
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
Other software no longer supported

AutoCAD 2006
EPLAN PPE now has a new P&ID AutoCAD interface that supports
the current versions of AutoCAD 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010. For this
reason, EPLAN no longer supports the AutoCAD 2006 software from
Autodesk.
Hardware Requirements
Workstation hardware requirements
The computer platform is a PC with an Intel Pentium 4 or compatible
processor.
Notes:
The introduction of the enhanced command set SSE2 (Streaming
SIMD Extensions 2) started with the Intel Pentium 4 in 2001. In the
case of AMD processors, this enhancement was introduced with the
Athlon 64 in 2005. If you use a computer system from Intel, the CPU
should be restored to 2002. In the case of AMD processors, the CPU
should be newer than 2005.
If you are using a processor that dates to before 2005, check whether
this processor supports SSE2 command sets. The "CPU-Z" program
allows you to do this. This program can be downloaded free of charge
from http://www.cpuid.com/.
It is preferable to choose a high speed dual-core computer rather than a
quad-core computer at the same price (i.e. a slower machine), as you
will get better performance from the EPLAN platform.
A high speed quad-core processor (which is therefore slightly more
expensive) is optimal since it also offers further potential for the future.
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
457
We advise against choosing a single-core computer (which also includes

a Pentium 4 with its 2 virtual cores).
Recommended workstation configuration

Processor:
Comparable to an Intel Pentium D at 3 GHz or

comparable to an Intel Core 2 Duo at 2.4 GHz
RAM:
4 GB
Hard disk:
160 GB
Monitor / graphics
resolution:
2-screen solution 21" or 16:10 graphics system

with a resolution of 1680 x 1050
3D display:
Graphics card from ATI or Nvidia with the latest

OpenGL driver
Minimum net requirements

As stated in the software requirements and performance, only operate
the server with a Microsoft Windows operating system.
Net transfer rate of the server:
1 Gbits/s
Net transfer rate of the client computer:
100 Mbits/s
Recommended latency period:
< 1 ms
Minimum multi-user requirements

Please contact the EPLAN Support for further information about the
minimum requirements for multi-user operation. We can advise you
individually on the basis of your requirements.
458
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
EPLAN NEWS 2.0
459
460
EPLAN NEWS 2.0

News EPLAN 20 en US PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

News EPLAN 20 en US PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

EPLAN NEWS

for Version 2.0

Copyright 2010 EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG

RITTAL is a registered trademark of Rittal GmbH & Co. KG.

Windows NT , Windows 2000 , Windows XP , Windows Vista , Microsoft Windows , Microsoft

AutoCAD and AutoCAD Inventor are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

InstallShield is a registered trademark of InstallShield, Inc.

TwinCAT is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH.

Unity Pro is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

More User-friendly Interface .............................................................. 18

New Functionalities for Graphical Elements .................................... 24

Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes ................................................. 37

New Features in Dimensioning .......................................................... 41

New Features in the Page Navigator ................................................. 47

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Using Terminals .................................................................................. 53

Optimized Database Structure for Projects ...................................... 69

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On....................................................... 86

Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on ... 97

Graphical Device Tag List ................................................................ 102

Symbols for Complex Devices ......................................................... 113

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension"

New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module ........................................ 127

New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration .......................... 146

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal ......................................... 156

New Features in Device Numbering ................................................ 161

Safety-relevant Functions ................................................................ 164

Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform ........................ 175

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8................................................... 324

Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel .................................................... 342

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Special Topics EPLAN PPE.............................................................. 386

Special Topics EPLAN View ............................................................. 391

New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on................................. 392

New Features in the Master Data ..................................................... 401

Other New Features and Information .............................................. 439

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Notes for the reader

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

More User-friendly Interface

More User-friendly Interface

New Icons with Greater Color Depth

And in comparison, here is the "new" Standard toolbar.

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

More User-friendly Interface

Faster Access via New Mini Toolbars

The mini toolbars give you access to the following functionalities:

More User-friendly Interface

New Repeat Action Menu Option

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

More User-friendly Interface

Adjustable Display in the Title Bar

EPLAN NEWS 2.0

More User-friendly Interface